software operator's manual ianalyze€¦ · 5 configuring on-screen vehicle display vehicle...
TRANSCRIPT
Software Operator's Manual
iAnalyze
Dwg#: 82200101
INTERNATIONAL ROAD DYNAMICS INC.
QUALITY IN MOTION
Software Operator's Manual
iAnalyze
Part No. 82200101
Revision Z
Date: 11/10/2015
International Road Dynamics Inc. reserves the right to alter any of its products or related published
technical data anytime, without notice.
Copyright© 2014 by International Road Dynamics Inc. (IRD)
All rights reserved, including the right to reproduce this document or portions thereof in any
form whatsoever, without written consent of the copyright holder. For information, please
contact IRD at:
Corporate Office U.S. Corporate Office
702 43rd Street 2402 Spring Ridge Drive, Suite E
Saskatoon, Sask. Spring Grove, IL
Canada S7K 3T9 USA 60081
Tel: (306) 653-6600 Ph: 1 (877) 444-4473
Fax: (306) 242-5599 Fax: (815) 675-1530
For further information or assistance, call IRD's Customer Service Hotline
at (306) 653-6626 or Toll Free at (877) 444-4IRD (4473)
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
IANALYZE i
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS ................................................................................................... I
1 ABOUT THIS MANUAL ......................................................................................... 1-1
1.1 Purpose and Scope ..................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 Document Overview .................................................................................... 1-1
1.3 Related Reference Materials ....................................................................... 1-3
1.4 Points of Contact ......................................................................................... 1-3
1.5 Acronyms, Terms and Definitions .............................................................. 1-4
1.5.2.1 WIM Electronics ................................................................................. 1-5
1.5.3.1 Class .................................................................................................. 1-5 1.5.3.2 Errors, Warnings and Violations ........................................................ 1-6 1.5.3.3 Weight ................................................................................................ 1-6
2 INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1 iANALYZE System Overview ...................................................................... 2-1
2.2 Data Sources and Formats .......................................................................... 2-1
2.3 System Requirements ................................................................................. 2-1
2.4 Installing iAnalyze ....................................................................................... 2-2
2.4.1.1 Version 5.0 or later ............................................................................ 2-2
3 NAVIGATING THE IANALYZE SOFTWARE ......................................................... 3-1
3.1 Window Layout ............................................................................................ 3-1
3.1.1.1 Show/Hide Display ............................................................................ 3-2
3.1.2.1 Taskbar Shortcut Keys ...................................................................... 3-2
3.2 Help and Administrative Functions ............................................................ 3-1
4 GETTING STARTED .............................................................................................. 4-1
4.1 Launching the Application .......................................................................... 4-1
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
IANALYZE ii
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
4.2 iANALYZE Site Setup .................................................................................. 4-2
4.2.2.1 Organization Information Panel ......................................................... 4-3
4.2.2.2 Logo Graphics File Panel .................................................................. 4-3 4.2.2.3 Data Operations Buttons ................................................................... 4-4 4.2.2.4 To Add a New Organization .............................................................. 4-4
4.2.3.1 About Classifications ......................................................................... 4-4 4.2.3.2 Classification and Compliance File Types ......................................... 4-5
4.2.3.3 iANALYZE Custom Scheme Location ............................................... 4-5 4.2.3.4 Vehicle Classification Schemes......................................................... 4-6
4.2.4.1 Measurement Systems ...................................................................... 4-7 4.2.4.2 Select Measurement Unit .................................................................. 4-7
5 CONFIGURING ON-SCREEN VEHICLE DISPLAY ............................................... 5-1
5.1 Vehicle Display Wizard ................................................................................ 5-1
5.1.1.1 Select Site .......................................................................................... 5-2 5.1.1.2 Select Data ........................................................................................ 5-2
5.1.2.1 Class Selection .................................................................................. 5-5
5.1.2.2 Select Lane(s).................................................................................... 5-6
5.1.3.1 Vehicles to Display ............................................................................ 5-7
5.1.3.2 Display Format................................................................................... 5-7
5.1.3.3 Vehicle Data ...................................................................................... 5-8
5.2 On-Screen Vehicle Display .......................................................................... 5-8
5.2.1.1 View Vehicles Tab ........................................................................... 5-10 5.2.1.2 Mode ................................................................................................ 5-10
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
IANALYZE iii
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
5.2.1.3 Vehicle Summary Record ................................................................ 5-11
5.3 Printing A Vehicle Record ........................................................................... 5-3
6 CONFIGURING IANALYZE REPORTS ................................................................. 6-1
6.1 Report Wizard: Create Reports Wizard ...................................................... 6-1
6.1.1.1 Select Site .......................................................................................... 6-2 6.1.1.2 Select Data ........................................................................................ 6-2 6.1.1.3 Select Output ..................................................................................... 6-2
6.1.1.4 Select Input: Template ....................................................................... 6-4
6.1.2.1 Select Reports List ............................................................................ 6-6
6.1.2.2 Reports By Classification ................................................................... 6-8
6.1.3.1 Class Selection ................................................................................ 6-12 6.1.3.2 Select Lane(s).................................................................................. 6-13
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
IANALYZE iv
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
6.1.3.3 Traffic Data ...................................................................................... 6-13
6.1.3.4 Lane Grouping ................................................................................. 6-14 6.1.3.5 Interval ............................................................................................. 6-14 6.1.3.6 Set Chart Option… .......................................................................... 6-15
6.1.3.7 Set Parameters… ............................................................................ 6-15
6.2 Generating a Report .................................................................................. 6-16
6.2.1.1 Report Display Window ................................................................... 6-17
6.2.2.1 Traffic Data Reference Terminology ............................................... 6-20 6.2.2.2 Report Ranges and Unit Selection .................................................. 6-21 6.2.2.3 Report Types and Range Selection ................................................ 6-22
6.2.3.1 Report Header ................................................................................. 6-23
6.2.3.2 Report Detail Format ....................................................................... 6-25
6.2.3.3 Footers ............................................................................................. 6-27
7 CONFIGURING REPORT PARAMETERS............................................................. 7-1
7.1 Report Parameters Window ........................................................................ 7-1
7.1.1.1 Close .................................................................................................. 7-2
7.1.1.2 Save & Close ..................................................................................... 7-2 7.1.1.3 Save ................................................................................................... 7-2 7.1.1.4 Reset ................................................................................................. 7-2
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
IANALYZE v
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
7.1.1.5 Reset All ............................................................................................ 7-3
7.1.2.1 Show Only User Configurable Reports ............................................. 7-4
7.1.3.1 Parameter Entry Panels .................................................................... 7-5
8 CREATING REPORT TEMPLATES ...................................................................... 8-1
8.1 The Template Editor .................................................................................... 8-1
8.1.1.1 Template ............................................................................................ 8-2
8.1.1.2 Select Output ..................................................................................... 8-3
8.2 Generating a Report From Template .......................................................... 8-3
9 THE SITE EDITOR: CONFIGURING SITE SPECIFICS ......................................... 9-1
9.1 Site Editor Operations ................................................................................. 9-2
9.2 Specifying Site Name and ID ....................................................................... 9-2
9.3 Establishing Site Directories ...................................................................... 9-5
9.3.2.1 Image Directory Considerations ........................................................ 9-5
9.4 Configuring Vehicle Timestamp ................................................................. 9-6
9.4.1.1 Determining A Precise Time Stamp Value ........................................ 9-6
9.5 Selecting a Data Source .............................................................................. 9-7
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
IANALYZE vi
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
9.6 Specifying Lane Information ....................................................................... 9-9
9.7 Additional Site Reporting Defaults ............................................................. 9-9
9.7.3.1 ESAL Methods ................................................................................. 9-12
9.7.3.2 AASHTO Inputs Pane ...................................................................... 9-14
9.7.3.3 General Inputs Pane ........................................................................ 9-16 9.7.3.4 Use ESAL Values Calculated On Site ............................................. 9-16
9.7.7.1 DAW 100 Data Settings ................................................................... 9-22 9.7.7.2 TRS WIM Data Settings .................................................................. 9-22
9.8 Configuring FHWA TMG Exports Information ......................................... 9-24
9.8.1.1 Lane/ Dir of Travel ........................................................................... 9-25 9.8.1.2 Traffic volume: ................................................................................. 9-25 9.8.1.3 Classification:................................................................................... 9-26 9.8.1.4 Truck Weight:................................................................................... 9-27
9.8.2.1 Route Signing .................................................................................. 9-31
10 LANGUAGE FILES .............................................................................................. 10-1
10.1 How iANALYZE Uses Language Files ...................................................... 10-1
10.2 Opening a Language File .......................................................................... 10-1
10.3 Modifying a Language File ........................................................................ 10-2
10.4 Value Fields ................................................................................................ 10-3
10.4.5.1 Shared Alt-Key Commands ............................................................. 10-4
10.5 Creating Resource Files ............................................................................ 10-4
10.6 iANALYZE Usage of Language Files ........................................................ 10-5
10.6.1.1 Gregorian Calendar Setting ............................................................. 10-6
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
IANALYZE vii
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
APPENDICES ............................................................................................................. A-1
APPENDIX A IANALYZE INSTALLATION NOTES ................................................ A-1
Preserved Installation Settings .................................................................. A-1
.NET Framework and Crystal Reports Runtime Library ........................... A-1
iANALYZE Operator’s Manual .................................................................... A-2
iANALYZE Installation Steps ..................................................................... A-2
APPENDIX B IANALYZE COMMAND LINE INTERFACE ...................................... B-1
Command Line Syntax ............................................................................... B-1
Command Line Parameters ........................................................................ B-1
Output FileName Syntax ............................................................................ B-2
Command Line and Custom Reports ........................................................ B-2
Command Line and Template Files ........................................................... B-4
Creating a Batch File .................................................................................. B-5
APPENDIX C CHART TYPE EXAMPLES ............................................................... C-1
APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS ...................................................................... D-1
Summary ..................................................................................................... D-1
Class .......................................................................................................... D-10
Lane ........................................................................................................... D-19
Volume....................................................................................................... D-27
Peaks ......................................................................................................... D-29
Speed ......................................................................................................... D-41
Length ....................................................................................................... D-46
Error / Status ............................................................................................. D-49
FHWA ......................................................................................................... D-70
MEPDG ...................................................................................................... D-97
Weight ....................................................................................................... D-99
Weight Violation ...................................................................................... D-122
IRD ASCII ................................................................................................. D-131
ESAL ........................................................................................................ D-133
Safety System ......................................................................................... D-137
Road Condition ....................................................................................... D-144
External Data Items CSV ........................................................................ D-158
CTWIM ..................................................................................................... D-162
Other ........................................................................................................ D-175
APPENDIX E CUSTOM REPORTS ........................................................................ E-1
Custom ........................................................................................................ E-1
Custom-Data Validity Checks .................................................................. E-53
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
IANALYZE viii
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
APPENDIX F STATUS AND ERROR MESSAGES ................................................ F-1
WIM Status Conditions ............................................................................... F-1
Credential Status Conditions ..................................................................... F-3
Sort Decision Status States ....................................................................... F-4
Error Status Conditions ............................................................................. F-4
APPENDIX G LANGUAGE AND COUNTRY CODES ............................................. G-1
Language Codes ......................................................................................... G-1
Country Codes ............................................................................................ G-4
APPENDIX H FHWA VEHICLE CLASSES ............................................................. H-1
APPENDIX I TC/C-540 CONFIGURATION .............................................................. I-1
System Configuration ................................................................................... I-1
Axle Classification: Default.AXL Settings ................................................... I-2
Speed Classification: Default.SPD Settings................................................ I-3
Length Classification: Default Settings ....................................................... I-3
Headway Classification: Default Settings ................................................... I-3
Gap Classification: Default Settings ........................................................... I-3
TC/C-540 Lane Configuration ....................................................................... I-3
Reports Not Compatible with TC/C-540 Data .............................................. I-4
APPENDIX J CONVERT DOS OFFICE ................................................................... J-1
APPENDIX K WHAT’S NEW .................................................................................. K-1
Revision Descriptions ................................................................................ K-1
Revision History ......................................................................................... K-5
APPENDIX L LIST OF FIGURES, REPORTS AND TABLES ................................. L-1
List of Figures ............................................................................................. L-1
List of Tables............................................................................................... L-3
List of Reports ............................................................................................ L-3
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL ABOUT THIS MANUAL
IANALYZE PAGE 1-1
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
1 ABOUT THIS MANUAL
1.1 PURPOSE AND SCOPE This manual provides a detailed description of the iANALYZE software application, detailing functions and procedures performed at the Operator Workstation.
1.2 DOCUMENT OVERVIEW
Section Section Overview:
1 About this Manual
Purpose and Scope
Document Overview
Related Reference Materials
Points of Contact
Acronyms, Terms and Definitions
2 Introduction
Window Layout Help and Administrative Functions
3 Navigating the iANALYZE Software
Window Layout
Help and Administrative Functions
4 Getting Started
Launching the Application
iANALYZE Site Setup
5 Configuring On-Screen Vehicle Display
Vehicle Display Wizard
On-Screen Vehicle Display
Printing a Vehicle Record
6 Configuring iANALYZE Reports
Report Wizard: Create Reports Wizard
Generating a Report
7 Configuring Report Parameters
Report Parameters Window
8 Creating Report Templates
The Template Editor Generating a Report From Template
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL ABOUT THIS MANUAL
IANALYZE PAGE 1-2
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Section Section Overview:
9 The Site Editor: Configuring Site Specifics
Site Editor Operations
Specifying Site Name and ID
Establishing Site Directories
Configuring Vehicle Timestamp
Selecting a Data Source
Specifying Lane Information
Additional Site Reporting Defaults
Configuring FHWA TMG Exports Information
10 Language Files
How iANALYZE Uses Language Files Opening a Language File
Modifying a Language File Value Fields
Creating Resource Files
iANALYZE Usage of Language Files
Appendices:
A: iANALYZE Installation Notes B: iANALYZE Command Line Interface
C: Chart Type Examples
D: iANALYZE Reports
E: Custom Reports F: Status and Error Messages
G: Language and Country Codes
H: FHWA Vehicle Classes
I: TC/C-540 Configuration
J: Convert DOS Office
K: What’s New L: List of Figures, Reports and Tables
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL ABOUT THIS MANUAL
IANALYZE PAGE 1-3
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
DOCUMENT CONVENTIONS
Indicates Important information about equipment or procedures that can impact future decisions and/or actions.
It is imperative that you read and understand the instructions in this manual. Failure to follow the instructions or heed the warnings could result in compromised performance or results.
Indicates a best practice procedure.
Indicates a potentially concerning situation that, if not avoided, may result in minor to moderate loss of data or software functionality.
1.3 RELATED REFERENCE MATERIALS Web
www.irdinc.com
http://www.fhwa.dot.gov/policyinformation/tmguide/
IRD Documentation
See IRD Manuals provided for this site.
Other Document Sources
FHWA Traffic Monitoring Guide, 2013 edition
FHWA Traffic Monitoring Guide, 2001 edition available at the same link.
AASHTO Guide for Design of Pavement Structures, 1986
1.4 POINTS OF CONTACT For clarification of any material appearing in the Manual or if any problems are encountered during daily operations, contact the Customer Service Hotline of International Road Dynamics Inc. at the number shown below.
Customer Service Hotline: (306) 653-6626
Toll Free: 1 (877) 444-4473
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL ABOUT THIS MANUAL
IANALYZE PAGE 1-4
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
1.5 ACRONYMS, TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
ACRONYMS
IRD List of Abbreviations
Abbrev. Refers To
ALPR Automatic License Plate Reader
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
AUR Automatic USDOT Number Reader
AVI Automatic Vehicle Identification
CSV Comma Separated Value
CVIEW Commercial Vehicle Information Exchange Window
CVISN Commercial Vehicles Information Systems Network
CVO Commercial Vehicle Operations
ESAL Equivalent Single Axle Load
FAW Front Axle Weight
FHWA Federal Highways Association
GVW Gross Vehicle Weight
IFTA International Fuel Tax Agreement
iSINC Intelligent Sensor Interface and Network Controller
ITS Intelligent Transportation System
LCS Lane Control Signals
LSM Loop Sensor Module
MEPDG Mechanistic Empirical Pavement Design Guide
NCIC National Crime Information Center
NTCIP National Transportation Communication Interface Protocol
PLC Programmable Logic Controller
PRISM Performance and Registration Information Systems Management
SAFER Safety and Fitness Electronic Records
SLC Single Load Cell
SSM Scale Sensor Module
UPS Uninterrupted Power Supply
USDOT United States Department Of Transportation
VMS Variable Message Sign
VMSS Vehicle Monitoring and Signal System
WCU WIM Control Unit
WIM Weigh in Motion
WSB Weigh Station Bypass
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL ABOUT THIS MANUAL
IANALYZE PAGE 1-5
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
DEFINITIONS
1.5.2.1 WIM Electronics
TERMS
1.5.3.1 Class
Passenger Vehicle Any vehicle meeting criteria for Classes 1 through 3 in the FHWA Classification Scheme. See Appendix H: FHWA Vehicle Classes.
Commercial Vehicle Truck; Any vehicle meeting criteria for Class 4 and above in the FHWA Classification Scheme. See Appendix H: FHWA Vehicle Classes.
Unclassified Vehicle Any vehicle specification that does not match any criteria for the designated classification scheme.
Roadside Cabinet
Houses WIM system electronics:
• iSINC® control unit.
• Sensor interface equipment.
• Communications equipment; and a
• Power supply.
WIM Electronics
Located in roadside cabinets; interprets vehicledata captured via sensors.
Automatically calculates:
• speed, weight, length; and
• distance between axles.
WIM iSINC®
Intelligent Sensor Interface and Network Controller:
• Accepts sensor inputs; processes theminto weights, distances and speeds.
• Compiles information into a vehicle record; and
• Performs as the network server.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL ABOUT THIS MANUAL
IANALYZE PAGE 1-6
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
1.5.3.2 Errors, Warnings and Violations
Non-Error Vehicle A vehicle for which a compliance check has returned no error condition. For a list of error conditions and codes, See Appendix F.4: Error Status Conditions.
Error Vehicle A vehicle for which a compliance check has returned an error condition. For a list of error conditions and codes, see Appendix F.4: Error Status Conditions.
WIM Status A warning message associated with and generated upon the determination of a potential WIM violation condition. For a list of WIM status messages and descriptions, See Appendix F.1: WIM Status Conditions.
Warning Status A subset of WIM Status, above.
Status Set A collection of one or more WIM Status conditions. See Appendix F.1: WIM Status Conditions.
Status Clear Vehicle A vehicle for which no WIM status condition is present.
Violation Vehicle A vehicle for which a compliance check has confirmed a WIM Status or a credential non-compliance condition.
Credential Status A status indicator of a credential compliant/non-compliant state. See Appendix F.2: Credential Status Conditions.
Sort Decision Status A status indicator of the sorter decision assigned to a vehicle passing through WIM system. See Appendix F.3: Sort Decision Status States.
1.5.3.3 Weight
Weighed Vehicle A vehicle for which weight data is present.
No-Weight Vehicle A vehicle for which a weight measurement has not been acquired.
Valid Weight Vehicle A vehicle for which a verifiable and accurate non-error weight measurement has been acquired.
Good Weight Vehicle A Valid Weight and Status Clear vehicle; or a Valid Weight with WIM Status - Good Weight Exceptions. See Appendix F.1: WIM Status Conditions.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL INTRODUCTION
IANALYZE PAGE 2-1
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
2 INTRODUCTION
2.1 IANALYZE SYSTEM OVERVIEW
IRD iANALYZE®5 is a software program that facilitates management, analysis and report generation of traffic data collected by Traffic Counters, Classifiers, IRD Virtual Weigh Station Systems, and WIM (Weigh-In-Motion) systems.
FEATURES
Enhanced vehicle data and record processing with the ability to process more than one year of data.
Comprehensive reporting including FHWA Traffic Management Guide (TMG) standard reports.
Automatic export of ASCII reports (including all FHWA TMG reports) to file.
Easy data export to Adobe and Microsoft applications including Excel, Access, and Word.
Intuitive interface with built-in guides for standard tasks.
Multi-language capability.
2.2 DATA SOURCES AND FORMATS
iANALYZE software can process traffic data files from the following IRD systems:
1060 Series Weigh-In-Motion System, Rev 8 - Rev 11 formats (inclusive)
iSINC Data Gathering System
DAW 190 US WIM Systems
TC/C-540 Data Gathering System
See Appendix I TC/C-540 Configuration for information on configuring the TC/C-540 to produce data files in the format required by iANALYZE.
TRSWIM
2.3 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
SOFTWARE
This software runs on a 32 or 64 bit stand-alone/networked computer and is compatible with the following operating systems:
Microsoft Windows XP
Server 2003
Server 2008
Vista
Windows 7
Windows 8
Windows 10
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL INTRODUCTION
IANALYZE PAGE 2-2
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
HARDWARE
The minimum hardware requirements depend on:
Size of the data files to be processed; and
.Net Framework System Version
Hardware Requirements Version 4 Full
Processor Minimum 1 GHz Recommended 1 GHz & higher
RAM Minimum 512 MB
Recommended 2 GB
Meeting minimum hardware requirements only results in slower performance.
2.4 INSTALLING IANALYZE
The iANALYZE software cannot exist on the same machine as a previously installed version of the iANALYZE software or iANALYZE Demo software.
Uninstall any previous iANALYZE software version before proceeding with a new installation (see Appendix A iANALYZE Installation Notes).
To install iANALYZE:
1. Insert the CD in the CD drive; the automatic installation routine should start.
If the auto installer does not start, manually navigate to the CD directory.
2. Follow the steps as directed from the installation window.
On a 64 Bit operating system, double-click Setup64.exe.
On a 32-Bit edition, or if you do not know the operating system edition, double-click Setup.exe to run the installation.
See Appendix A iANALYZE Installation Notes for more information.
IANALYZE VERSION NOTES
2.4.1.1 Version 5.0 or later
User relevant files and settings are stored in the common documents folder determined by the computer operating system.
Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Documents\IRD\iAnalyze
Vista/Windows 7/8: C:\Users\Public\Public Documents\IRD\iAnalyze
Windows 10: C:\Users\Public\Public Documents\IRD\iAnalyze
User relevant files and settings are stored in the following folders:
Classify, Culture, Log, Params, Reports, Veh_Rec
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL NAVIGATING THE IANALYZE SOFTWARE
IANALYZE PAGE 3-1
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
3 NAVIGATING THE IANALYZE SOFTWARE
3.1 WINDOW LAYOUT The iANALYZE Window is composed of the following layout elements:
Window Header
Main Taskbar
Page Tabs
Panels; and associated Dialogue Area;
Status Bar
Figure 3-1 iANALYZE Window: Layout Elements
1
2
3
4
5
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL NAVIGATING THE IANALYZE SOFTWARE
IANALYZE PAGE 3-2
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
WINDOW HEADER
3.1.1.1 Show/Hide Display
Collapse Header/ Show Header: The header may be collapsed as desired to create display room for more pertinent information.
To collapse the iANALYZE window header:
1. Right click anywhere in the window header; a Collapse Header button appears.
Figure 3-2 Collapse Header
2. Click the Collapse Header button to hide the window header.
To return the header display:
1. Right-click anywhere in the Main Taskbar, Figure 3-3 (below) to display the Show Header button.
2. Click the Show Header button to expand the window header.
MAIN TASKBAR
Figure 3-3 Main Taskbar
The Main Taskbar is used to access iANALYZE functions and features.
Taskbar display changes contextually depending on current function/feature selection.
The button associated with the current display does not appear on the taskbar.
In Figure 3-3 above, the Create Reports Wizard button is not displayed.
To select a function:
Click the desired function button on the Main Taskbar.
3.1.2.1 Taskbar Shortcut Keys
Shortcut keys may also be used in the selection of functions and features. The underlined character of any option identifies the designated hotkey.
To select a function with a shortcut key:
1. Press and hold the ALT key.
2. While holding the ALT key down, press the hot key (underlined letter).
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL NAVIGATING THE IANALYZE SOFTWARE
IANALYZE PAGE 3-3
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
TAB NAVIGATION BAR
Numerous windows may be open concurrently.
When the tabbed display requires more space than the size of the application window, navigation scrolling arrows appear on the left and right side of the tabs.
To display tabs not currently visible:
Click the left or right arrow to scroll through open tabs.
To Close a tab:
Click the tab close button .
To Close All tabs:
Right-click on any tab and click Close all tabs.
PAGE TABS, PANELS AND DIALOGUES
Figure 3-4 Window Dialogue Sample
Page Tab Provides access to one or more associated panes, panels and dialogues for specifying parameters.
Panel Separates and organizes functional features.
1
3
2
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL NAVIGATING THE IANALYZE SOFTWARE
IANALYZE PAGE 3-4
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Panel Options Provides options specific to the current panel selection.
Dialogue parameters are set/selected via:
Dropdown List Box
Check Box
Input Box
Radio Button
Calendar Picker
Operations Buttons
STATUS BAR
Figure 3-5 Status Bar
The status bar reflects currently applied option/parameter settings:
In Figure 3-5 above, the current settings are:
Current Window Create Reports See 6.1 Report Wizard: Create Reports Wizard.
Units Metric See 4.2.4 Specifying Measurement Units.
Current Report Classification Scheme FHWA_DOS See 4.2.3 Selecting Vehicle Classification Scheme.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL NAVIGATING THE IANALYZE SOFTWARE
IANALYZE PAGE 3-1
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
3.2 HELP AND ADMINISTRATIVE FUNCTIONS
Figure 3-6 Help and Admin Functions
The iANALYZE Main Taskbar contains three (3) options that provide access to relevant help and information resources:
About
Manual
Update
ABOUT
Figure 3-7 iANALYZE About Window
The About window (above) displays the following information:
IRD Part Number, Release Version of this software and indicator of whether iANALYZE is running as a 32-bit or a 64-bit application.
Build Number for the code.
The Language File currently in use; See section 10 Language Files for a detailed description of these files and their respective settings.
To display iANALYZE system information:
1. From the iANALYZE Main Taskbar, click .
2. To close the About window, left-click anywhere on the About window.
MANUAL
Help can be quickly accessed from the iANALYZE application.
To display the iANALYZE Operator’s Manual:
From the iANALYZE Main Taskbar, click .
MANUAL.pdf As part of the CD installation process, the iANALYZE Software Operator’s Manual (PDF format), is placed in the following directory:
C:\Users\Public\Public Documents\IRD\iANALYZE
The manual is also available for download from the IRD website:
http://www.irdinc.com/pcategory/software/software-download.html
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL NAVIGATING THE IANALYZE SOFTWARE
IANALYZE PAGE 3-2
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
UPDATE
The Update button is linked to the IRD website:
http://www.irdinc.com/pcategory/software/software-download.html
To open the IRD Software Download page:
From the iANALYZE Main Taskbar, click .
To determine when a software update is necessary:
Compare the iANALYZE version number displayed in the About window with the most current version available from the website.
To update your iANALYZE software:
1. Contact IRD at [email protected] to request the version update.
A password will be provided for the installation zip file.
2. Download the update from the Software Download page.
3. When prompted, enter the supplied password to open the downloaded zip file and install the update.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL GETTING STARTED
IANALYZE PAGE 4-1
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
4 GETTING STARTED
4.1 LAUNCHING THE APPLICATION
To start the iANALYZE program:
1. Double-click the desktop shortcut icon:
or navigate to the iANALYZE directory and double-click iANALYZEG.exe.
The iANALYZE About window displays briefly.
Initially, when sites have not been defined, a warning message is displayed:
Figure 4-1 No Sites Message
2. Click OK. Launching iANALYZE for the first time displays the Site Editor:
Figure 4-2 Initial iANALYZE Launch: Site Editor
Once a site has been created, starting the iANALYZE application will automatically display the Create Report Wizards window.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL GETTING STARTED
IANALYZE PAGE 4-2
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
4.2 IANALYZE SITE SETUP This section briefly describes initial procedures for customizing/configuring an iANALYZE site.
Initial site setup procedures include:
Adding a Site Specifying Organization Detail Selecting Site Classification Scheme; and Specifying Measurement Units
ADDING A SITE: SITE EDITOR
The Site Editor (Figure 4-2, above) is used to create new sites and edit existing sites.
For a complete description of adding and configuring a site, see section 9. The Site Editor: Configuring Site Specifics.
SPECIFYING ORGANIZATION DETAIL: USER INFORMATION
Figure 4-3 User Information Window
Organization/Company detail is configured for Report Headers through the iANALYZE User Information window.
Until user information has been defined, a warning message is generated (left), and will continue to be displayed every time a report is initiated.
Click OK to continue on to the User Information window.
Figure 4-4 Load User Info Failed Message
1
2
3
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL GETTING STARTED
IANALYZE PAGE 4-3
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
The User Information window displays the:
Organization Information panel
Logo Graphics File panel; and
Data Operations Buttons (2).
4.2.2.1 Organization Information Panel
Figure 4-5 Organization Information Pane
There are two (2) formats for Report Headers: Text and Graphics File
Text
Text Click Text; and
Enter/ Edit text to be displayed in the Report Header.
Graphics File
Graphics File Click Graphics File; and
Type the file path and name for the graphic image; or
Click to locate the desired graphics file.
File Formats Recognized graphic formats: .bmp .jpg, .tif, .png
Default Dimensions 138 mm wide x 4 mm high
The graphics file is automatically resized to fit these dimensions, regardless of the initial values.
Using height to width proportions different from those of the default will result in graphic distortion.
For a 300 dpi printer, the given dimensions would match an image 1630 pixels wide by 48 pixels high; this size or multiples thereof are recommended.
4.2.2.2 Logo Graphics File Panel
In addition to the organization information above, a corporate logo image may also be included (affixed to the top left corner of the Report Header).
Figure 4-6 Logo Graphics File
Type the file path and name; or
Click to locate the desired Logo file.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL GETTING STARTED
IANALYZE PAGE 4-4
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Default Logo: IRD Logo image
File Formats Recognized graphic formats: .bmp .jpg, .tif, .png
Default Dimensions 26 mm wide x 24 mm high
The graphics file is automatically resized to fit these dimensions, regardless of the initial values.
Using height to width proportions different from those of the default (13 to 12 ratio) will result in graphic distortion.
For a 300 dpi printer, the given dimensions would match an image 312 pixels wide by 288 pixels high; this size or multiples thereof are recommended.
4.2.2.3 Data Operations Buttons
Click Browse to navigate to available directory locations for file selection.
Click to Save and apply configured options.
4.2.2.4 To Add a New Organization
1. Click the desired Organization Information format.
2. Specify report header content:
Text: Type the desired text; or
Graphics File: Type path and filename or browse to locate and select file.
3. Specify a Company Logo Image:
Type path and filename or browse to locate and select Company Logo image.
4. Click Save.
SELECTING VEHICLE CLASSIFICATION SCHEME
4.2.3.1 About Classifications
Classification schemes sort vehicles into groups based on specific details of vehicle data:
number of axles axle spacing axle weight; and GVW
A classification and compliance scheme is typically associated with weight regulations and restrictions for a state or jurisdiction; such schemes are defined by regulatory agencies and apply to the corresponding region of authority.
Custom classification and compliance schemes may also be developed for a site or jurisdiction.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL GETTING STARTED
IANALYZE PAGE 4-5
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
A commonly used scheme in the U.S.A. is the FHWA National Standard (below).
FHWA National Standard - USA
Vehicle Class Vehicle Description
1 Motorcycle
2 Passenger Cars
3 Other Two-Axle, Four-Tire Single Unit Vehicles
4 Buses
5 Two-Axle, Six-Tire, Single Unit Trucks
6 Three-Axle Single Unit Trucks
7 Four or More Axle Single Unit Trucks
8 Four or Less Axle Single Trailer Trucks
9 Five-Axle Single Trailer Trucks
10 Six or More Axle Single Trailer Trucks
11 Five or Less Axle Multi-Trailer Trucks
12 Six-Axle Multi-Trailer Trucks 13 Seven or More Axle Multi-Trailer Trucks
Table 1 Vehicle Classification FHWA National Standard
4.2.3.2 Classification and Compliance File Types
Three (3) files extensions are associated with each scheme.
i.e. Files required for the FHWA_DOS classification scheme are:
fhwa_dos.cpl
fhwa_dos.tbl; and
fhwa_dos.typ
All three files are linked to one another.
Classification schemes include required files for checking vehicle weight regulation compliance; when not required, only one file extension (.typ) is present.
TYP
.typ Contains information about classifying vehicles into categories/ groups.
CPL
.cpl Related to defining weight regulations and restrictions.
TBL
.tbl Related to defining weight regulations and restrictions.
4.2.3.3 iANALYZE Custom Scheme Location
Custom classification schemes developed for a site or jurisdiction are added by saving the files to the Classify folder in the following directory:
Windows 7/8: C:\Users\Public\Public Documents\IRD\iANALYZE\Classify
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL GETTING STARTED
IANALYZE PAGE 4-6
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
4.2.3.4 Vehicle Classification Schemes
Figure 4-7 Vehicle Classification Schemes Window
Vehicle classification schemes are selected through the iANALYZE Vehicle Classification Schemes window.
This window displays:
Classification Scheme, Classification Type; and a Data Operations Button.
Select Classification and Scheme Type
Choose Scheme Click the site appropriate Scheme from the list box.
Scheme Type
Choose Type Click the associated Scheme Type.
FHWA_DOS – DOS LTPP_2013 – Unix/iSINC TRS_CLASS – Unix/iSINC®
Should the wrong scheme type be selected an error message is generated:
Click OK to reselect scheme type.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL GETTING STARTED
IANALYZE PAGE 4-7
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Data Operations Button
Click OK to apply the selected scheme and classification.
SPECIFYING MEASUREMENT UNITS
4.2.4.1 Measurement Systems
Metric Used for standard Metric reporting
KIPS/Feet Measured in 1000’s of Feet
Pounds/Inches Used for Standard Imperial reporting
The following table specifies common measurement Units for each measurement system:
Measurement Metric Unit KIPS / Feet Pounds / Inches
Speed kph mph mph
Vehicle Length meters feet inches
GVW tonnes
(1000 Kg) KIPS
(1000’s of pounds) pounds
Axle Weight kg KIPS pounds
Axle Spacing cm feet (to one
decimal place) inches
Temperature °C °F °F
Table 2 Unit Measurements
4.2.4.2 Select Measurement Unit
Unit measurement is set with the Units option from the iANALYZE Status Bar.
Units may be changed to accommodate reporting requirements.
To specify unit settings for iANALYZE reports:
From the iANALYZE status bar,
1. Click the Units dropdown to display measurement units.
2. Click the desired unit.
The selected measurement unit will be used in subsequent reporting displays.
It is very important that the ranges selected for report parameters are aligned with the selected measurement units.
If no data or highly skewed data appears in a report, ensure the parameter ranges are appropriate for the selected measurement unit.
Figure 4-8 Measurement Units
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL CONFIGURING ON-SCREEN VEHICLE DISPLAY
IANALYZE PAGE 5-1
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
5 CONFIGURING ON-SCREEN VEHICLE DISPLAY iANALYZE provides the ability to quickly generate vehicle record summary display for on-screen viewing.
To open the Vehicle Display Wizard:
From the iANALYZE Main Taskbar,
Click
5.1 VEHICLE DISPLAY WIZARD
Figure 5-1 Vehicle Display Wizard: Site/ Data Page
The Vehicle Display Wizard window provides for the specification, customization and generation of vehicle summary display scenarios.
There are three (3) tabbed pages containing parameter setting dialogues:
Site /Data
Class / Lanes; and
Display Settings
To navigate pages: Click the page tab; or
Click the and buttons.
1
2
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL CONFIGURING ON-SCREEN VEHICLE DISPLAY
IANALYZE PAGE 5-2
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
To generate the on-screen vehicle display:
1. Enter/edit the desired display reporting parameters for all page dialogues.
2. Click OK to run the configured on-screen vehicle display.
See section 5.2.1 On-Screen Vehicle Summary Report for a detailed description.
SPECIFY SITE / DATA
The Site / Data page dialogue is used to establish the specific site and data selection for the current vehicle display.
Two (2) option panels (see Figure 5-1, above) are displayed:
Select Site; and
Select Data
5.1.1.1 Select Site
The site name should always be selected first.
To select the reporting site:
1. Click the down arrow to display a drop down list of all site names.
See section 9 The Site Editor: Configuring Site Specifics for more detail on creating (adding) a site.
2. Click the desired site identifier.
Changing the site name after other parameters have been entered results in clearing the selection(s). The panel is subsequently refreshed with the most recently used parameter settings.
5.1.1.2 Select Data
The data to be gathered for a report is determined by choosing one of the following selection formats from the Select Data option group:
Click to specify a start and end Date/Time range.
Click to manually select Data Files from a selected directory.
Click to select All Files from the default data directory.
Only one data gathering option is available per report.
The most recently used settings appear until modified.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL CONFIGURING ON-SCREEN VEHICLE DISPLAY
IANALYZE PAGE 5-3
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Select Dates & Times
Click Select Dates & Times.
the Start and End options become active.
Specify Start/End Dates/Times:
Start/End: Date Format: MMM:DD:YYYY Mar 24, 2015
Type the start date; or
Click the drop down arrow to display the date picker.
Click the desired Month/Day from the calendar display.
Time Format: HH:MM:SS Displayed in 24-hour clock format.
00:00:00
Type the desired hours/minutes/seconds for the report start time.
Start time is inclusive; records matching the specified time are included in the report.
End time is exclusive; records matching the specified time are not included in the report.
Report Date Range Example:
Required Report: For the entire day of March 24th, 2015
Start: Mar 24, 2015 00:00:00 (midnight March 24th)
End: Mar 25, 2015 00:00:00 (midnight March 25th)
iANALYZE can process up to and including a year of data.
Choose Data Files
Click Choose Data Files.
Recently selected files (if any) from the data directory of the current site are displayed in this list box.
To manually select data files:
1. Click to display the Open files window of the current site directory.
2. Select files to be used in the report.
Tip: Hold down the CTRL key and click to select multiple files.
To locate data files in another site, navigate through the directories using the Look in: drop down list.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL CONFIGURING ON-SCREEN VEHICLE DISPLAY
IANALYZE PAGE 5-4
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
iSINC and 1060 data files with a file extension that does not match the Site ID exactly will not be listed.
For TCC 540 and TRS data:
in the browse window,
Files of Type: *.* (all files) must be selected to display the complete list of files.
DAW files can be one of two formats:
D<Site ID>MMDD.YY; or
YYYYMMDD.<Site ID>
For a DAW Site:
The Files of type: dropdown list displays three options:
D<Site ID>*.*
*.<Site ID>
*.*
Use All Files in Data Directory
Click Use All Files.
The report includes all files in the specified data directory for the selected site.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL CONFIGURING ON-SCREEN VEHICLE DISPLAY
IANALYZE PAGE 5-5
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
CLASS / LANES
Figure 5-2 Vehicle Display Wizard: Class/Lanes Page
The Class / Lanes page provides the following options panels for determining how vehicle data is grouped and formatted:
Class Selection; and
Select Lanes
5.1.2.1 Class Selection
Start/End Class
Two (2) range parameters control the selection/display of vehicle classes for a report.
Start Class must be less than or equal to the End Class.
Start Class Lowest Vehicle class identifier in range.
End Class Highest vehicle class identifier in range.
Type the class number or use the spin box arrows to increment/decrement values.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL CONFIGURING ON-SCREEN VEHICLE DISPLAY
IANALYZE PAGE 5-6
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Use Class/Allowable Weights from Site
Used for Per Vehicle data reporting.
Selecting this option can speed up report production.
Click checkbox to enable onsite system vehicle classification and overweight check (if available) rather than iANALYZE reclassification and weight compliance check.
5.1.2.2 Select Lane(s)
Specifies the lane(s) from which data will gathered.
Click the Lane # checkbox to select/deselect a lane.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Figure 5-3 Vehicle Display Wizard: Display Settings Page
The Display Settings page provides the following option panels for specifying:
Vehicles to Display (selection filters)
Display Format; and
Vehicle Data (sort decision display).
1
3
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL CONFIGURING ON-SCREEN VEHICLE DISPLAY
IANALYZE PAGE 5-7
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
5.1.3.1 Vehicles to Display
The Vehicles to Display pane displays vehicle filtering categories.
To select a vehicle display filter:
Click the desired display category.
Only one filter may be applied at a time.
Vehicle Display Filter Categories
All Vehicles All records for time range, classes and lanes selected.
Good Weight Vehicles Vehicle records with:
No Weighing Errors (Valid Weight) AND Status Clear (No Warnings); OR Good Weight Status Exceptions.
Figure 5-4 Example: Good Weight Status Exceptions
See section 1.5.3.3 Weight for a Good Weight Vehicle Definition. See Appendix F.1: WIM Status Conditions for Good Weight Status Exceptions.
Error/Warning Vehicles Vehicle records generating an error or warning.
Violating Vehicles Only Vehicle records generating a violation warning.
Top 100 Over GVWs Up to and including 100 over GVW vehicles for the period selected; listed in the order of amount by which GVW exceeds the allowed class limit (most overweight first).
All Over GVW All vehicles over the allowed GVW for their class.
5.1.3.2 Display Format
Vehicle record data may be displayed in one of two formats:
Text; or Graphical.
The Front of Vehicle pane provides two (2) Display View Orientations:
Front Left; and Front Right.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL CONFIGURING ON-SCREEN VEHICLE DISPLAY
IANALYZE PAGE 5-8
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Text
Text Lists the vehicle data in tabular format.
Figure 5-5 Display Format: Text
A photo image (if available) is displayed to the right of the vehicle record.
Graphical
Graphical Displays a diagrammatic axle representation of the vehicle.
Figure 5-6 Display Format: Graphical
A photo image (if available) is displayed to the right of the vehicle record.
Front of Vehicle
Front Display Orientation:
To Left Displays vehicle front end taken from the left.
To Right Displays vehicle front end taken from the right.
5.1.3.3 Vehicle Data
Display Sort Decision
Click the checkbox to include system Sort Decision in the vehicle record display.
The Sort Decision is displayed by the record timestamp.
i.e. Report, Bypass, Credentials Report and Sorting Off.
5.2 ON-SCREEN VEHICLE DISPLAY To generate the on-screen vehicle display:
From the Vehicle Display Wizard,
1. Enter/edit the desired display reporting parameters for all dialogues.
2. From any page, click OK to run the configured on-screen vehicle display.
A Creating Vehicle Display progress message appears:
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL CONFIGURING ON-SCREEN VEHICLE DISPLAY
IANALYZE PAGE 5-9
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Figure 5-7 Creating Vehicle Display: Progress Message
Click Cancel to abort the display if there appears to be a problem executing the specified filter; and/or a
A warning message is displayed:
Click OK to close the Warning message.
Once the progress bar is completely green; the report is sent to the selected Output destination(s).
3. Click the progress message to display the vehicle list.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL CONFIGURING ON-SCREEN VEHICLE DISPLAY
IANALYZE PAGE 5-10
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
ON-SCREEN VEHICLE SUMMARY REPORT
Figure 5-8 On-Screen Vehicle Summary Report: Graphical| With Images
The on-screen Vehicle Summary Report display has the following elements:
View Vehicles Tab (Summary Report Page)
Mode (Current Filter)
Vehicle Summary Record
Print Options Bar
5.2.1.1 View Vehicles Tab
Many vehicle summary reports, each in its own tab, may displayed concurrently.
To view a summary report display:
Click on the desired Report tab.
To close a summary report page:
Click the tab close icon x.
5.2.1.2 Mode
Appearing at the bottom of the summary report page, Mode reflects the currently applied vehicle reporting filter(s) (if any).
4
2
3
1
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL CONFIGURING ON-SCREEN VEHICLE DISPLAY
IANALYZE PAGE 5-11
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
5.2.1.3 Vehicle Summary Record
A summary record displays information that the system has captured for a specific vehicle. As described in section 5.1.3.2 Display Format, there are two (2) display formats, Figure 5-8 (above) reflects a graphical vehicle summary display.
To access detailed vehicle data, double-click a summary vehicle record.
About Display Formats
Color Code
For both Text and Graphical layouts:
Green Background Vehicle within compliance limits; without a measurement error.
Orange Background Vehicle in violation of the limits or with a status warning (vehicle in wrong lane, off scale).
Violation warning(s) are printed at the bottom of the record.
Red Background Vehicle with a measurement error (missed a loop, too slow).
An error message is displayed at the bottom of the record.
Warnings When one or more vehicle status or potential violations warnings are detected, a message describing each is displayed at the bottom of the record.
Errors When an error has occurred in weighing the vehicle, an error message is displayed at the bottom of the record.
Record Detail
Both Text and Graphical layouts provide the following:
On the right of each record:
Vehicle Image [When available] A vehicle image is displayed when cameras are installed and enabled.
Clicking the image thumbnail displays larger images captured by all cameras in the vehicle lane.
At the bottom of the record:
LPR Data [When installed and enabled] License Plate Reader data is displayed:
Lp_Num
Lp_Jur
Lp_Conf
AVI Transponder ID [When installed and enabled] Automatic Vehicle Identification data is displayed:
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL CONFIGURING ON-SCREEN VEHICLE DISPLAY
IANALYZE PAGE 5-12
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Data at the top of each record:
(Sequence Number) Numbers are sequentially assigned to vehicles in the order they enter the system. Since only the vehicles matching configured system criteria are displayed, there will be gaps in the vehicle sequence as non-displayed vehicles pass through the sensors.
Sequence Numbers: Max Count 65,000; starting over at 1.
Separate iSINC®s and/or groups of lanes may be assigned a block (range) of numbers; in this case, numbers will only be sequential for that iSINC® or group of lanes, with counts terminating at the range limit and beginning again with the starting range number.
Lane Sensor location from which this record was generated.
Class Assigned vehicle class based on sensor inputs. For a complete illustration of vehicle classes, see Appendix D: FHWA Vehicle Classification.
Speed Vehicle speed as it travels across the sensors.
When a vehicle is over the configured speed limit, a Warning is displayed at the bottom of the record and the record background is red indicating a potential violation.
Sort Decision [If specified] Sorting decision determined by WIM system; Report vehicle has been directed to the inspection station. Bypass vehicle has been signaled to return to the mainline.
Time Displayed in 24-hour notation. Date and Time of day (local weigh station time) that data has been recorded.
Length Distance calculated from front bumper to rear bumper of a vehicle (bumper to bumper length) as determined by the WIM system.
When a vehicle is over the configured maximum length, a Warning is displayed at the bottom of the record and the record background is red indicating a potential violation.
18-K ESAL Number of equivalent eighteen thousand pound single axle loads.
GVW Gross Vehicle Weight as calculated by the WIM system.
When the GVW exceeds the configured overweight threshold percentage of the MAX GVW for this class of vehicle, a Warning is displayed at the bottom of the record and the record background is red indicating a potential violation.
Max GVW Determined by axle spacing; system assigns the maximum gross vehicle weight allowed for the associated vehicle classification.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL CONFIGURING ON-SCREEN VEHICLE DISPLAY
IANALYZE PAGE 5-1
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Additional Text Detail
In addition to the detail provided in both layouts, the Text layout includes the following:
Front Bumper to First Axle Front bumper measurement.
Last Axle to Rear Bumper [If known] Front and rear overhangs.
Column Display:
Axle Axle number (counted from the front of the vehicle).
Spacing Distance measured from the previous axle.
Weight Individual axle weight.
Allowable Weight For each axle, as determined from the vehicle classification.
Figure 5-9 Vehicle Record Display Example: Text Display
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL CONFIGURING ON-SCREEN VEHICLE DISPLAY
IANALYZE PAGE 5-2
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Additional Graphical Detail
The axle spacing diagram provides the following information:
Axle Symbols
Front Front of the vehicle represented by arrow.
Good Axle An axle determined to be under the allowed weight; represented by a green circle and a dot.
Bad Axle An axle determined to be greater than the allowed weight; represented by a red circle with an X.
Axle Weight Below each Axle symbol Weight of each axle group.
Axle Distance Above and Between Axle pairs Calculated distance between axles.
Figure 5-10 Vehicle Record Display Example: Graphical Display
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL CONFIGURING ON-SCREEN VEHICLE DISPLAY
IANALYZE PAGE 5-3
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
5.3 PRINTING A VEHICLE RECORD
SETTING PRINT OPTIONS
The Print Options bar is located at the top of the View Vehicles window:
Figure 5-11 Print Options Bar
Print Options may be used with or without prior selection of currently displayed vehicles.
Default: All records of the current Vehicle Summary Report.
Properties Displays the Properties dialogue currently selected printer.
Page Setup Displays the Page Setup dialogue to specify print layout parameters:
Paper Size: Select from the dropdown list.
Margins (mm): Measured in millimeters.
Margin adjustments may be necessary to properly display a printed vehicle record.
Vehicles longer than approximately 120 feet (36 meters) in graphical display format, may not print within page margins using Portrait orientation.
Orientation: Portrait, Landscape
Vehicle record printouts should display a black border; if the right side of the border is missing, the vehicle is too long for the selected orientation.
Vehicles Per Page: Many, Single
Many Vehicles Per Page: Prints a summary listing of records.
Single: Prints a single Detailed vehicle record, per page.
Figure 5-12 Vehicle Display: Page Setup
Always adjust Page Setup options before printing, to properly accommodate vehicle display reporting.
Print Preview Displays a print preview of the current/default selection for the Vehicle Summary Report as determined by Page setup configuration.
Print Prints the current vehicle record display as per the page setup configuration, to the default site printer.
SELECTING VEHICLE RECORDS
All selections are made from the on-screen Vehicle Summary Report display.
To select a single vehicle:
Click the desired vehicle record. The background changes to blue; or
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL CONFIGURING ON-SCREEN VEHICLE DISPLAY
IANALYZE PAGE 5-4
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Double-click the vehicle record.
The Print Preview displays a Detailed view for an individual record.
Figure 5-13 Print Preview: Detailed Record Display
To select a group of records in order of display:
1. Left click the first record in the list. 2. If necessary, scroll down to display the last record to be included in the selection. 3. Press and hold down the Shift key; left click the last record.
Click the Page Setup button to determine the desired record display.
To select non-sequential records:
Press and hold down the Ctrl key; left click each record to be selected.
PRINT PREVIEW OPTIONS
The Print Preview window displays a Print Preview toolbar at the top of the page:
Figure 5-14 Print Preview Toolbar
In order of symbols (left to right):
Print Prints current selection to the default site printer Copy Enabled with text selection; Creates a copy of current selection.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL CONFIGURING ON-SCREEN VEHICLE DISPLAY
IANALYZE PAGE 5-5
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Zoom In Magnifies current selection; Decreases viewing area. Zoom Out Increases viewing area. Zoom Level: 100% Zoom Level: Page Width Zoom Level: Whole Page Zoom Level: Two Pages
PRINTING THE ON-SCREEN REPORT
To Print the current/default selection for an On-screen Vehicle Summary Report:
1. Select the vehicle records to be printed.
2. Click Page Setup to specify print layout.
3. Click Print Preview to confirm proper print display.
From the Print Preview window,
4. Click the Print icon; or
From the Print Options Bar,
Click Print.
Figure 5-15 Individual Vehicle Record: Printed With Photo Images
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL CONFIGURING IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE 6-1
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
6 CONFIGURING IANALYZE REPORTS Once a site has been created, launching the iANALYZE application automatically displays the Create Reports Wizard window.
To access the Create Reports Wizard:
From the iANALYZE Main Taskbar, click .
6.1 REPORT WIZARD: CREATE REPORTS WIZARD
Figure 6-1 Create Reports Wizard; Required Info Page
The Create Reports Wizard window provides for the selection, specification and generation of a broad range of iANALYZE reports.
There are three (3) pages (tabs) displaying report parameter options:
Required Info
Select Reports; and
Data Filters
To navigate pages:
Click the page tab or click the Next> and <Back buttons.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL CONFIGURING IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE 6-2
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
To generate a report:
1. Enter/edit the desired reporting parameters for all panel dialogues.
2. Click to run the specified report.
REQUIRED INFO
The Required Info page (see Figure 6-1, above) provides the following option panels:
Select Site
Select Data
Select Output; and
Template
6.1.1.1 Select Site
See section 5.1.1.1 Select Site for a detailed description of this panel.
6.1.1.2 Select Data
See section 5.1.1.2 Select Data for a detailed description of this panel.
6.1.1.3 Select Output
Figure 6-2 Select Output Option Entry
The Select Output panel provides options for configuring the destination(s) of report output.
Default Report folder location:
Windows 7/8 C:\Users\Public\Public Documents\IRD\iANALYZE\Reports\
More than one output destination may be selected.
A report may be sent to the following destination(s):
To Screen Displays report(s) on the monitor.
To Printer Sends report(s) to the default printer.
File type Specifies file type of saved reports.
To Report Folder Saves a report file to the specified folder.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL CONFIGURING IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE 6-3
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Add Site ID to FWHA Export File Names
Select this checkbox to prefix the site ID to a report filename. This will prevent files from being overwritten when generating files for multiple sites.
To Screen
For a complete discussion, see section 5.2.1 On-screen Vehicle Summary Report.
To Printer
When a configured report is generated, report results are automatically sent to the default site printer.
To set a Default printer:
From the system Control Panel,
1. Navigate to the Printers and Devices view to see a listing of available printers.
The default site printer is identified by a checkmark.
To change the default printer:
2. Right-click the desired printer icon.
From the drop down menu,
3. Select Set as Default Printer.
To print a report while viewing the On-Screen report Display:
See section 5.3.3 Print Preview Options.
To File: File Type
When a configured report is generated, the report results are automatically saved to file in the specified format. An additional format may be selected for some reports.
To specify the Report File Format:
From the drop down list box,
Click the desired document file format.
Type Description
pdf Adobe Acrobat Portable Document Format xls Microsoft Excel Spreadsheet (97-2003) doc Microsoft Word Document (97-2003) rtf Rich Text Format txt Plain Text Format
Reports that generate ASCII listings, such as IRD ASCII Vehicle Records, Custom PVR (201), PRN Output, etc. are available only in .txt format.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL CONFIGURING IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE 6-4
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
To Report Folder
Figure 6-3 Save Report File to Folder
When a configured report is generated, report results are automatically saved to a file of the designated file type and stored in specified report folder.
To designate a Report Folder for a saved report file:
1. Click the ellipsis to display the windows directory.
2. Navigate to the desired directory (folder); or
Manually enter a [directory path] folder name.
3. Click OK or press Enter.
6.1.1.4 Select Input: Template
Figure 6-4 Select Input: Template
Information may be loaded from a pre-configured template that automatically populates all required fields in the Report Wizard. See section 8 Creating Report Templates.
Default Report Template directory:
Windows 7/8 C:\Users\Public\Public Documents\IRD\iANALYZE\Params
Settings may also be manually adjusted before running a given report.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL CONFIGURING IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE 6-5
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Current Settings
Figure 6-5 Current Settings
By default, iANALYZE saves the current panel settings (including any changes) each time the wizard produces a set of reports.
To generate reports using the most recent settings, click None.
Select Template
To specify a preconfigured reporting template,
1. Click Select Template.
2. Click to display the default directory of Report templates.
3. Click the desired template file.
4. Review and/or modify configuration settings.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL CONFIGURING IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE 6-6
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
SELECT REPORTS
Figure 6-6 Create Reports Wizard: Select Reports Panel
Many reports display data using range parameters that are user configurable.
For a complete discussion on configurable parameters see section 7. Navigating the Report Parameters Window; For a complete listing of available reports see Appendix E iANALYZE Report Descriptions.
6.1.2.1 Select Reports List
The Select Reports list box categorizes and classifies reports in an expandable/ collapsible display.
Reports appearing in the Select Reports list can be enabled and disabled on a per site basis using the Site Editor: Reports List, see section 9.7.1 Reports List, p. 9-10.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL CONFIGURING IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE 6-7
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Hide/Display Available Reports
Reports are separated into standard report groups:
Figure 6-7 Select Reports List Box
To expand a report group Click the arrow to the left of the group name (displays all reports within the group).
Figure 6-8 Expanded Report Group: Error/Status Example
To collapse the group Click the arrow again.
Selection Operations
To select a report Click on the desired report name; a checkmark appears in the corresponding checkbox. Click again to deselect.
More than one report may be selected concurrently.
Figure 6-9 Selected Report Group: FHWA Example
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL CONFIGURING IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE 6-8
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
To select/deselect all reports in a group Click the standard group name.
In collapsed view: a checkmark next to group name indicates all reports are selected;
an empty checkbox indicates no reports have been selected;
a solid checkbox indicates a mix of selected/deselected reports.
Click to select all groups (reports).
Click to deselect all groups (reports).
6.1.2.2 Reports By Classification
Summary
Class
Volume
Peaks
Speed
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL CONFIGURING IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE 6-9
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Length
Error / Status
FHWA
MEPDG
Weight
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL CONFIGURING IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE 6-10
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Weight Violation
IRD ASCII
ESAL
Safety System
Road Condition
External Data Items CSV
CTWIM
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL CONFIGURING IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE 6-11
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Other
Custom
Custom: Data Validity
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL CONFIGURING IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE 6-12
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
DATA FILTERS
Figure 6-10 Create Reports Wizard: Data Filters Page
In addition to defining the data to be included/excluded in a report, the Data Filters page determines how the data is grouped and formatted.
6.1.3.1 Class Selection
Two (2) range parameters control the selection/display of vehicle classes for a report.
Start Class must be less than or equal to the End Class.
Start Class Lowest Vehicle class identifier in range.
End Class Highest vehicle class identifier in range.
Type the class number or use the spin box arrows to increment/decrement this value.
Use Class/Allowable Weights from Site
For Per Vehicle data Select this checkbox to enable the onsite system vehicle classification and overweight check (if available) rather than using iANALYZE reclassification and weight compliance check.
Selecting this option can speed up report production.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL CONFIGURING IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE 6-13
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
6.1.3.2 Select Lane(s)
Selects the lane(s) from which data will be used to generate the report.
Click on the Lane identifier checkbox to select/deselect a lane.
6.1.3.3 Traffic Data
Depending on the selected report(s) and how site data has been collected, Traffic Data files can contain:
Binned (grouped vehicle) data Per vehicle data; or Both
Binned Data
Binned Data Refers to the portion of a data file that retains traffic data as a count of the number of vehicles meeting a certain criteria:
i.e., Class 3; Speed between 90 and 100 Kph; Vehicle Count between 10 and 11 AM.
Several reports default to binned data when available and applicable.
Generally, individual records are not kept for private vehicle classes (motorcycles, automobiles, small trucks, etc.) so reports requiring counts of such vehicles need to use binned data.
TCC counters can collect binned counts for each type of error.
If the classification scheme used by iANALYZE is different from the classification scheme used on site, there may be differences between binned data counts and per vehicle data counts.
Per Vehicle Data
Per Vehicle Data Refers to the portion of a data file that retains an individual record for each vehicle within the filter criteria.
Each record contains specific data for that vehicle (speed, weights, dimensions, time of passage, etc.).
For example: Per Vehicle Records of non-commercial vehicle (FHWA classes 1, 2, and 3) are frequently filtered out of the site Per Vehicle Data.
Only some basic binned data (such as a count per hour) on these classes is gathered.
It is recommended that Per Vehicle Data be selected when binned data is not collected at a site.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL CONFIGURING IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE 6-14
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
In generating Reports that use both types of data, selecting this option will prevent the repetitive display of0 in the respective report sections.
iAnalyze will reclassify Per Vehicle Data unless the Use Classification/ Allowable Weights from Site option is selected.
Both
Both Allows the iANALYZE software to determine type of data used.
A few reports make use of both Traffic Data types:
SiteSummary ErrorByHour StatusByHour
If the selected Traffic Data option does not match the actual file data type, the report generator will not be able to read (use) the data:
i.e. Selected Traffic Data type: Per Vehicle Data Stored data file: Binned
6.1.3.4 Lane Grouping
Lane Grouping determines how data collection from lanes is grouped in the report:
Together Places all lane data in a single group
Direction Not Available
Separate Divides each lane into its own report group
6.1.3.5 Interval
Interval is used to specify reporting intervals for the selected Date/Time Range.
Some intervals may not be available depending on other currently selected report parameters.
None All data is included in a single report interval.
Selecting a short interval of one (1) hour when the time period is relatively long (e.g. a month) will result in a report with a very large number of pages.
PRN Output reports use the interval specified as the Main Interval in the PRN Configuration window.
PRN reports only use this interval when Traffic Data type is Per Vehicle Data.
if Binned Data is selected, the PRN output file reports will use the same interval at which the binned data was collected.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL CONFIGURING IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE 6-15
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
6.1.3.6 Set Chart Option…
Figure 6-11 Data Filters: Chart Option Editor
The Chart Option Editor window allows for the selection of output display format.
Table or Chart
Click this radio button to generate a multi-column table.
Click this radio button to generate a chart as per the Chart Type Option selection, (below).
Click this radio button to generate both output displays.
Chart Type Option
Select a chart type for the output display.
See Chart Type Examples, Appendix C .
Operations Buttons:
OK Click to Save the Chart selection and close the Chart Option Editor window.
Cancel Click to abort any changes and close the Chart Option Editor window.
6.1.3.7 Set Parameters…
The Set Parameters button displays the Report Parameters window. For a complete discussion, see section 7 Configuring Report Parameters.
.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL CONFIGURING IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE 6-16
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
6.2 GENERATING A REPORT To generate the currently configured iANALYZE report:
1. Enter/edit the desired display reporting parameters for all page dialogues.
2. Click to run the configured report.
A Generating and Displaying Reports progress message appears:
Figure 6-12 Generating and Displaying Reports: Progress Message
Click Cancel to abort the display if there appears to be a problem executing the specified filter; and/or a
A warning message is displayed:
Click OK to close the Warning message.
Once the progress bar is completely green; the report is sent to the selected Output destination(s).
4. Click the progress message to continue displaying the report.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL CONFIGURING IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE 6-17
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
ON-SCREEN REPORT DISPLAY
6.2.1.1 Report Display Window
Figure 6-13 On Screen Report Display: Tabular
The on-screen tabular Report display has the following elements:
Report Tab (for each Report)
Report Content
Page Display and Zoom Bar
Report Info Bar
File Options and Page Navigation Toolbar
Report Tab(s)
Many reports, each in its own tab, may displayed concurrently.
Open Reports: Maximum 75
To navigate report displays:
Click on the desired Report tab.
1
3
2
4
5
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL CONFIGURING IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE 6-18
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
To Close a report display:
Click the tab close icon (X).
Closing a report does not save the content. See section 6.2.1.1.5 File Options and Page Navigation Toolbar.
If a template has been configured to produce the report, it may be quickly regenerated. See section 6.1.1.4 Select Input: Template.
Report Content
Tabular Report
The Tabular Report layout has the following common elements, see Figure 6-17.
Header: Displays contextual/administrative data for the report.
Report Detail: Displays report data in a Row/Column matrix.
Footer: Displays report totals and summaries.
ASCII Report
The ASCII Report layout has the following common elements, see Figure 6-18.
Header: Displays contextual/administrative data for the report.
Report Detail: Displays a report file directory link and the name of the ASCII file.
Footer: Displays report totals and summaries.
Page Display and Zoom
Figure 6-14 On-Screen Report: Page Display and Zoom Bar
The Page Display and Zoom bar provides options for controlling the page view and magnification of the displayed report pages:
Zoom Width Expands page display to full page width.
Zoom Height Expands page display to full page height.
Zoom Slider Zooms the page display to specified magnification.
Select the entire magnification factor; type a new value.
Click under the line to the right or left of the slider bar to increment/decrement by 1 percent; or
Drag the slider to magnify.
Report Info Bar
Displays Current Page of Total Report Pages and Report Name.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL CONFIGURING IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE 6-19
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
File Options and Page Navigation Toolbar
Figure 6-15 On-Screen Report: File Options and Page Navigation Toolbar
The File Option functions are:
Save Report To File Saves the current report to file.
To Save the Report:
1. Click to display a list of file formats.
2. Click the desired format.
3. Type a filename.
4. Click OK to save the file.
Print Report Sends the current report to the default printer.
To Print the Report:
Click
The Page Navigation functions are:
Previous Page Navigate back one page.
Next Page Navigate forward one page.
Page Navigator Type a page number; or
Click the down arrow to select:
Go to First Page Go to Last Page
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL CONFIGURING IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE 6-20
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
ABOUT REPORTS
6.2.2.1 Traffic Data Reference Terminology
The following terms refer to traffic data specified in a report:
In common usage, tandems, tridems, etc. are often referred to as axle groups; iAnalyze Reports define the terms somewhat differently, as described below.
Axle Unit A set of one or more axles on a common suspension unit; specifically tandem, tridem and quadrem axle units.
Axle unit weight regulations are typically applied at weigh scale inspection stations.
Axle Group A set of axles being scrutinized for purposes of weight calculation. Dependent on Grouping Type for the jurisdiction.
Grouping Type Adjacent Axles; any combination of 2 or more axles on a vehicle.
i.e. on a 5 axle vehicle, axle group combinations include axle sets: 1-2, 2-3, 3-4, 4-5, 1-3, 2-4, 3-5, 1-4, 4-5, and 1-5.
Binned Data Traffic count data kept as an aggregate count. Individual vehicle data is not kept.
Sample Bins: Class 3, Speed Range: between 90 and 100 kph.
Error Vehicle A vehicle for which the field system determine that a vehicle passed by but could not determine any other information, i.e., the vehicle was detected on a single sensing loop.
Good Weight Vehicles status clear vehicles and status set vehicles where the status does not affect the weight measurements.
Per Vehicle Data a specific record is kept for each vehicle that passes through the system; each record contains the data for that vehicle (speed, weights, dimensions, time of passage, etc.).
Status Clear Vehicles vehicles that have no errors or status warnings associated with them and are correctly detected by the system.
Status Set Vehicles vehicles for which the system set a status warning flag indicating an anomaly in the data collected for the vehicle. This may affect information collected about the vehicle. It may indicate a potential violation (e.g., the vehicle was overweight) or may indicate the system had a minor problem in detecting the vehicle (e.g., not all the axle sensors counted the same number of axles).
Violation the vehicle is in violation of one of the regulatory limits for speed, length, height or weight. Weight violations are also subdivided in some reports by the type of weight violation.
The types of weight violation are:
Axle Group individual violation the weight of a single axle in the axle group is overweight but the axle group is not overweight.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL CONFIGURING IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE 6-21
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Axle Group combination violation the weight of a particular set of axles is above the allowable limit. One possible Axle Group combination violation is the Bridge violation:
Bridge violation one or more sets of axles on the vehicle is over the weight allowed by the Bridge Formula tables as defined by the regulatory agency. The Bridge Formula defines the weight limits for the various combinations of consecutive axles and axle spacings on a vehicle.
For an example of the bridge formula, refer to the FHWA website at:
http://ops.fhwa.dot.gov/freight/publications/brdg_
frm_wghts/index.htm
Axle Unit individual violation the weight of a single axle in the axle unit (tandem, tridem or quadrem) is overweight but the axle unit itself is not overweight. This violation does not apply to Steering or Single axle units as they only have one axle; these one axle units will generate only Axle Unit violations (see next item).
Axle Unit violation the weight of an axle unit (steering, single, tandem, tridem or quadrem) is above the allowed limit.
GVW violation gross vehicle weight is above the limit set by the regulatory agency.
Steering / Single / Tandem/ Tridem / Quadrem violation the weight of the axle unit described is above the limit
set by the regulatory agency. This is the same as Axle Unit violation above.
Weight balance violation the weight difference between the axles within an axle unit or group is above the limit set by the regulatory agency (the axle weights are too unevenly distributed in the unit/group).
6.2.2.2 Report Ranges and Unit Selection
Ensure that the appropriate unit is selected (imperial or metric) for the specified range parameters.
A report displays data using range parameters that are user configurable.
Report parameters specified for range data are independent of units and do not change regardless of the units specified here; therefore, it is very important that ranges selected for report parameters are appropriate for the units selected.
Example:
If the report parameter ranges were specified as appropriate to kips (0-2, 2-4, etc.) and the user sets the units to pounds, it is likely that any data shown in the report will be
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL CONFIGURING IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE 6-22
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
bunched into a single (the highest) range. If no data or very skewed data appears in a report, check that the parameter ranges are appropriate for the units selected.
6.2.2.3 Report Types and Range Selection
By Hour
By Hour (Hourly) Reports: Reflect data for a 24 hour reporting period.
Set the Report Start/End date range for one (1) day.
By Day of Month
By Day of Month Reports: Reflect data for a single month starting on the first day of the month.
Set the report date range for a one (1) month period, starting with the first day of the month.
Weekday By
Weekday By Reports Reflect data for a one (1) week period starting on Sunday.
Set the report date range for a single week, starting with a Sunday date.
Summary
Summary Reports In general, Reflect data for any specified range.
Weekly Summary
Weekly Summary Reports Reflect data for a one (1) week period starting on Monday.
Set the report date range for a single week, starting with a Monday date.
Annual Summary
Annual Summary Reports
To generate Annual reports, the Data Filters Interval should be set to None and the data source should include one full year of data.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL CONFIGURING IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE 6-23
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Annual Summary Reports Reflect data for a one (1) year period.
Set the report date range for a single year.
STANDARD REPORT SECTIONS
A standard report is divided into the following sections:
Report Header
Report Detail; and
Report Footer
6.2.3.1 Report Header
Figure 6-16 Report Header Sample
The iANALYZE report header provides the following information.
Date the Report was generated
User (Organization) Identification (Logo and/or Text)
Report Name
Reporting Configuration Options
Date of Report Generation
MM/DD/YYYY Format
Company Identification
Logo; and/or
Text, as specified through User Information.
Report Name
Report Name as selected through Select Reports List.
1
2 4
3
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL CONFIGURING IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE 6-24
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Data Selected Through Report Configuration
Field Description
Site Site Name for which the report is generated
Classification Selected Vehicle Classification Scheme; see section 4.2.3.4 Vehicle Classification Schemes
Lanes Selected Lanes reported on as specified in Data Filters; see section 6.1.3.2 Select Lane(s)
Interval Reporting Interval as specified in Data Filters; see section 6.1.3.5 Interval
Start Class Vehicle Class Type, Starting of range as specified in Data Filters; see section 6.1.3.1 Class Selection
End Class Vehicle Class Type, End of range as specified in Data Filters; see section 6.1.3.1 Class Selection
Start Date/Time Starting Date/Time as specified in Required Info; see section 6.1.1.2 Select Data
End Date/Time Ending Date/Time as specified in Required Info; see section 6.1.1.2 Select Data
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL CONFIGURING IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE 6-25
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
6.2.3.2 Report Detail Format
There are two (2) types of detail formats generated by iANALYZE.
Tabular; and
ASCII.
Tabular Report Format
Figure 6-17 Tabular Report Preview
Standard Tabular report data is automatically displayed in the Create Report preview window under a separate tab.
Typical report content is presented in a ROW/COLUMN matrix.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL CONFIGURING IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE 6-26
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
ASCII Report Display
Figure 6-18 ASCII Report Display
Many reports generate a standard ASCII file. The data itself is not displayed in the Create Reports preview window.
Linked Directory Display
A standard report header and footer is generated for the report, but the content display contains a directory link and filename for the saved ASCII file.
An ASCII report will be saved as a file in the configured Reports directory even if Select Output is set to Screen.
File Type selection does not impact the file format.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL CONFIGURING IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE 6-27
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
To Display (Open) an ASCII Report:
From the Create Report preview display:
1. Click the Directory link to display the configured Reports directory.
2. Locate and right-click the file matching the specified report Filename.
Figure 6-19 ASCII File: Reports Directory
3. From the context menu, click Open with and select a text editor application. The file is displayed in ASCII format.
Figure 6-20 ASCII File: Sample Report Display
6.2.3.3 Footers
Report Footer: Display 1
Description
Total Counts Item Description
Error Status Set Status Clear PV Total Per Vehicle Total: Error + Status Set + Status Clear Good Weight Binned Total
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL CONFIGURING IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE 6-28
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Report Footer: Display 2
Description
Total Counts Item Description
Error Status Set Status Clear Total Good Weight Binned
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL CONFIGURING REPORT PARAMETERS
IANALYZE PAGE 7-1
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
7 CONFIGURING REPORT PARAMETERS
7.1 REPORT PARAMETERS WINDOW
Figure 7-1 Report Parameters Window
While standard filtering and grouping parameters are set through the Data Filters page, data range intervals are set (customized) through the Report Parameters window.
To display and edit report data range interval parameters:
From the Create Reports Wizard Data Filters panel, see section 6.1.3 Data Filters; (or the Template Editor Data Filters panel),
4. Click .
The Report Parameters window consists of:
An Operations Button Bar
Select Report Panel: Report List Display and Selection.
For the display of report names with and without configurable parameters.
Not all reports contain adjustable range parameters.
Parameter Editing Panel: Data Range Table/Panel Display for the current report.
Allows for the definition and modification of specific row and/or column range parameters.
1
2
3
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL CONFIGURING REPORT PARAMETERS
IANALYZE PAGE 7-2
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
OPERATIONS BUTTON BAR
7.1.1.1 Close
Closes the Report Parameters window without saving.
Unsaved Changes Prompt
When modifications have been applied in the current parameter entry panel, an:
Unsaved Changes prompt is displayed.
5. Click Yes to Save and Close. 6. Click No to Close without saving.
Unsaved Changes to Parameters Prompt
When modifications have been applied in the current parameter entry panel, and another report is selected for update before saving, an:
Unsaved Changes to Parameters prompt is displayed.
7. Click OK to Save changes and view the parameters of the next report. 8. Click Cancel to display the next report
without saving the current parameters.
7.1.1.2 Save & Close
Saves any changes and Closes the Report Parameters window.
7.1.1.3 Save
Saves any changes and leaves Report Parameters window displayed.
Saved changes may still be Reset to Default settings. See 7.1.4 Reset (below).
7.1.1.4 Reset
Resets modifications made to the current report parameters (saved or unsaved).
Reset Individual Report Prompt
Whether saved or not, any modifications made in the current parameter entry panel can be reset to the iANALYZE default:
A Reset Individual Report prompt is displayed.
9. Click Yes to Reset current report to the IRD default. 10. Click No to retain the current modifications.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL CONFIGURING REPORT PARAMETERS
IANALYZE PAGE 7-3
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
7.1.1.5 Reset All
Resets report parameters for All reports to default settings.
Reset All Prompt
A Reset All prompt is displayed:
11. Click Yes to Reset all report parameters for all Reports (saved or unsaved) to the IRD default. 12. Click No to retain previously configured Report settings.
SELECT REPORT PANEL
Show All Reports Click this option to select all report names for display.
Show Only User configurable Reports Default selection.
13. Click this option to select reports that have one or more user configurable parameters.
Report Display List Box Displays reports as per selected option.
Click a report to view configurable parameters.
Figure 7-2 Report Parameters: Report Display List Box
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL CONFIGURING REPORT PARAMETERS
IANALYZE PAGE 7-4
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
7.1.2.1 Show Only User Configurable Reports
To display and select a configurable report:
From the Select Report panel,
1. Click the Show Only User Configurable Reports radio button.
2. Click the Report Display List Box down arrow to display User Configurable Reports. See Figure 7-2 (above).
3. Click the desired report.
Report specific data ranges are displayed in the parameter editing panel.
User Configurable Reports and Parameters
Eligible Reports
Report Name Configurable Parameters
ROW Column
Speed by Hour # of data range intervals Min/Max Values of range
Class By: * # of data range intervals Min/Max Values of range
Speed See *
Gross Vehicle Weight See *
Front Axle Weight See *
Single Axle Weight See *
Tandem Axle Weight See *
Tridem Axle Weight See *
Quadrem Axle Weight See *
Autocalibration Min/Max Values of range
Weekday by Speed # of data range intervals Min/Max Values of range
GVW By: ** # of data range intervals Min/Max Values of range
Hour See **
Day of Month See **
Month See **
PRN Speed by Class # of data range intervals Min/Max Values of range
Custom: ASCII Speed Report - 220
# of data range intervals Min/Max Values of range
Custom: ASCII PAT Truck Records - 222
Start Class, End Class; (Subrange of Data Filters, Class Selection)
# of Axles; impacts # of report columns
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL CONFIGURING REPORT PARAMETERS
IANALYZE PAGE 7-5
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Eligible Reports
Report Name Configurable Parameters
ROW Column
Length by Hour # of data range intervals Min/Max Values of range
Weekday by Length # of data range intervals Min/Max Values of range
Road Condition Daily Summary
Lowest Road Condition
Customizable WIM Compliance
% WIM Accuracy: Single Axle Axle Group GVW
Table 3 User Configurable Reports and Parameters
PARAMETER EDITING PANEL
Specification of a data range interval is independent of measurement units and does not change regardless of the measurement units specified.
For example:
If the parameter ranges of a report are appropriate to kips but units has been set to pounds, the report data will be bunched into a single (highest) range.
It is very important that the ranges selected for report parameters are appropriate for the selected measurement Units.
If a report unexpectedly, displays skewed, little or no data; confirm parameter range settings are appropriate for the selected measurement Units.
7.1.3.1 Parameter Entry Panels
Data range selection for grouping data in a report appears in the following panel formats:
Row/Column Table
Spin Box; and
List Box
Row/Column Table Display
Figure 7-3 Configurable Report Parameters: Row/ Column Table Display
Report Column or Row data ranges may be added/edited/deleted in this panel.
1
2
3
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL CONFIGURING REPORT PARAMETERS
IANALYZE PAGE 7-6
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
The Row/Column Table panel has the following elements:
See Figure 7-4 (above).
Not user configurable message Applicable for the respective Report
Row/Column.
Number of rows/columns: (Current) number of rows/columns displayed
in the generated report.
This number is equal to the number of range intervals (rows) included in the Data Range Table.
The number of data range intervals (rows or columns) is configurable for most reports. # of range intervals: Min. 1; Max. 30
Type a number or click the spin box arrows to adjust number of rows/columns displayed in the report.
Data Range Table Allows for the configuration of data range intervals.
Column Headings Min (>=) Minimum inclusive value in the range.
Max (<) Maximum non-inclusive value in the range.
The lower boundary of a data range is inclusive; upper boundary is exclusive.
Row Number Equivalent to the Report column number.
Each row defines the data range interval for the respective Report column.
Click and type a cell entry.
The minimum value for each range interval must be equal to or greater than (>=) the maximum value of the previous interval.
When a value is modified, any effected Max/Min value of adjacent intervals is automatically updated to remain consistent with the new entry, i.e.:
Changing the Min value in Row 2 automatically changes the Max value of Row 1.
Changing the Max value of Row 2 automatically changes the Min value of Row 3.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL CONFIGURING REPORT PARAMETERS
IANALYZE PAGE 7-7
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Custom Row/Column Parameters/Report Display Example:
Figure 7-4 Speed by Hour: Customized Report Parameters
Speed By Hour: Generated Report
Figure 7-5 Speed By Hour: Customized Data Range Intervals
13 Columns Displayed
Each row in the Data Range Table is converted to the respective column heading, i.e.:
Data Range Table, row 10 Values – Report, column10 Heading
Spin Box Display
Figure 7-6 Configurable Report Parameters: Spin Box Display
In this Report Parameter panel display, parameters are set by typing a value or clicking the spin box arrows.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL CONFIGURING REPORT PARAMETERS
IANALYZE PAGE 7-8
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Figure 7-7 Customizable WIM Compliance: Customized Report Parameters
Customizable WIM Compliance: Generated Report
Figure 7-8 WIM Compliance: Customized Data Range Intervals
Dropdown List
Figure 7-9 Configurable Report Parameters: Dropdown List Display
Report parameters are selected from a list display.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL CONFIGURING REPORT PARAMETERS
IANALYZE PAGE 7-9
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Figure 7-10 Road Condition Daily Summary: Customized Data Range Intervals
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL CREATING REPORT TEMPLATES
IANALYZE PAGE 8-1
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
8 CREATING REPORT TEMPLATES
8.1 THE TEMPLATE EDITOR
Figure 8-1 Template Editor: Required Info Page
The Template Editor provides for the customization and modification of pre-configured templates used to facilitate and expedite report generation.
A template pre-defines a set of reports, the data filters and parameters to be used with each of the selected reports.
To access the Template Editor:
Click located on the iANALYZE Main Taskbar.
As in the Reports Wizard, the Template Editor window contains three (3) pages displaying parameter setting dialogues:
Required Info
Select Reports; and
Data Filters
To navigate pages: Click the page tab or click the Next> and <Back buttons.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL CREATING REPORT TEMPLATES
IANALYZE PAGE 8-2
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Template Operations
Save Click to Save changes to an existing template.
Save As Click to Create a New template based on the current settings.
Revert Click to Reload the most recently opened template and restore settings to the previously saved values.
Remains available as options are typed or selected.
REQUIRED INFO
The Required Info dialogue (see Figure 8-1, above) provides two (2) panel dialogues:
Template; and
Output Destination
8.1.1.1 Template
The Template panel provides for:
selection and editing of existing Report templates; and
the creation of new Report templates.
Default Report Template directory:
Windows 7/8 C:\Users\Public\Public Documents\IRD\iANALYZE\Params
Select Template (Edit)
To Edit an existing Report template:
1. Click to display the Params folder to view existing Report templates.
Figure 8-2 Select Template: Params Folder View
2. Click the desired template and click Open.
The selected template appears in the Current: text box display. All associated Report settings are applied.
3. Make modifications and/or add to the existing settings.
The Save button becomes available once a change is made to the template.
4. Click to update the existing template.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL CREATING REPORT TEMPLATES
IANALYZE PAGE 8-3
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
New (Create)
A new template may be created from scratch using the pre-existing system defaults or an existing report template may serve as the basis for another. The latter procedure can greatly simplify and expedite template creation.
From System Default Report Settings
To create a New template from system defaults:
1. Click to display the Params directory.
2. Type the name of the report template and click Save.
A template confirmation message is displayed.
3. Click to confirm.
The template name is displayed in the Current: box.
4. Edit template settings and click
From Existing Report Template Settings
To create a New template from an existing template:
1. Browse for and open the desired template from the Params folder.
The template name is displayed in the Current: text box.
2. Click
3. Type a new template filename and click Save.
The new template retains all report settings of the initial template.
4. Edit template settings and click
8.1.1.2 Select Output
See section 6.1.1.3 Select Output for a detailed description of this panel.
SELECT REPORTS
See section 6.1.2 Select Reports for a detailed description of this page.
DATA FILTERS
See section 6.1.3 Data Filters for a detailed description of this page.
8.2 GENERATING A REPORT FROM TEMPLATE Templates are created for a wide array of reporting scenarios. In the interest of flexibility, some templates will only predetermine a few settings so that they can be used in multiple scenarios with additional criteria specified at the time the report is generated.
Other templates will contain complete and detailed settings to minimize user intervention when the report is generated as in the case of standard daily, weekly and monthly reports.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL CREATING REPORT TEMPLATES
IANALYZE PAGE 8-4
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
To generate a report from a template:
From the Create Reports Wizard window; Template panel,
1. Click the Select Template radio button.
2 Click to display the Params folder to view existing Report templates.
3. Click the desired template and click Open.
The selected template appears in the Current: text box display. All associated Report settings are applied.
4. Adjust any other filter criteria as necessary.
5. Click to run the report.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL THE SITE EDITOR: CONFIGURING SITE SPECIFICS
IANALYZE PAGE 9-1
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
9 THE SITE EDITOR: CONFIGURING SITE SPECIFICS
Figure 9-1 Site Editor Window
Site specific configuration defaults are created and modified and in the Site Editor. An existing site may also be removed. Site configuration activities are divided into:
Site Name and ID
Site Directories
Timestamp Adjustment
Data Source
Lane Information; and
Additional Site Reporting Defaults.
64
3
2
1
5
2
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL THE SITE EDITOR: CONFIGURING SITE SPECIFICS
IANALYZE PAGE 9-2
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
9.1 SITE EDITOR OPERATIONS
Figure 9-2 Site Editor Operations Buttons
Add New Creates a New site.
Delete Deletes the current site.
Save Saves changes made to the current site configuration.
Revert Restores newly modified parameters to previously saved settings for the current site.
9.2 SPECIFYING SITE NAME AND ID
Figure 9-3 Site Name and ID Fields
Site Name Descriptive site name to be displayed on Report Headings.
Max. length: 40 characters
Placeholder text: SiteName
Site ID Site name file extension required by iANALYZE to determine site specific files.
Case Sensitive: Upper and lower case characters must match the data file extension exactly.
Can be greater than three (3) characters.
Site Name provides a user recognizable file identifier while the Site ID file extension is required by iANALYZE to determine site related data files.
ADDING A NEW SITE (NAME AND ID)
Adding a Site Name and ID is synonymous with creating a new site.
To Create a New site:
From the Site Editor window,
1. Click .
Figure 9-4 Site Name and ID: Add New
The Site ID text field becomes active (all other fields disabled).
A Create button appears to the right of the Site ID field.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL THE SITE EDITOR: CONFIGURING SITE SPECIFICS
IANALYZE PAGE 9-3
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
2. In the Site ID text box, type a unique site (name) file extension.
3. Click .
If the same ID has been previously specified for another site, a warning message is displayed.
Click OK to return to the Site Editor window to enter a unique ID.
The new Site ID is displayed:
Figure 9-5 Site ID Entry
The Site ID field is disabled (all other fields are active).
Site Name placeholder text is highlighted to be overwritten with new site name entry.
Select Site displays the new Site ID file extension (appended to placeholder text).
Once the Create button is clicked, the new site is created. The ID entry may not be modified or undone. Use Delete to remove the site, see section 9.2.4 Deleting a Site.
4. In the Site Name text box, type the new site name.
The Site Name remains editable; click to undo the entire entry.
5. Click to complete the site creation.
Figure 9-6 Site Name Entry
Select Site displays the newly saved Site Name and ID file extension.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL THE SITE EDITOR: CONFIGURING SITE SPECIFICS
IANALYZE PAGE 9-4
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
SELECTING A SITE
Figure 9-7 Select Site List Box
For those iANALYZE installations responsible for maintaining multiple sites, a site may be selected from the Select Site list box.
To Select a Site:
1. Click the dropdown list box arrow (right side of field display).
2. Click the desired site name from the site list.
EDITING A SITE NAME
To Edit an existing site name:
From the Site Editor window,
1. Click the Select Site list box arrow to display existing sites.
2. Click the desired site name.
The Site ID field remains disabled.
3. Modify the site name as required.
4. Click .
DELETING A SITE
Deleting a site removes all files associated with a site.
The Delete (site) procedure cannot be undone.
To Delete an existing site:
From the Site Editor window,
1. Click the Select Site list box arrow to display existing sites.
2. Click the site name of the site to be deleted.
3. Click .
A Delete Site? prompt is displayed warning that the deletion may not be undone.
14. Click OK to delete the site.
15. Click Cancel to return to the Site Editor window without deleting.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL THE SITE EDITOR: CONFIGURING SITE SPECIFICS
IANALYZE PAGE 9-5
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
9.3 ESTABLISHING SITE DIRECTORIES
Figure 9-8 Site Directory Locations
iANALYZE data is stored in user configured directories. Data and image files are stored in separate locations.
DATA FILE LOCATION
Data files consisting of recognized data types are stored in the site data directory.
Figure 9-9 Data File Default Site Directory
Data Directory The folder in which site data files are stored.
Default: C:\Users\Public\Documents\IRD\iANALYZE\veh_rcrd
To specify a new site Data Directory:
Type a new path and folder name in the field; or
Click to display, navigate to and select a folder.
IMAGE DIRECTORY LOCATION
Image files may be generated from a number of sources. Depending on equipment and configuration, image files will likely be maintained in a more complex directory structure.
Figure 9-10 Image File Default Site Directory
Image Directory The folder(s) in which site photo image files are stored.
Default: C:\Users\Public\Documents\IRD\iANALYZE\veh_rcrd\jpeg
To specify the site Image Directory:
Type a new path and folder name in the field; or
Click to display, navigate to and select a folder.
9.3.2.1 Image Directory Considerations
Images Not Required
When vehicle record capture includes image files that that will not be required for reporting purposes, processing speed may be improved by specifying an empty image directory in the site editor.
Vehicle Images directory is not enabled for the following data sources:
TRS WIM
DAW 100
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL THE SITE EDITOR: CONFIGURING SITE SPECIFICS
IANALYZE PAGE 9-6
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Image Format and Naming Conventions
Images must be in jpeg format.
Named in accordance with the standard IRD format; and
Stored in the image directory specified in the Site Editor.
9.4 CONFIGURING VEHICLE TIMESTAMP
Figure 9-11 Vehicle Timestamp
Timestamp data is an absolutely essential element of all system operation and reporting. The purpose of this feature is to accommodate the configuration of field equipment operating in time zones offset from GMT/UTC.
By default, System time data is generated as:
GMT/UTC Greenwich Mean Time/ Universal Coordinated Time.
CONVERT GMT/UTC TO SITE LOCALE TIME
The difference in hours between the System generated time and that of the actual Site Location must be adjusted via the Add hours to Vehicle Timestamps option.
Time increments: .5 hr. intervals
Not enabled for the following data sources:
TCC 540 (WIM); or DAW 100
Example Conversion:
Pacific Time (PST8PDT) is eight (8) hours behind GMT Time.
To convert this timestamp data to Site Locale time:
Type or use the spin box arrows to set the Add hours to -8.
9.4.1.1 Determining A Precise Time Stamp Value
To determine a precise value for the time difference:
With the Add hours value set to 0.0 (default),
1. Using the Vehicle Display Wizard, examine a data file from a period of time when Daylight Saving Time is not in effect.
2. Note times of the first and last vehicles displayed:
If the first vehicle display occurs at in an hour other than 00:00 to 01:00, the data is collected in a time zone that is behind GMT.
If the last vehicle display occurs at in an hour other than 23:00 to 00:00, the data is collected in a time zone that is ahead of GMT.
3. Adjust the Add hours value (by adding or subtracting hours) until: (depending on time zone)
the first vehicle display is between 00:00 and 01:00; or
the last vehicle display is between 23:00 and 00:00.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL THE SITE EDITOR: CONFIGURING SITE SPECIFICS
IANALYZE PAGE 9-7
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
9.5 SELECTING A DATA SOURCE
Data generated by the diverse array of data collection equipment is saved in varying formats.
The Data Source pane displays current source file types from which to choose.
To select the appropriate source data type for the site:
Click the applicable data source.
1060 SERIES
1060 Series Data File Name Syntax: yyyymmdd.ext
Where
yyyy year; four (4) digits mm month; two (2) digits, 0 prefix required for single digit months dd day; two (2) digits; 0 prefix required for single digit days .ext Site ID extension
Example: 201501105.mn1
Interpreted as: Site file mn1 created on January 5th, 2015
TCC 540 (WIM)
Site ID is not used as a filter. iANALYZE uses ALL files in the directory.
Store each TCC (WIM) site in a separate directory.
TCC 540 (WIM) Data File Name Syntax: yyyymmdd[X].ext
Where
yyyy Year; four (4) digits
mm Month; two (2) digits, 0 prefix required for single digit months
dd Day; two (2) digits; 0 prefix required for single digit days
[X] File letter; [optional]
.ext Site ID extension
Examples: 20150102A.O12
Interpreted as: Site file O12, file A (1st file) created on January 2nd, 2015
20150102B.O12
Interpreted as: Site file O12, file B (2nd file) created on January 2nd, 2015
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL THE SITE EDITOR: CONFIGURING SITE SPECIFICS
IANALYZE PAGE 9-8
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
ISINC®
iSINC® File Name Syntax: yyyymmdd.ext
Where
yyyy Year; four (4) digits
mm Month; two (2) digits, 0 prefix required for single digit months
dd Day; two (2) digits; 0 prefix required for single digit days
.ext Site ID extension
Example: 20141215.123A
Interpreted as: Site file 123A created on December 12th, 2014
DAW 100
Two (2) DAW file formats:
Format 1
DAW 100 Data File Name Syntax: DsIDmmdd.yy
Where
D Filename Prefix
sID Site ID; three (3) characters
mm month; two (2) digits, 0 prefix required for single digit months
dd day; two (2) digits; 0 prefix required for single digit days
.yy year; two (2) digit extension
Format 1 Example: D2021201.14
Interpreted as: Filename (prefix D) for Site 202 created on December 1st, 2014
Format 2
DAW 100 Data File Name Syntax: yyyymmdd.ext
Where
yyyy Year; four (4) digits
mm Month; two (2) digits, 0 prefix required for single digit months
dd Day; two (2) digits; 0 prefix required for single digit days
.ext Site ID extension
Format 2 Example: 20141201.202
Interpreted as: Site file 202 created on December 1st, 2014
TRS WIM
Site ID is not used as a filter. iANALYZE uses ALL files in the directory.
Store each TRS WIM site in a separate directory.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL THE SITE EDITOR: CONFIGURING SITE SPECIFICS
IANALYZE PAGE 9-9
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
As year is not included in the file name syntax; maintain separate year directories or files will overwrite each other.
TRS WIM Data File Name Syntax: DmmddSeq.PRN
Where
D Filename Prefix
mm month; two (2) digits, 0 prefix required for single digit months
dd day; two (2) digits; 0 prefix required for single digit days
Seq Sequence; three (3) digits. Indicates the order in which the file was downloaded.
.PRN Data file extension; three (3) characters
Example: D1201001.PRN
Interpreted as: The first (prefix D) file created on December 1st, 2014
PRN FILES
N/A
NTCP 1206
N/A
9.6 SPECIFYING LANE INFORMATION Click the number of lanes at the site to enable that number of lanes in the reports.
Enter a lane name (up to 16 characters) to be used in the report headings.
The default lane names are: #1, #2, #3…
9.7 ADDITIONAL SITE REPORTING DEFAULTS Depending on the selected data source, any or all of the following may be options may be configured for the site:
Figure 9-12 Site Editor: Initial Configuration Dialogue Options
For Data Sources: DAW 100 or TRS WIM; Data Settings option is also displayed:
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL THE SITE EDITOR: CONFIGURING SITE SPECIFICS
IANALYZE PAGE 9-10
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
REPORTS LIST
Figure 9-13 Site Editor: Setup Available Reports List
The Setup Available Reports List provides the option to specify a relevant subset of reports from the Report Wizard to be used by this site.
To Display the Setup Available Reports List dialogue:
From the Site Editor Window,
Click
If the selected site Data Source does not provide all necessary information to create a report, it will not be displayed in the Reports Wizard/ Template Editor, even though it may be selected in this list.
For more information on selecting a report from the list, see section 6.1.2.1 Select Reports List, p. 6-6
Selection Operations
Click to select all reports. By default, all reports are selected.
Click to deselect all reports.
Click to display a Site List pop-up window.
Select a site to copy an existing report list from.
Dialogue Operations
Click to save the report list and close the window.
Click to discard selections and close the window.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL THE SITE EDITOR: CONFIGURING SITE SPECIFICS
IANALYZE PAGE 9-11
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
TMG DATA
See section 9.8 Configuring FHWA TMG Exports Information.
ESAL SETTINGS
Figure 9-14 Site Editor: ESAL Settings Dialogue
Equivalent Single Axle Load (ESAL) data is used to establish a damage relationship for comparing the effects of axles carrying different loads.
The iANALYZE ESAL Settings dialogue provides for the entry of variable parameters used in the calculation of Equivalent Single Axle Loads. Varying parameter settings may be used for each site.
To Display the ESAL Settings dialogue:
From the Site Editor Window,
Click
The ESAL Settings dialogue contains:
ESAL Methods Options
ESAL AASHTO Inputs pane
General Inputs pane; and an
On-Site ESAL Calculation option.
1
2 3
4
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL THE SITE EDITOR: CONFIGURING SITE SPECIFICS
IANALYZE PAGE 9-12
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
9.7.3.1 ESAL Methods
There are three (3) methods for calculating ESAL valuations:
AASHTO Tables AASHTO Formula; and General Formula
To select, click the radio button to the left of the method.
Selecting the AASHTO Tables or Formula method deactivates the General Inputs pane. Selecting General Formula deactivates ESAL AASHTO Inputs pane.
AASHTO Tables
The ESAL value is determined using the tables found in the 1993 AASHTO Guide for Design of Pavement Structures.
http://www.pavementinteractive.org/article/1993-aashto-flexible-pavement-structural-design/
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL THE SITE EDITOR: CONFIGURING SITE SPECIFICS
IANALYZE PAGE 9-13
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Table 4 AASHTO 1993 Tables
AASHTO Formula
The ESAL value is determined using the formula specified in the1993 AASHTO Guide for Design of Pavement Structures.
http://www.pavementinteractive.org/article/1993-aashto-flexible-pavement-structural-design/
General Formula
The ESAL value is determined using a general ESAL formula:
ESAL A L BkC D L
k
nk
[ * ]( / )
1
Where:
n = Number of axles on vehicle
A = ESAL Parameter 1
B = ESAL Parameter 2
C = ESAL Parameter 3
D = ESAL Parameter 4
L = Load on axle k in 1000's of kilograms (from system)
ESAL = Sum of values calculated for each axle of the vehicle, using the respective load (L) values
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL THE SITE EDITOR: CONFIGURING SITE SPECIFICS
IANALYZE PAGE 9-14
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
9.7.3.2 AASHTO Inputs Pane
Figure 9-15 Site Editor: ESAL Settings; AASHTO Inputs Pane
Using either the AASHTO Tables or Formula method, the Inputs pane provides for the specification of the following inputs:
Terminal Serviceability; and Pavement Type
Terminal Serviceability
Terminal Serviceability Index The minimum acceptable value before resurfacing or restructuring is necessary.
Recommended Values: 2.5 or 3 for major highways
2 for highways with a lower classification
Type an entry or use the spin box arrows to set the index (Pt) value.
Pavement Type
Rigid Slab Thickness. D(in); ESAL factors depend on the slab thickness
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL THE SITE EDITOR: CONFIGURING SITE SPECIFICS
IANALYZE PAGE 9-15
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Table 5 Terminal Serviceability Index of 2.5
Flexible Structural Number
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL THE SITE EDITOR: CONFIGURING SITE SPECIFICS
IANALYZE PAGE 9-16
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
9.7.3.3 General Inputs Pane
Parameters 1, 2, 3, and 4 can be applied to generate a custom function or curve.
When a load is specified in 1000’s of kilograms (tonnes), parameters A, B, C and D must be set accordingly.
9.7.3.4 Use ESAL Values Calculated On Site
If ESAL values are calculated on site and saved with individual vehicle records, selecting this checkbox will cause the ESAL value in each record to be used rather than recalculating the value when the report is generated. This will speed up processing time. If this option is selected and there are no ESAL values in the vehicle records, a pop up message warning of this condition will appear and the program will attempt to calculate the ESAL values using the site’s settings.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL THE SITE EDITOR: CONFIGURING SITE SPECIFICS
IANALYZE PAGE 9-17
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
DAYLIGHT SAVING
Figure 9-16 Daylight Saving Time Adjustments
DST: Daylight Saving Time
Old DST: DST that starts in Canada / United States on the first Sunday in April and ends on the last Sunday in October.
New DST: DST that starts in Canada / United States on the second Sunday in March and ends on the first Sunday in November.
Clicking the Daylight Saving… button opens the window where Daylight Savings Time for a selected site is adjusted.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL THE SITE EDITOR: CONFIGURING SITE SPECIFICS
IANALYZE PAGE 9-18
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Figure 9-17 Daylight Savings window
If Use Daylight Saving Time checkbox is selected, the fields Daylight Saving Time Change in minutes, Year, Daylight Saving Begins, Daylight Savings Ends, Reset button, Reset All button and Manual DST Adjustment checkbox will be active.
Site- Site ID and Site Name of the selected site. These fields are inactive.
Daylight Saving Time Change in minutes – This can be set to either 60 minutes (1hr) or 30mins. If set to 60 minutes, this means Daylight Saving time changes by 60 minutes. If set to 30 minutes, this means Daylight Saving time changes by 30 minutes.
Year – Click the down arrow to display a list of available years.
Daylight Saving Begins – This field defaults to US Daylight Saving beginning date and
time. To change from the default, click the down arrow to display a calendar and then adjust the beginning date and time of Daylight Saving.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL THE SITE EDITOR: CONFIGURING SITE SPECIFICS
IANALYZE PAGE 9-19
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Daylight Saving Ends – This field defaults US Daylight Saving end date and time. To
change from the default, click the down arrow to display a calendar and then adjust the Daylight Saving End date and time.
Reset Button – Changes both Daylight Saving Begins and Daylight Saving Ends fields of the selected year to default values.
Reset All Button – Changes both Daylight Saving Begins and Daylight Saving Ends fields of ALL years to default values.
Manual DST Adjustment checkbox – Select this checkbox if your data collection system does not automatically change the clock to the New DST.
If the Manual DST Adjustment checkbox is selected, all the following checkboxes will become active but the date and time fields will remain inactive. If any of the Manual DST checkboxes are selected, the date and time field will become active as shown below:
Figure 9-18 Time adjustment
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL THE SITE EDITOR: CONFIGURING SITE SPECIFICS
IANALYZE PAGE 9-20
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
The date and time fields are set by default to the New DST start and end times. To
change from the default, click the down arrow to display a calendar and then adjust the date and time.
Adjust Time before DST start– Select this checkbox if daylight savings time was manually adjusted on the System clock before the start date of the Old DST.
Adjust Time after DST start– Select this checkbox if daylight savings time was manually adjusted on the System clock after the start date of the Old DST and before the end date of the Old DST.
Adjust Time before DST end– Select this checkbox if daylight savings time was manually adjusted on the System clock after the end date of the Old DST and before the end date of the New DST.
Adjust Time after DST end– Select this checkbox if daylight savings time was manually adjusted on the System clock after the end date of the New DST.
System Daylight Saving Time begins– Select this checkbox to enter the System start DST (start date of the Old DST).
System Daylight Saving Time ends– Select this checkbox to enter the System end DST (end date of the Old DST).
System Upgrade Time–Select this checkbox to enter the date and time the System was upgraded to the newer version that has the New DST settings. While creating reports, the data after this date should not be affected by the above settings.
PRN SETTINGS
Figure 9-19 PRN Report Configuration
iANALYZE can convert and generate site data to a .PRN (printer) report file for export to other programs. The PRN Report Configuration window established the Header and captured detail of the output file.
Station # – enter the identifier for the station (maximum 12 alphanumeric characters).
ID – enter the site ID (maximum 12 alphanumeric characters).
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL THE SITE EDITOR: CONFIGURING SITE SPECIFICS
IANALYZE PAGE 9-21
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Unit ID – enter the two digit identification number of the data collection device.
Lane Layout – select the layout of sensors attached to the counting device in the lane.
City – enter the name of the city identifier (if applicable) for the site (maximum 20 alphanumeric characters).
County – enter the county identifier (if applicable) in which the site is located (maximum 20 alphanumeric characters).
Location – enter the location the site (maximum 40 alphanumeric characters).
Interval – enter the time interval, in minutes, to be used for the bins produced in the PRN file report. Note that the interval specified here will only be used when deriving PRN data from per vehicle input data. When binned data is used to produce the PRN file, the interval used by the bins will be used.
Direction Information – the direction of traffic flow for each lane in which data was collected; select the direction that most closely approximates the direction of traffic flow in that lane.
VEHICLE MERGING
Figure 9-20 Vehicle Merging Settings
Some sites produce data files that contain matched vehicle records. Matched vehicle records are produced if the data gathering system has multiple sets of sensors in the same traffic stream (, for example from an upstream and a downstream set of sensors) and the system is capable of determining that the same vehicle has produced two or more vehicle records (using vehicle speed, number of axles, etc.).
The data gathering system will assign matched vehicle records the same vehicle record number to indicate that both records were produced by the same vehicle. Because vehicle record numbers are assigned in sequence from a limited range of numbers, the same record number may be assigned multiple times during a data collection period; to ensure that only records created by the same vehicle are matched, the search through the data for the collection period is limited to the specified time. iANALYZE can merge the external data items for matched vehicle records from data files for use with the View Vehicles display. (See section 5.1.3.3 for more information on External Data Items).
3. Select the checkbox to use this feature.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL THE SITE EDITOR: CONFIGURING SITE SPECIFICS
IANALYZE PAGE 9-22
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
4. Record from lane - select the option to determine which of the matched records the external data item will be attached to:
With most information – iANALYZE can determine the lane that has the most information (based on a vehicle’s record type) and merge the external data into vehicle records from that lane
Specific – the merge process will merge external data items into the matched vehicle record from the specified lane. If a matched vehicle in the specified lane is not found, external data items will be merged into the first vehicle record found for the matched vehicles.
Time:
Specifies the maximum time difference, in minutes, between vehicles with the same vehicle record number to be considered matched. This should be set slightly longer than the maximum time that a vehicle would be expected to take to travel between the first and last set of sensors at the site.
DATA SETTINGS
For Data Sources: DAW 100 or TRS WIM
9.7.7.1 DAW 100 Data Settings
Figure 9-21 DAW100 Data Settings
The left and right wheel weight data from a DAW100 can be reversed in each lane of the site. This may be necessary if data has been collected on a DAW100 using a non-standard sensor connection (standard is left weight sensor connected to terminal 1).
To Swap Left/ Right weights:
1. Click the checkbox(es) of the lane(s) to be reversed.
2. Click .
9.7.7.2 TRS WIM Data Settings
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL THE SITE EDITOR: CONFIGURING SITE SPECIFICS
IANALYZE PAGE 9-23
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Figure 9-22 TRS WIM Data Settings
iANALYZE can correct per vehicle data records in a data file received from a TRS data recorder with the same method used by the TRS data recorder when binning traffic data.
Filter Tailgaters – select this checkbox to separate vehicle records for vehicles that the TRS would flag as tailgating. This condition occurs when the TRS detects 2 axles that are separated by a distance greater than a predefined distance; in this case it assumes the last 2 axles belong to a separate vehicle and creates a separate record for thetailgating vehicle.
Filter Short Gaps – select this checkbox to clean up vehicle records having an axle spacing less than a predefined minimum distance. These records may occur if the roadway at the site has become uneven, resulting in axle bounce.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL THE SITE EDITOR: CONFIGURING SITE SPECIFICS
IANALYZE PAGE 9-24
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
9.8 CONFIGURING FHWA TMG EXPORTS INFORMATION
Figure 9-23 FHWA TMG Exports Information
All FWHA definitions and values of terms are interpreted by IRD however, the FWHA is the final authority on any Traffic Monitoring Guide subject. For more information, see http://www.fhwa.dot.gov/policyinformation/tmguide/.
To access FHWA Traffic Monitoring Guide (TMG) Exports Information:
Click .
Any fields that do not require entry data to produce a record can be set to Blank.
TMG DATA: STATION DESCRIPTION INFORMATION 1
FIPS State Code FHWA code for the state or province where the site is located.
1. To select a code, click the down arrow to display an alphabetical drop down list of states and provinces.
2. Use the scroll bar to move the list up or down until the locale of the site appears, and
3. Click the state or province.
Station ID Identification number assigned to this station.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL THE SITE EDITOR: CONFIGURING SITE SPECIFICS
IANALYZE PAGE 9-25
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Functional Class FHWA classification for the site.
1. To select a class, click the down arrow to display a drop down list of site classes
2. click the corresponding to the site.
9.8.1.1 Lane/ Dir of Travel
Each lane (from 1 to 8) has two drop down menus.
Lane Number 0 Combined designates that data from all lanes in a selected direction is to be combined.
If 0 Combined is selected for any lane, the lane assignments for all other lanes in that direction must also be 0 Combined (i.e. you cannot have a mixture of some combined and some separate lanes in the same direction.
If data is to be separated for each lane, the Rightmost (farthest right hand lane when facing downstream) lane is assigned number 1 and all Other lanes should be assigned 2 through 9 starting from the right.
To select a lane number, click the down arrow to display a drop down list.
Direction of Travel Approximate direction of travel for each lane at the report site.
To select a direction, click the down arrow to display a drop down list of directions.
9.8.1.2 Traffic volume:
Sample Type Used to indicate whether data from this station is used for Traffic Volume Trends:
Blank no entry for this parameter T = Used for Traffic Volume Trends N = Not used for Traffic Volume trends
Counting Method Type of Traffic Counter:
Blank no entry for this parameter 1 = Human Observation (manual) 2 = Portable traffic counting device 3 = Permanent automatic traffic recorder (ATR)
Lanes Monitored Number of lanes for which traffic volumes are monitored at this site.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL THE SITE EDITOR: CONFIGURING SITE SPECIFICS
IANALYZE PAGE 9-26
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
9.8.1.3 Classification:
Sample Type Used to indicate if data from this station is used in the Heavy Vehicle Traffic Information System:
Blank no entry for this parameter H = Used for Heavy Vehicle Traffic Information System N = Not used for Heavy Vehicle Traffic Information System
Method Method used to classify heavy vehicles:
Blank: no entry for this parameter Human observation (manual) vehicle classification Portable vehicle classification device Permanent vehicle classification device
Algorithm Displays the algorithm used to sort vehicles into classes:
Blank no entry for this parameter A = Human observation on site (manual) B = Human observation of vehicle image (e.g. video) C = Automated interpretation of image or signature D = Vehicle length classification E = Axle spacing with ASTM standard E1572 F = Axle spacing with scheme F G = Axle spacing with scheme F modified H = Other axle spacing algorithm K = Axle spacing and weight algorithm L = Axle spacing and vehicle length algorithm M = Axle spacing, weight and vehicle length algorithm N = Axle spacing and other input(s) not specified above Z = Other means not specified above
System Total number of classes in the vehicle classification system used. The default of 13 is the standard FHWA 13 class system.
Maximum number of classes is 75.
Lanes Monitored Number of lanes that are monitored for vehicle classification (up to a maximum of the number of lanes at the site).
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL THE SITE EDITOR: CONFIGURING SITE SPECIFICS
IANALYZE PAGE 9-27
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
9.8.1.4 Truck Weight:
Sample Type Destination usage for truck weight data from this station:
Blank no entry for this parameter B = Station used for TMG sample and SHRP LTPP sample L = Station used for SHRP LTPP sample but not TMG sample T = Station used for TMG sample but not SHRP LTPP sample N = Station not used for any of the above
Weighing Method Type of weigh scale in use at the site:
Blank no entry for this parameter 1 = Portable static scale 2 = Chassis mounted, towed static scale 3 = Platform or pit static scale 4 = Portable weigh-in-motion scale 5 = Permanent weigh-in-motion scale
System Calibration Method used to calibrate the weighing system used to gather data:
Blank no entry for this parameter A = ASTM Standard 1318 B = Subset of ASTM Standard 1318 C = Test trucks / trucks from the traffic stream (not ASTM
Standard 1318) D = Other sample of trucks from the traffic stream M = Moving average of the steering axle of 3S2s S = Static calibration T = Test trucks only U = Uncalibrated Z = Other method
Lanes Monitored Displays the number of lanes that are monitored for vehicle weight (up to a maximum of the number of lanes at the site).
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL THE SITE EDITOR: CONFIGURING SITE SPECIFICS
IANALYZE PAGE 9-28
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
TMG DATA: STATION DESCRIPTION INFORMATION 2
Figure 9-24 TMG Data: Station Description Information 2
Data Retrieval Method Method by which files are retrieved from the data collection site.
Blank no entry for this parameter Not automated (manual) Automated (telemetry)
Sensor Type Type of sensor used for traffic detection
Blank: no entry for this parameter A = Automatic vehicle identification (AVI) B = Bending Plate C = Capacitance strip D = Capacitance mat/pad E = Hydraulic load cell F = Fiber optic NEW G = Strain gauge on bridge beam H = Human observation (manual) I = Infrared K = Laser/lidar L = Inductance loop M = Magnetometer
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL THE SITE EDITOR: CONFIGURING SITE SPECIFICS
IANALYZE PAGE 9-29
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
N = None P = Piezoelectric Q = Quartz piezoelectric NEW R = Road tube S = Sonic/acoustic T = Tape switch U = Ultrasonic V = Video image W = Microwave X = Radio wave Z = Other
2nd Sensor Type For a second sensor used in traffic detection, select the type, otherwise select N= None.
Blank no entry for this parameter A = Automatic vehicle identification (AVI) B = Bending Plate C = Capacitance strip D = Capacitance mat/pad E = Hydraulic load cell F = Fiber optic NEW G = Strain gauge on bridge beam H = Human observation (manual) I = Infrared K = Laser/lidar L = Inductance loop M = Magnetometer N = None P = Piezoelectric Q = Quartz piezoelectric NEW R = Road tube S = Sonic/acoustic T = Tape switch U = Ultrasonic V = Video image W = Microwave X = Radio wave Z = Other
Primary Purpose Main purpose for installing this station and by implication the organization responsible for the station and the data from it:
Blank no entry for this parameter E = Enforcement (e.g. speed or weight enforcement) I = Operations initiatives in support of ITS initiatives L = Load data for pavement design or management O = Planning or Traffic statistics purposes R = Research purposes (e.g. LTPP)
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL THE SITE EDITOR: CONFIGURING SITE SPECIFICS
IANALYZE PAGE 9-30
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
LRS identification 12-character Linear Referencing System identification code as reported in the Highway Performance Monitoring System for the section of roadway where the station is located.
Leading zeros must be included, no blank spaces are allowed in the ID code.
Refer to Chapter 5 of the HPMS Field Manual: Linear referencing System Requirements.
Location Point Linear Referencing System kilometer location point (KMPT) for the station.
Format: KKK.mmm (3 kilometer digits, decimal, 3 meter digits).
If this value is unknown, enter -1.
Latitude Latitude coordinate (north hemisphere assumed) of the site in degrees, minutes and seconds.
Format: DD.MMMSSS (decimal point between degrees and minutes, no separator between minutes and seconds).
If this value is unknown, enter -1.
Longitude Longitude coordinate (west hemisphere assumed) of the site in degrees, minutes and seconds.
Format: DDD.MMMSSS (decimal point between degrees and minutes, no separator between minutes and seconds).
If this value is unknown, enter -1.
SHRP Site ID Used to indicate a site used for Strategic Highways Research Program data.
Enter the SHRP identification number.
Previous Station ID Used to indicate whether a station replaces another station.
Enter the identification of the previous station.
Year Station Established Number of years ago that the station started operations.
Use the up/down arrows to increment/decrement the count.
If this value is unknown, enter -1.
Year Station Discontinued Number of years ago that the station ended operations.
Use the up/down arrows to increment/decrement the count.
If this value is unknown, enter -1.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL THE SITE EDITOR: CONFIGURING SITE SPECIFICS
IANALYZE PAGE 9-31
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
FIPS County Code 3 digit Federal Information Processing Standards county code (refer to Federal Information Processing Standards Publication 6: Counties of the States of the United States).
On HPMS Standard Sample Section? Enter Y if this site is on an HPMS sample section; otherwise enter N.
HPMS Sample Identifier Enter Y this site is on an HPMS sample section.
Enter the HPMS Sample Identifier code as per HPMS Field Manual.
On National Highway System? Enter Y if this site is on the National Highway System; otherwise enter N.
9.8.2.1 Route Signing
Posted Agency in control of highway signage at the site, as per HMPS Field Manual:
Blank no entry for this parameter 0 Not signed 1 Interstate 2 US 3 State 4 Off-Interstate business marker 5 County 6 Township 7 Municipal 8 Parkway or forest route marker 9 None of the above
Posted Number Route number of the principal route on which the site is located.
If the site is on a city street, enter 0 (zero).
Concurrent For a concurrent highway number posted, select the second posting agency here:
Blank no entry for this parameter 0 Not signed 1 Interstate 2 US 3 State 4 Off-Interstate business marker 5 County 6 Township 7 Municipal 8 Parkway or forest route marker 9 None of the above
Concurrent Number Route number posted by the second posting agency.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL THE SITE EDITOR: CONFIGURING SITE SPECIFICS
IANALYZE PAGE 9-32
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Station Location Description of the site location (max 50 characters, abbreviate if necessary).
For stations on a numbered route, enter the distance and direction of the station from the nearest major intersecting route, state border, or landmark on state road maps.
For stations located on a city street, enter the city name and street address.
TMG DATA: EXPORT SPECIFIC OPTIONS
Figure 9-25 TMG Data: Export Specific Options
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL LANGUAGE FILES
IANALYZE PAGE 10-1
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
10 LANGUAGE FILES
10.1 HOW IANALYZE USES LANGUAGE FILES The iANALYZE program uses language resource files to change the text displayed in the program user interface and for report outputs. iANALYZE will attempt to match a language resource file to the regional settings of the Microsoft Windows operating system. If no resource file is found, the default (internal English language) file will be used.
This section describes how to create and modify language resource files.
Language files and utilities are found in the iANALYZE program Culture directory; default locations:
Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Documents\IRD\iAnalyze;
Vista or Windows 7: C:\Users\Public\Documents\IRD\iAnalyze.
User modifiable language files are in XML format and are identified by their .resx file extension.
Once the .resx files have been modified to contain the require English to destination language translations, they are transformed using the ResGen.exe utility (also installed in the Culture directory) into the .resource format language files that are used by iANALYZE (refer to section 10.5 - Creating Resource Files).
10.2 OPENING A LANGUAGE FILE Any of the language files with a .resx extension can be opened in either a Plain text editor or an XML editor. Some XML editors modify the file header, which will cause problems, for this reason it is recommended that a plain text editor be used. The descriptions given below are for editing the file with a plain text editor. An XML editor that displays in data mode will likely list the fields in columns, making it slightly more user friendly.
The content of the file is identified by xml tags; each tag is enclosed in angle brackets <…>.
The header section is identified by the <xsd> … </xsd> and <resheader> … </resheader> tags and makes up approximately the first 120 lines of the file. The header should not be changed.
Below the header section is the actual language content of the file. Each language text element (labels, messages, report information, etc.) that can be modified is contained within a pair of <data name=xxx> … </data> tags. The name in the <data> tag will be
unique for each language text element; it is what iANALYZE uses to identify the language text element and should not be modified. Between each pair of <data> …</data> tags are three tag pairs that describe the content of the language text element:
<comment> … </comment> - delimits the field that contains addition information about how or where the language element is used. The comment is for information only and is not used in the translation; it may be changed without affecting the translation, but this is not recommended. The first line of the comment tag will
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL LANGUAGE FILES
IANALYZE PAGE 10-2
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
begin with the words:English text , followed by the English language version of the contents of the <value> tag. This may be followed by other comment content.
<value> … </value> - delimits the field that contains the translation of the language text element. This field is the only part of each language element that should be modified.
CREATING A LANGUAGE FILE
When iANALYZE is installed, a file named Language.resx is loaded; this is the default English language file, which can be modified as described below to create a new language file.
Open the Language.resx file
When the Language.resx file is initially opened, the <value> fields will contain the default English text. This will result in any text that is not translated being displayed in English. The default English text will also appear in the comment field.
After the Language.resx file has been opened, create a new file by saving to a new file name as follows:
Save to the iANALYZE Culture directory
(default:
on Windows XP : C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Documents\IRD\iAnalyze
on Vista or Windows 7: C:\Users\Public\Documents\IRD\iAnalyze )
The filename must be: Language.xx-YY.resx
where xx is the two letter ISO 639 language code (refer to appendix .1.1.1.1G.1)
and YY is the two letter ISO 3166 country code (refer to appendix 0).
Example filenames:
For United States – Language.en-US.resx
For Thailand – Language.th-TH.resx
For Canada – Language.en-CA.resx Once the new .resx file has been created, proceed to edit the value fields with the translations as described in section 10.4.
10.3 MODIFYING A LANGUAGE FILE Any existing Language.xx-YY.resx file can be edited to change an existing translation to
an updated translation.
Open the Language.xx-YY.resx file.
Locate the language text element(s) to be modified and edit the <value> field as described in the next section.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL LANGUAGE FILES
IANALYZE PAGE 10-3
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
10.4 VALUE FIELDS The <value> fields are the parts of the .resx file that are modified to contain translations of the English language text in the <englishText> field.
In addition, the following special options may be used in the <value> field:
BLANK VALUE
If the field between the <value> </value> tags contains only blank spaces (or no space), the default English text from the internal language file will be used for that language text element.
FORCING TRANSLATION TEXT TO BE A BLANK SPACE
To force a blank space to be displayed for a language text element, enter <value>SP4CE</value> in the field for that language text element.
FORCING TRANSLATION TEXT TO BE NOTHING (NULL)
To force no text to be displayed for a language text element, enter <value>N4THING</value> in the field for that language text element.
CARRIAGE RETURN
To cause a carriage return/line feed (new line) in a language text element, enter \n at the position in the text where the carriage return/line feed is to occur.
ALT KEY FUNCTIONS
In addition to selecting them with a mouse click, some program operations can be performed by pressing a combination of keys at the same time, usually the Alt key and a specific letter key. These are called Alt-Key or Quick Key commands. Language text elements with this option will usually have the phrase in the <comment> field:Underscore precedes a (unique) character for Alt-Key functionality to indicate that this option is present.
Alt-Key commands are optional, if an Alt-Key command is present in the <englishText> field it may or may not be translated into the <value> field at the translators discretion.
To specify an Alt-Key command in a <value> field, insert the underscore character _ before the character to be used for the Alt-Key command.
Alphabet keys are not case sensitive; the shift key does not have to be pressed if the letter is capitalized in the text. Non-alphabet key that require the Shift key to produce the character will require all three keys (Alt/Shift/character) pressed for the Alt-Key command.
Examples:
To make an Alt-Key command to activate theClose button by pressing the Alt and C keys simultaneously, enter <value>_Close</value> .
To make an Alt-Key command to activate thePreview function by pressing the Alt and v keys, enter <value>_view</value>
To make an Alt-Key command to activate theStart Class: input field by pressing the Alt, Shift and : keys, enter <value>Start Class_:</value>
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL LANGUAGE FILES
IANALYZE PAGE 10-4
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Note: iANALYZE Version 4.3 and earlier used the ampersand character & to specify Alt Key commands. These have been changed to underscore in subsequent version language files released by IRD, but if a system is using a language file not supplied by IRD, all Alt Key command instances of ampersand should be replaced by an underscore to have the commands function properly.
10.4.5.1 Shared Alt-Key Commands
Some Alt-Key commands can be used to control more than one operation (iANALYZE can determine the usage from the command context). The following types of controls can share Alt-Key commands:
Text fields
Radio buttons
List boxes
Combo boxes
Drop-down lists
Group box titles
Example: if bothStart Class andEnd Class List box selection operations have been coded to use Alt-C as their Alt-Key command:
The first time Alt-C is pressed, the Start Class list box will be selected
The second time Alt-C is pressed, the End Class list box will be selected
The third time Alt-C is pressed, the Start Class list box will be selected again, and so on …
The following types of controls cannot use a shared Alt-Key command:
Buttons
Tabs If a button and any other control option are both programmed with the same Alt-Key command, the button command will always take precedence when the Alt-Key command is pressed and the other command will never take place.
10.5 CREATING RESOURCE FILES Once the changes are complete to the .resx XML language file, save and close the file.
Create a batch file to run the ResGen utility to generate a .resources language file from the new or modified .resx XML file that has just been edited. The batch file can be created either by editing the existing ResxtoResources.bat in the Culture directory or by making a new file. The file can have any name but must end in .bat; for example Resx_to_Resource.bat. Each line of the file will have the following format:
ResGen Language.xx-YY.resx Language.xx-YY.resource
where Language.xx-YY is the filename with the language and country code (refer to Appendix 0).
Normally the file will contain only one line with the name of the edited .resx file, but if a system uses multiple language files and they have all been edited, the batch file would have a line for each modified file. Each line in the batch file will generate one resource file.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL LANGUAGE FILES
IANALYZE PAGE 10-5
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Example: the base Language file, a Canadian English, American English and Thai Language files have all been modified, the batch file would appear as follows:
ResGen Language.resx Language.resources
ResGen Language.en-CA.resx Language.en-CA.resources
ResGen Language.en-US.resx Language.en-US.resources
ResGen Language.th-TH.resx Language.th-TH.resources
Save the batch file in the Culture directory.
Double click the batch file in the Culture directory to run the utility. Any new .resource files will be created in the Culture directory, existing .resource files will be replaced with the new version.
10.6 IANALYZE USAGE OF LANGUAGE FILES iANALYZE uses the language file stored in the Culture directory that matches the Windows operating system Regional settings for the computer on which iANALYZE is running.
The language file must be named according to the following convention:
Language.xx-YY.resources
where xx is the two letter ISO 639 language code and YY is the two letter ISO 3166 country code (refer to appendix 0).
If there is no Language.xx-YY.resources file that matches the computers Regional settings, iANALYZE will use the default external language file Language.resources, which, if it has not been modified, will display English text.
If there is no Language.resources file, iANALYZE will use its internal file and display English text.
REGIONAL SETTINGS
To set the Microsoft Windows operating system Regional settings:
Open the Windows Control Panel, Select Regional Settings
on the Regional Options tab
under the Standards and Formats heading, select the language to match the language code in the .resource file name language code.
under the Location heading, select the country to match the .resource file name country code.
Example: the Windows settings for the file Language.th_TH.resource would appear similar to the figure below:
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL LANGUAGE FILES
IANALYZE PAGE 10-6
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Figure 10-1 Windows Regional and Language settings
10.6.1.1 Gregorian Calendar Setting
iANALYZE requires that the date setting that the Windows operating system uses be the Gregorian Calendar. If another calendar is used, the following error message will be displayed when iANALYZE is started:
To change the calendar, click the Advanced button on the Regional Options panel to open the Customize Regional Settings window, select the Date tab, and from the Calendar type drop down list, select the Gregorian Calendar:
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL LANGUAGE FILES
IANALYZE PAGE 10-7
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Figure 10-2 Changing to Gregorian Calendar
Any time the regional settings are changed, the calendar used may be automatically reset by Windows; always check the calendar setting after changing the regional settings.
INCORPORATING A LANGUAGE FILE
To incorporate an external language file:
1. Create a new .resx language file or open an existing .resx language file in the Culture directory
2. Edit the .resx file to set translations as desired. 3. Generate the .resources file from that .resx file (see section 10.5). 4. Set the Computer’s regional settings to match the language and country naming
convention of the filename. 5. Run iANALYZE; it should now use the new external language file and display
translated text.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Problem Description:
Regardless of the translation/text in the .resx file, the text displayed by iANALYZE has not changed.
Possible Reasons:
1. incorrect field in .resx file updated 2. resources file not created because .resx file not stored in the Culture directory 3. resources file not re-created after change to .resx file 4. resources file not stored in the correct location (Culture directory)
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL LANGUAGE FILES
IANALYZE PAGE 10-8
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
5. resources file not named properly 6. Regional Settings not configured correctly
Solution:
1. incorrect field in .resx file updated If any field other than the value field in the .resx XML file is changed, the translation will not be updated. It may in fact break the program’s ability to translate that field at all (and iANALYZE will therefore default to its internal English language file).
2. .resources file not created because .resx file not stored in the Culture directory The iANALYZE program does not use the .resx file to determine translations. Rather, it uses a .resources file that is created from the .resx file. See section 10.5.
Ensure that the .resources file is stored in the Culture directory.
3. .resources file not re-created after change to .resx file The iANALYZE program does not use the .resx file for translations; rather, it uses a .resources file that is created from the .resx file. See section 10.5.
Ensure that after the .resx file was updated, a new .resources file was created and stored in the Culture directory.
4. .resources file not stored in the correct location (Culture directory) The iANALYZE program only looks for the .resources file in the iANALYZE program’s Culture directory. If iANALYZE was installed to the default location, this directory is:
on Windows XP : C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Documents\IRD\iAnalyze
on Vista or Windows 7: C:\Users\Public\Documents\IRD\iAnalyze
Ensure that the .resources file is in the correct location.
5. .resources file not named properly The iANALYZE program only looks for .resources files that match its regional settings (or, failing to find a matching regional setting, it will look for Language.resources).
Ensure that the language file is named correctly according to the convention described in section 10.6.
6. Regional Settings not configured correctly The iANALYZE program only looks for a .resources file that matches the computer’s regional settings (or, failing to find file with a matching regional setting, it will look for the default file Language.resources).
Ensure that the regional settings are set appropriately (see example in section 10.6).
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX A IANALYZE INSTALLATION NOTES
IANALYZE PAGE A-1
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Appendices
Appendix A IANALYZE INSTALLATION NOTES
PRESERVED INSTALLATION SETTINGS
The following files are not affected by upgrading from a previous version of iANALYZE:
Operator’s Manual Site Configurations Logs Generated Reports Custom Parameters User Information Settings Units Selection Classification Selection Classification Files Vehicle Records Custom Image Files jpegs/ bitmaps used in report headers
The following files will be removed or overwritten when iANALYZE is uninstalled:
Language Files .resx and resource files located in the Culture directory
Program Files iANALYZE executables .exe and associated .dll files
Noimage.jpg placeholder icon displayed in Vehicle View when site images are not available.
If this file has been modified (i.e. replaced it with a customized icon) it will be lost in the de-install process.
To retain a customized language file, copy the file to a safe location (not under the iANALYZE directory).
Note If an upgrade is to a more recent version of software, the language file tags may not all be compatible; in this case the language file will require editing to update the changed tags. These changes may be performed by the customer or by contacting an IRD service representative.
To retain a customized noimage.jpg file, copy the file to a safe location (not under the iANALYZE directory) until after the new installation is completed, then recopy the saved file over the installed noimage.jpg file.
.NET FRAMEWORK AND CRYSTAL REPORTS RUNTIME LIBRARY
iANALYZE requires the following:
Microsoft .NET Framework Version 4.0 Full version or later; and Crystal Reports Runtime Library 13.0.14*
* ONLY version 13.0.14 is supported.
The above files and libraries will be installed when setup is run from the installation CD.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX A IANALYZE INSTALLATION NOTES
IANALYZE PAGE A-2
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
IANALYZE OPERATOR’S MANUAL
The iANALYZE Operator’s Manual is located on the iANALYZE Installation CD and copied to the default directory during the installation process.
Name:
Directory: C:\Users\Public\Public Documents\IRD\iANALYZE
Should the following error occur when accessing the manual from the application, the .pdf may be manually copied from the CD to the default directory.
IANALYZE INSTALLATION STEPS
Typically, installing over a previous installation of iANALYZE will proceed smoothly. If however, a version conflict is indicated during the current installation process, the existing iANALYZE version will need to be removed.
A.4.1 Remove Previous iANALYZE Version
Should the above warning message appear during installation, remove the existing iAnalyze version and re-run the installation wizard.
To remove a previous version of iANALYZE:
A.4.1.1 Windows XP
From the system Control Panel,
1. Select Add/Remove Programs.
2. Select Change or Remove Programs.
3. Under currently installed programs, locate and click iANALYZE
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX A IANALYZE INSTALLATION NOTES
IANALYZE PAGE A-3
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
4. Click Remove.
5. At the Remove Program message prompt, click Yes.
The iANALYZE program and associated windows shortcuts are uninstalled.
Proceed with iANALYZE installation.
A.4.1.2 Windows 7/8
From the system Control Panel,
1. Select Programs.
2. Click Uninstall a program.
3. In the programs list, locate and click iANALYZE.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX A IANALYZE INSTALLATION NOTES
IANALYZE PAGE A-4
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
4. Click Uninstall.
5. At the uninstall iAnalyze message prompt, click Yes.
The iANALYZE program and associated windows shortcuts are uninstalled.
Proceed with iANALYZE installation.
A.4.2 Insert iANALYZE Installation CD
1. Login using an account with sufficient (administrator) permissions to make system level changes.
2. Place the IRD installation CD in the CD drive.
The autoinstaller will automatically install required files and initiate the iANALYZE installation wizard.
.NET Framework and Crystal Reports Runtime Library will be installed as necessary.
Troubleshooting Tips
Problem Solution
Autoinstaller doesn’t start. Navigate to the root directory of the CD. 64-bit edition OS: Double-click Setup64.exe 32-bit edition OS (or unknown):
Double-click Setup.exe
Remove iANALYZE version warning appears.
Click OK to close the warning message. Uninstall current iANALYZE version, see section A.3.1 Re-attempt installation.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX A IANALYZE INSTALLATION NOTES
IANALYZE PAGE A-5
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
A.4.3 Complete Installation Wizard Prompts
To complete the iANALYZE installation:
1. At the iANALYZE Setup License Agreement window, scroll through the agreement and click Accept.
The iANALYZE file download begins.
A version conflict prompt may occur during the file download stage. See section A.3.1 Remove Previous iANALYZE Version for more information.
2. At the iANALYZE Setup Wizard Welcome window, click Next.
3. At the iANALYZE License Agreement window:
Scroll through the agreement and click I agree; click Next.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX A IANALYZE INSTALLATION NOTES
IANALYZE PAGE A-6
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
4. At the iANALYZE Customer Information window, type:
Customer name Organization name; and Click Next.
5. At the iANALYZE Select Installation Folder window,
Review or select the installation directory; click Next.
6. At the iANALYZE Confirm Installation window, click Next.
Once the installation is complete,
7. At the Installation Complete window, click Close.
A.4.4 File Relocation
Copy any custom language or noimage.jpg files saved from a previous installation, back to the appropriate directories.
A.4.5 Installation Cleanup
If the installation folder was copied onto the computer, delete it.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX B IANALYZE COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
IANALYZE PAGE B-1
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Appendix B IANALYZE COMMAND LINE INTERFACE iANALYZE may also be run as a command line application as described below. This is useful for running iAnalyze from a script or batch file.
COMMAND LINE SYNTAX
ianalyze [-p XXX | -t FFFF.EEE] [-d path] [-s ZZZ] [-b
MMDDYYYY -e MMDDYYYY] [-f file]
COMMAND LINE PARAMETERS
-p sends output to the default printer
XXX [Optional] three character string (currently ignored)
Backwards compatibility feature so that command line files for previous releases may still be used
-t specifies output as text file
FFFF specifies text to be prefixed to the output file name
EEE specifies a three-character file type extension (output file format)
appended to the output file name
Valid standard report formats are:
.pdf – portable document format
.txt – plain ASCII text
.rtf – rich text format
.doc – Microsoft Word document (97-2003)
.xls – Microsoft Excel spreadsheet (97-2003)
All other extensions default to plain text format
–d path [Optional] Data path used to specify data file location
If not specified, uses the configured site data path.
A path name with spaces must be enclosed in quotation marks.
–s ZZZ [Optional] Specifies a data Site using the three-character data site
extension ZZZ
If not specified, reports are generated for all sites.
–b MMDDYYYY [Optional] Specifies reporting Begin (start) date
If not specified, the date of the oldest file found in the data directory is used. By default, time of day starts just after midnight on the morning of the start date.
–e MMDDYYYY [Optional] Specifies reporting End (stop) date
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX B IANALYZE COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
IANALYZE PAGE B-2
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
If not specified, the date of the most recent file + 1 day, is used. By default, time of day ends just before midnight on the evening of the end date.
Date options may not be present for all data types. If the data type does not contain date information, reports may only be
generated on whole data files.
–f file [Optional] Specifies the setup (template) File to be used
If not specified, by default, the report listing and filter criteria are generated from the Most Recently Used template (i.e. the reports that were most recently generated in the Report Wizard User Interface screen).
The graphical user interface can be used to create a template specifying which reports are to be generated (see section 8). These reports can then be generated from the command line.
OUTPUT FILENAME SYNTAX
Generating a report from the command line will result in the following filename syntax: FFFF_ZZZ_RRRRR.EEE
where: FFFF is the text from the –t parameter
ZZZ is the site extension
RRRRR is the report name
EEE is the file type extension from the –t parameter
COMMAND LINE AND CUSTOM REPORTS
Custom reports each have an output format specific to the report, as outlined in the table below. These report names are prepended with the FFFF when generated from the
command line.
Custom Report Output Format
FHWA Vehicle Classification <SS><YY><site>.CLA
Where: <SS> two character state abbreviation
<YY> two-digit year number
<site> site identifier
optionally; can be inserted if user-enabled in the Reports Wizard. See section 6.1.1.3.
FHWA Truck Weight <SS><YY><site>.WGT
FHWA Traffic Volume <SS><YY><site>.VOL
FHWA Station File* <SS><YY><site>.STA
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX B IANALYZE COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
IANALYZE PAGE B-3
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Custom Report Output Format
Custom TRIPS (200) TRIPS.<site>
Where:
<site> site identifier
Custom Per Vehicle Record (201)
Standard file naming rules apply
Custom FHWA Vehicle Classification (202) Custom FHWA Vehicle Classification with Zeros (208)
4<site><mm><dd>.<yy>
Where:
<site> site identifier
<mm> two digit month number
<dd > two digit day of month
<yy> two digit year number
Custom FWHA Traffic Volume (204) Custom FWHA Traffic Volume with Zeros (210)
3<site><mm><dd>.<yy>
Where:
<site> site identifier
<mm> two digit month number
<dd > two digit day of month
<yy > two digit year number
Custom FHWA Truck Weight (203)
7<site><mm><dd>.<yy>
Where:
<site> site identifier
<mm> two digit month number
<dd> two digit day of month
<yy > two digit year number.
Custom FHWA Speed (205) Custom FHWA Speed with Zeros (211)
S<site><mm><dd>.<yy>
Where:
<site> site identifier
<mm> two digit month number
<dd> two digit day of month
<yy > two digit year number.
Custom FHWA Station File*
2<site><mm><dd>.<yy>
Where:
<site> site identifier
<mm> two digit month number
<dd> two digit day of month
<yy > two digit year number.
Custom Heartbeat (209) Standard file naming rules apply
Custom Axle Load Survey (209) Standard file naming rules apply
Custom Hourly Volume Summary (212)
Standard file naming rules apply
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX B IANALYZE COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
IANALYZE PAGE B-4
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Custom Report Output Format
Custom ASCII Classification (213)
<yy><mm><dd>CL.<site>.<ext>
Where:
<yy> two digit year number
<mm> two digit month number
<dd> two digit day of month,
<site> site identifier
<ext> three character file type extension
Custom ASCII Speed (214) <yy><mm><dd>SP.<site>.<ext>
Where:
<yy> two digit year number
<mm> two digit month number
<dd> two digit day of month,
<site> site identifier
<ext> three character file type extension
Custom ASCII Truck Weight (215)
<yy><mm><dd>TR.<site>.<ext>
Where:
<yy> two digit year number
<mm> two digit month number
<dd> two digit day of month,
<site> site identifier
<ext> three character file type extension
Appendix Table 1 Custom Report Parameters
The output file will be in the format specified either by the filename extension entered here (for standard reports), or the custom report format, regardless of what may be specified in a template used to generate the file.
COMMAND LINE AND TEMPLATE FILES
When using the command line to generate reports from a template file, the following parameters are required:
-p XXX; or
–t FFFF.EEE
If the same –t FFFF.EEE syntax is used for each command line run then files will be overwritten.
A directory path can precede the output file name:
For example, instead of
-t TestA
-t C:\temp\TestA can be used to include the directory location in which the
generated files are to be saved.
Using the File output parameter without a directory path saves the report file into either the iANALYZE\Reports directory or the directory specified in the template. In either case, the directory specified must exist before generating the report(s).
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX B IANALYZE COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
IANALYZE PAGE B-5
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
B.5.1 Template File Command Line Examples
Example 1 Class by Hour Report
Template: tp_cxh.tpt
Report: Class by Hour
Command Line: ianalyze -t testA.pdf –s ts2 –f tp_cxh.tpt
Report Saved As: testA_TS2_Class By Hour.pdf
Example 2 Set of Reports
Template: template1.tpt
Report: a set of reports
Command Line:
ianalyze –p –dc:\data files –s 001 –f template1.tpt
(A path name with spaces must be enclosed in quotation marks.)
Report Sent To: the Default Printer
Interpreted As: All reports are generated from data in site 001 located in the
c:\data files directory and sent to the default printer.
CREATING A BATCH FILE
A batch file with multiple command lines may be created to generate a series of sets of reports. Each command line in the batch file specifies the parameters for a specific set of reports (i.e. different dates, different output file names, different templates).
For each command line in the batch file the –f or –t parameter should be different or some files may be overwritten.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX C CHART TYPE EXAMPLES
IANALYZE PAGE C-1
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Appendix C CHART TYPE EXAMPLES
Appendix Figure 1 Side by Side Bar Chart
Appendix Figure 2 Stacked Bar Chart
Appendix Figure 3 3D Riser Chart
Appendix Figure 4 Line Chart
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX C CHART TYPE EXAMPLES
IANALYZE PAGE C-2
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Appendix Figure 5 Area Chart
Appendix Figure 6 Pie Chart
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-1
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Appendix D IANALYZE REPORTS Terminology Recap:
Valid Wt. Vehicle A vehicle for which weight data has been recorded and falls within the specified class weight range (Good Weight Vehicle).
Warn(ing) Vehicle A vehicle for which weight data has been recorded and exceeds the specified class weight range.
Weighed Vehicle A vehicle for which weight data has been recorded.
No-Weight Vehicle A vehicle for which no weight data has been recorded.
Operational Days Days with data @ Noon; Days for which data has been collected over the noon hour (12:00 – 13:00).
AADT Annual Average Daily Traffic.
SUMMARY
Summary reports provide aggregated vehicle data statistics as per the grouped summary group unit, for the specified reporting period.
This section describes reports to be run on an annual basis.
D.1.1 Site Summary
Report Function
Summary Group Unit: WIM Site – All Vehicular Traffic.
This report tabulates:
Number of Vehicles: Vehicle Counts per Classification
By: Weight / Status
for the user specified annual (or portion thereof) reporting period.
Reporting Unit: Weight / Status.
Provides: Aggregate: Count Totals, Percentages, Averages.
Data: Per Vehicle (All Vehicles).
Application: Used in the analysis of aggregate CVO Class statistics.
Notes:
Class 0: Unclassed Vehicles; Typically Passenger Vehicles.
D.1.1.1 Site Summary: Report Detail
Column Definitions
Column Heading Description
Tonnes Applied Weight Measurement Unit; (where applicable.)
Classification Vehicle Class; User Specified Range.
(Col) Total Total Class Count (All Classes) by Weight / Status.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-2
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-3
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Row Definitions
Weight Status Row Description
Veh Count Vehicle Count per Class.
% Count Vehicle Count Percentage per Class. (Veh Count/ Total Class Count) * 100
PVR Count Per Vehicle Count per Class.
No Weights No Weight Vehicle Count per Class.
Weighed Weighed Vehicle Count per Class.
Warn Count Warning Vehicle Count per Class.
% Warn Warning Vehicle Count Percentage per Class: (Warn Count/ Total Class Count) * 100.
Valid Wt. Valid Wt. Vehicle Count per Class.
TGW(000)* Total Gross Weight (thousands of tonnes) per Class.
Avg. GVW Average Gross Vehicle Weight per Class.
Total ESAL Total ESAL per Class.
Avg. ESAL Avg. ESAL per Class.
Overweight Overweight Vehicle Count per Class.
% Ovrwt Overweight Percentage per Class: (Overweight/Total Class Count) * 100.
D.1.1.2 Site Summary: Sample Report
Appendix Report 1 Summary: Site Summary
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-4
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.1.2 Annual Summary - Weekday By Hour
Report Function
Summary Group Unit: Annual; Weekday.
This report tabulates:
Number of Vehicles: Vehicle Counts per Weekday
By: Hour
for the user specified annual (or portion thereof) reporting period.
Reporting Unit: Hourly; Over a 24 hour reporting period.
Provides: Aggregate: Count Totals, Averages, Daily Factor, Hourly Factor and Data at Noon.
Data: Per Vehicle (All Vehicles).
Application: Used in the analysis of aggregate CVO Weekday statistics.
Notes:
Class 4 and >: Intended preparation for commercial vehicle analysis, FHWA Classes four (4) and above.
Weekly Summary: Reports start on a Monday. Select a Monday start date.
D.1.2.1 Annual Summary - Weekday By Hour: Report Detail
Column Definitions
Column Heading Description
Hour Hourly; over a 24 hour period.
Weekday Day of Week; Monday through Sunday.
(Col) Total Total Weekly Count (All Weekdays) by Hour.
Average Hour Average Vehicle Counts by Hour/ Operational Days; Rounded to the nearest integer.
Hourly Factor AADT/ Average Hour Non-rounded value; to 4 decimal places.
Row Definitions
Hourly Counts Row Description
Per Hour Hourly Vehicle Counts per Weekday.
(Row) Total(s) Daily Vehicle Count (All Hours) per Weekday.
Grand Total: Total Vehicle Count. (All Weekdays) (All Hours).
(Estimated Overall Site AADT Weekly Daily Average)
AADT: Annual Average Daily Traffic: Grand Total / Operational Days; Rounded to the nearest integer.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-5
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Hourly Counts Row Description
Average Day Average Vehicle Counts per Day/ Operational Days Rounded to the nearest integer.
Daily Factor AADT/ Average Day Non-rounded value; to 4 decimal places.
Days with data @ Noon
Operational Days: Count of Days, per weekday in which data has been collected over the noon hour (12:00 – 13:00).
D.1.2.2 Annual Summary - Weekday By Hour: Sample Report
Appendix Report 2 Summary: Annual Summary - Weekday By Hour
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-6
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.1.3 Annual Summary - Month By Hour
Report Function:
Summary Group Unit: Annual; Monthly.
This report tabulates:
Number of Vehicles: Vehicle Counts per Month
By: Hour
for the user specified annual reporting period.
Reporting Unit: Hourly; Over a 24 hour reporting period.
Provides: Aggregate: Count Totals, Averages, Daily Factor, Hourly Factor and Data at Noon.
Data: Per Vehicle (All Vehicles).
Application: Used in the analysis of aggregate CVO Monthly statistics.
D.1.3.1 Annual Summary - Month By Hour: Report Detail
Column Definitions
Column Heading Description
Month Monthly; January through December.
Hour Hourly; over a 24 Hour Period.
(Col) Total Total Monthly Count (All Months) by Hour.
Average Hour Average Vehicle Counts per Hour/ All Operational Days; Rounded to the nearest integer.
Hourly Factor AADT/ Average Hour Non-rounded value; to 4 decimal places.
Row Definitions
Hourly Counts Row Description
Per Hour Hourly Vehicle Counts per Month.
(Row) Total(s) Daily Vehicle Count per Month.
Grand Total: Total Vehicle Count. (All Months) (All Hours).
(Estimated Overall Site AADT Weekly Daily Average)
AADT: Annual Average Daily Traffic: Grand Total / Operational Days; Rounded to the nearest integer.
Average Day Average Vehicle Counts per Day/ Operational Days Rounded to the nearest integer.
Monthly Factor AADT/ Average Day Non-rounded value; to 4 decimal places.
Days with data @ Noon
Operational Days: Count of Days, per weekday in which data has been collected over the noon hour (12:00 – 13:00).
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-7
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.1.3.2 Annual Summary - Month By Hour: Sample Report
Appendix Report 3 Summary: Annual Summary - Month By Hour
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-8
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.1.4 (Annual Summary) - Month By Lane
Report Function:
Summary Group Unit: Annual; Monthly.
This report tabulates:
Number of Vehicles: Vehicle Counts per Month
By: Lane
for the user specified annual (or portion thereof) reporting period.
Reporting Unit: Lane; All Site Lanes.
Provides: Aggregate: Count Totals; Percentages.
Data: Per Vehicle (All Vehicles).
Application: Used in the analysis of aggregate CVO Monthly Lane statistics.
D.1.4.1 Month By Lane Report Detail
Column Definitions
Column Heading Description
Month Monthly; January through December.
Lane Site Lanes; All.
(Col) Total Total Monthly Count (All Months) by Lane.
Percent Total Percentage (All Months) by Lane: (Total Monthly Count / Grand Total) * 100.
Row Definitions
Lane Counts Row Description
Per Lane Vehicle Counts by Lane per Month.
(Row) Total Total Lane Count (All Lanes) per Month.
Grand Total: Total Vehicle Count. (All Lanes) (All Months).
Total Percent: 100%
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-9
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.1.4.2 Month By Lane: Sample Report
Appendix Report 4 Summary: Month By Lane
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-10
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
CLASS
Class reports provide vehicle data statistics using Vehicle Classification as the primary unit of analysis.
D.2.1 Class By Hour
Report Function
This report tabulates:
Number of Vehicles: Vehicle Count Per Class
By: Hour
for the user specified date (one day).
Reporting Interval: Hourly; over a 24 hour period.
Provides: Aggregate: Sub-count Totals, Count Totals, Percentages.
Data: Per Vehicle (All Vehicles).
Application: Used in the statistical analysis of Daily CVO Classification data.
D.2.1.1 Class By Hour: Report Detail:
Column Definitions
Column Heading Description
Hour One Hour intervals over a 24 Hour Period.
Classification Vehicle Class Range; User Specified.
(Col) Total Total Class Counts (All Classes) by Hour.
Row Definitions
Hourly Counts Row Description
Per Hour Hourly Vehicle Count per Class.
(Subtotal) Quarterly Subtotal: Vehicle Count every six (6) Hours per Class. Grand Subtotal: Quarterly Vehicle Counts (All Classes).
(Row) Total Daily (24 Hours) Vehicle Count per Class. Grand Total: Total Vehicle Count (All Hours) (All Classes).
Percent Total Daily Vehicle Count Percentage per Class: (Total /Grand Total) * 100
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-11
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.2.1.2 Class By Hour: Sample Report
Appendix Report 5 Class: Class By Hour
5.5
5.6
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-12
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.2.2 Class By Day Of Month
Report Function
This report tabulates:
Number of Vehicles: Vehicle Count Per Class
By: Day of Month
for the user specified monthly reporting period.
Reporting Interval: Daily; over the given Month.
Provides: Aggregate: Count Totals, Percentages, Daily and Weekly Averages.
Data: Per Vehicle (All Vehicles).
Application: Used in the statistical analysis of Monthly CVO Classification data.
Notes:
Monthly Reports: Reports start on the first of the month.
Data Range: Start Date: First day of the month.
End Date: Last day of the month.
Weekly Average: Excludes days for which data has not been collected.
D.2.2.1 Class By Day Of Month: Report Detail
Column Definitions
Column Heading Description
Day Day of the week in weekly intervals for a given month.
Classification Vehicle Class Range; User Specified.
(Col) Total Total Class Counts (All Classes) by Day of the Month.
Row Definitions
Daily Counts Row Description
Per Day/Weekday Daily Vehicle Counts per Class.
Weekly Avg. Sum(Daily Vehicle Count)/ 7 [days (or portion thereof)], per Class.
Total Weekly Avg.: Weekly Avg. (All Classes).
(Row Total) Monthly Class Count: Total vehicle counts per Class.
Grand Total: Total Vehicle Count (All Days) (All Classes).
Percent Vehicle Count Percentage per Class: (Monthly Class Count /Grand Total) * 100
Daily Avg. Daily Averages for the Month per Class: Monthly Class Count/Number of Month Days.
Total Daily Average (All Classes) for the Month: Grand Total/Number of Month Days.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-13
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.2.2.2 Class By Day Of Month: Sample Report
Appendix Report 6 Class: Class By Day Of Month
5.85.83
5.83
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-14
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.2.3 Class By Speed
Report Function
This report tabulates:
Number of Vehicles: Vehicle Count per Class
By: Speed Range
for the user specified reporting period.
Reporting Unit: Speed Range (kph).
Provides: Aggregate: Count Totals.
Data: Per Vehicle (All Non-Error Vehicles).
Application: Used in the analysis of CVO Class/Speed statistics.
D.2.3.1 Class By Speed: Report Detail
Column Definitions
Column Heading Description
Speed Speed Range Intervals.
Classification Vehicle Class Range; User Specified.
(Col) Total Total Class Counts (All Classes) by Speed Range.
Row Definitions
Speed (kph) Row Description
Per Speed Range Vehicle Counts per Class.
(Row) Total Total Vehicle Count (All Speeds) per Class. Grand Total: Total Vehicle Count (All Speeds) (All Classes).
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-15
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.2.3.2 Class By Speed: Sample Report
Appendix Report 7 Class: Class By Speed
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-16
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.2.4 Truck Count Class By Day Of Month
Report Function:
Number of Vehicles: This report tabulates Daily Vehicle (Truck) Count data by Class*.
*For each class (4 and above):
number of vehicles weighed; and the
percentage of overweight vehicles.
Reporting Interval: Daily; for a one month period.
Includes: Total, Subtotal and Percentage calculations.
Data: Per Vehicle (All Non-Error Vehicles).
D.2.4.1 Truck Count Class By Day Of Month: Report Detail
Column Definitions
Column Heading Description
Classification Vehicle Class; 4-13 (Default).
Day Day of Month; Weekday.
Total (Col) Total Daily Vehicle Counts (All Classes).
Subtotal Weekly Vehicle Counts (All Classes).
Grand Total: Total Monthly Vehicle Count (All Days).
Weighed Daily Weighed Vehicle Counts (All Classes).
Subtotal Weekly Weighed Vehicle Counts (All Classes).
Grand Total: Total Monthly Weighed Vehicle Counts (All Days).
Overwt Daily Overwt Vehicle Counts (All Classes).
Weekly Overwt Vehicle Counts (All Classes).
Grand Total: Total Monthly Overwt Vehicle Counts (All Days).
Row Definitions
Row Counts Row Description
Day; Weekday Daily Vehicle Counts per Class Beginning on the first day of the month.
Weekly Tot Weekly Vehicle Count per Class; Every seven (7) days or portion thereof.
Total (Row) Total Monthly Vehicle Counts per Class
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-17
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.2.4.2 Truck Count Class By Day Of Month: Sample Report
Appendix Report 8 Class: Truck Count Class By Day of Month
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-18
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.2.5 Weekday By Class
Report Function:
Number of Vehicles: This report tabulates Vehicle Count data per Class by Weekday for a seven day period.
Reporting Unit: Class.
Includes: Total calculations.
Data: Per Vehicle (All Vehicles).
D.2.5.1 Weekday By Class: Report Detail
Column Definitions
Column Heading Description
Day of Week Day of Week; Sunday through Saturday
Class Vehicle Class; User Specified
Total (Col) Total Daily Vehicle Count per Class (All Days)
Grand Total: Total Weekly Vehicle Count (All Classes)
Row Definitions
Row Counts Row Description
Class Vehicle Counts per Weekday by Class.
Total (Row) Total Weekday (Daily) Vehicle Counts (All Classes).
D.2.5.2 Weekday By Class: Sample Report
Appendix Report 9 Class: Weekday By Class
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-19
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
LANE
Volume reports provide vehicle data statistics using Lane identification as the primary unit of analysis.
D.3.1 Lane by Hour
Report Function
This report tabulates:
Number of Vehicles: Vehicle Count Per Lane
By: Hour
for the user specified date.
Reporting Interval: Hourly; over a 24 hour period.
Provides: Aggregate: Sub-count Totals, Count Totals.
Data: Per Vehicle (All Vehicles).
Application: Used in the statistical analysis of Daily CVO Lane data.
D.3.1.1 Lane by Hour: Report Detail
Column Definitions
Column Heading Description
Hour One Hour intervals over a 24 Hour Period.
Lane Vehicle Lane Range; User Specified.
Total Total Vehicle Counts (All Lanes) per Hour.
Row Definitions
Hour Row Description
Per Hour Hourly Vehicle Count per Lane.
(Subtotal) Vehicle Count every six (6) hours per Lane. Grand Subtotal: Quarterly Vehicle Counts (All Lanes).
(Row) Total Daily (24 Hours) Vehicle Count per Lane. Grand Total: Total Vehicle Count (All Lanes) (All Classes).
Percent Total Daily Vehicle Count Percentage per Lane: (Total /Grand Total) * 100
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-20
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.3.1.2 Lane By Hour: Sample Report
Appendix Report 10 Lane: Lane By Hour
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-21
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.3.2 Lane By Class
Report Function
The main report tabulates:
Number of Vehicles: Lane Vehicle Count and Lane Vehicle Count Percentage
By: Class
for the user specified reporting period.
Reporting Unit: Class.
Provides: Aggregate: Count Totals, Percentages.
Data: Per Vehicle (All Vehicles).
The summary report tabulates:
For each Lane Status Clear Vehicles with no WIM status conditions.
Violating Overweight and/or Over GVW vehicles.
Warning Good Weight vehicles with a WIM Status condition.
Application: Used in the analysis of CVO Lane Class statistics.
Notes:
Summary Report Displayed with Per Vehicle Data filter selection only.
D.3.2.1 Lane By Class: Report Detail
Column Definitions
Column Heading Description
Class Vehicle Class.
Lane Count Lane Vehicle Count per Class.
Lane % Lane Vehicle Count Percentage per Class: (Lane Count/ Total Lane Vehicle Count) * 100
Count Total (All Lanes) Vehicle Count per Class.
% Total (All Lanes) Vehicle Count Percentage per Class: (Count/Total Count Vehicle Count) * 100
Row Definitions
Class Row Description
Per Class Lane Vehicle Count; Lane Vehicle Count Percentage.
(Row) Total(s) Total Lane Vehicle Count;
Total Lane Vehicle Count %: (Total Lane Vehicle Count / Total Count Vehicle Count) * 100;
Total Count Vehicle Count (All Classes) (All Lanes);
Total %: 100%
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-22
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Summary Report Detail
Column Definitions
Column Heading Description
Status Vehicle Status State.
Lane Count Lane Vehicle Count per Status.
Lane % Lane Vehicle Count Percentage per Status: (Lane Count/ Total Lane Vehicle Count) * 100
Count Total (All Lanes) Vehicle Count per Status.
% Total (All Lanes) Vehicle Count Percentage per Status: (Count/Total Count Vehicle Count) * 100.
Row Definitions
Status Row Description
Per Status State Lane Vehicle Count; Lane Vehicle Count Percentage.
(Row) Total(s) Total Lane Vehicle Count;
Total Lane Vehicle Count %: (Total Lane Vehicle Count / Total Count Vehicle Count) * 100;
Total Count Vehicle Count (All Statuses) (All Lanes); Total %: 100%.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-23
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.3.2.2 Lane By Class: Sample Report
Appendix Report 11 Class: Lane By Class
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-24
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.3.3 Lane By Class and Speed
Report Function
The Lane by Class sub-report tabulates:
Number of Vehicles: Lane Vehicle Count and Lane Vehicle Count Percentage
By: Class
for the user specified reporting period.
Reporting Unit: Class.
Provides: Aggregate: Count Totals, Percentages.
Data: Per Vehicle (All Vehicles).
The Lane By Speed sub-report tabulates:
Number of Vehicles: Lane Vehicle Count and Lane Vehicle Count Percentage
By: Speed
for the user specified reporting period.
Reporting Unit: Speed.
Provides: Aggregate: Count Totals, Percentages.
Data: Per Vehicle (All Vehicles).
Application: Used in the analysis of CVO Lane Class/Speed statistics.
D.3.3.1 Lane By Class and Speed: Report Detail
By Class
Column Definitions
Column Heading Description
Class Vehicle Class.
Lane Count Lane Vehicle Count per Class.
Lane % Lane Vehicle Count Percentage per Class: (Lane Count/ Total Lane Vehicle Count) * 100.
Count Total (All Lanes) Vehicle Count per Class.
% Total (All Lanes) Vehicle Count Percentage per Class: (Count/Total Count Vehicle Count) * 100.
Row Definitions
Class Row Description
Per Class Lane Vehicle Count; Lane Vehicle Count Percentage.
(Row) Total(s) Total Lane Vehicle Count;
Total Lane Vehicle Count %: (Total Lane Vehicle Count / Total Count Vehicle Count) * 100;
Total Count Vehicle Count (All Classes) (All Lanes);
Total %: 100%
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-25
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
By Speed
Column Definitions
Column Heading Description
Speed (mph) Speed Interval Ranges.
Lane Count Lane Vehicle Count per Speed Range.
Lane % Lane Vehicle Count Percentage per Speed Range: (Lane Count/ Total Lane Vehicle Count) * 100
Count Total (All Lanes) Vehicle Count per Speed Range.
% Total (All Lanes) Vehicle Count Percentage per Speed Range: (Count/Total Count Vehicle Count) * 100
Row Definitions
Class Row Description
Per Class Lane Vehicle Count; Lane Vehicle Count Percentage.
(Row) Total(s) Total Lane Vehicle Count;
Total Lane Vehicle Count %: (Total Lane Vehicle Count / Total Count Vehicle Count) * 100;
Total Count Vehicle Count (All Speed Ranges) (All Lanes);
Total %: 100%
D.3.3.2 Lane By Class and Speed: Sample Report
Appendix Report 12 Class: Lane By Class and Speed
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-26
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.3.4 Weekday By Lane
Report Function:
Number of Vehicles: This report tabulates Weekly Vehicle Count data by Lane.
Reporting Unit: Site Lane.
Includes: Total and Percentage calculations.
Data: Per Vehicle (All Vehicles)
D.3.4.1 Weekday By Lane: Report Detail
Column Definitions
Column Heading Description
Day of Week Day of Week; Sunday through Saturday
Lane Site Lanes; 1-8 (Default) User Specified
Total (Col) Total Daily Vehicle Count per Lane (All Days)
Grand Total: Total Weekly Vehicle Count (All Lanes)
Percent Total Vehicle Count Percentage per Lane (All Days) (Total (Row)/Grand Total) * 100
Row Definitions
Row Counts Row Description
Class Vehicle Counts per Lane by Weekday
Total (Row) Total Weekday (Daily) Vehicle Counts (All Lanes)
D.3.4.2 Weekday By Lane: Sample Report
Appendix Report 13 Volume: Weekday By Lane
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-27
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
VOLUME
Volume Summary reports provide aggregated vehicle data statistics as per the grouped summary group unit, for the specified reporting period.
D.4.1 Weekly Summary - Weekday (Workday) By Hour
Report Function:
Number of Vehicles: This report tabulates Daily Vehicle Count data per Week by Hour providing both Workday and Weekday Averages.
Reporting Unit: Hourly; over 24 hours, for the specified week (Monday Start).
Includes: Total, Average and Percentage calculations.
Data: Per Vehicle (All Vehicles)
D.4.1.1 Weekly Summary - Weekday (Workday) by Hour: Report Detail
Column Definitions
Column Heading Description
Day of Week Day of Week; Monday through Sunday
Hour Hour; over a 24 Hour Period
Work Day Average Average Vehicle Counts per Hour (Mon - Fri); Total Hourly Vehicle Count per Workweek/5
Week Day Average Average Vehicle Counts per Hour (All Days) Total (Col)/7
Total (Col) Total Hourly Vehicle Counts (All Days)
Grand Total: Total Weekly Vehicle Count (All Hours)
Row Definitions
Row Counts Row Description
Per Hour Hourly Vehicle Counts per Day
Total (Row) Total Weekday Vehicle Count (All Hours);
Workweek (5-Day) Daily Average (All Hours) Vehicle Count;
AADT - Weekly (7-Day) Daily Average (All Hours)
% Average Workday Workweek Daily Average Vehicle Count Percentage (Total (Row)/Workweek Daily Average) * 100
% Average Weekday Weekly Daily Average Vehicle Count Percentage (Total (Row)/Weekly Daily Average) * 100
Additional Report Data:
Overall Site Estimated AADT: Annual Average Daily Traffic (AADT).
Displays Weekly Daily Average (See Row Definitions, above).
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-28
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.4.1.2 Weekly Summary - Weekday (Workday) By Hour: Sample Report
Appendix Report 14 Volume: Weekly Summary - Weekday By Hour
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-29
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
PEAKS
Peak reports provide vehicle data statistics using Peak Traffic Volume by Time as the primary unit of analysis.
D.5.1 Class By Peaks - On Hour
Report Function:
Number of Vehicles: This report determines Peak (highest traffic volume) AM/PM times for each class and tabulates Hourly Vehicle Count data associated with each time.
Reporting Interval: Hourly; over a 24 hour period, for the specified date.
Includes: Total, Subtotal and Percentage calculations.
Complimentary Report: Class By Hour.
Data: Per Vehicle (All Vehicles).
D.5.1.1 Class By Peaks - On Hour: Report Detail
Column Definitions
Column Heading Description
Classification Vehicle Class; 1-13 (Default) or User Specified.
All Peak Hour AM/PM with the highest traffic volume (All Classes).
Peak Hour AM/PM Vehicle Counts (All Classes).
Row Definitions
Row Counts Row Description
AM Time AM Peak Hour per Class.
AM Peak Value AM Peak Hour Vehicle Count per Class.
PM Peak Time PM Peak Hour per Class.
PM Peak Value PM Peak Hour Vehicle Count per Class.
Additional Report Detail:
Overall Site Estimated AADT(Annual Average Daily Traffic)
AADT (all classes); *estimated from current report data.
Estimated AADT for Single Units
AADT for Single Unit Commercial Vehicles; Classes 4 through 7
Percent of Peak Hour Single Units
Peak Hour Vehicle Count Percentage for Single Units.
Estimated AADT for Combinations
AADT for Combination Commercial Vehicles; Classes 8 through 13.
Percent of Peak Hour Combinations
Peak Hour Vehicle Count Percentage for Combination Vehicles.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-30
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.5.1.2 Class By Peaks - On Hour: Sample Report
Appendix Report 15 Peaks: Class By Peaks - On Hour
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-31
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.5.2 Class By Peaks - Quarter Hour
Report Function:
Number of Vehicles: This report determines Peak (highest traffic volume) AM/PM times on the Quarter hour for each class and tabulates Hourly Vehicle Count data associated with each time.
Reporting Interval: Hourly, On-the-Quarter Hour; over a 24 hour period, for the specified date.
Includes: Vehicle count calculations.
Complimentary Report: Class By Hour.
Data: Per Vehicle (All Vehicles).
D.5.2.1 Class By Peaks - Quarter Hour: Report Detail
Column Definitions
Column Heading Description
Classification Vehicle Class; 1-13 (Default) or User Specified.
All Peak Hour (on the quarter hour) AM/PM with the highest traffic volume (All Classes).
Peak Hour (on the quarter hour) AM/PM Vehicle Counts (All Classes).
Row Definitions
Row Counts Row Description
AM Time AM (on the quarter hour) Peak Hour per Class.
AM Peak Value AM (on the quarter hour) Peak Hour Vehicle Count per Class.
PM Peak Time PM (on the quarter hour) Peak Hour per Class.
PM Peak Value PM (on the quarter hour) Peak Hour Vehicle Count per Class.
Additional Report Detail:
Overall Site Estimated AADT(Annual Average Daily Traffic)
AADT (all classes); *estimated from current report data.
Estimated AADT for Single Units
AADT for Single Unit Commercial Vehicles; Classes 4 through 7
Percent of Peak Hour Single Units
Peak Hour Vehicle Count Percentage for Single Units.
Estimated AADT for Combinations
AADT for Combination Commercial Vehicles; Classes 8 through 13.
Percent of Peak Hour Combinations
Peak Hour Vehicle Count Percentage for Combination Vehicles.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-32
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.5.2.2 Class By Peaks - Quarter Hour: Sample Report
Appendix Report 16 Peaks: Class By Peaks - Quarter Hour
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-33
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.5.3 Lane By Peaks - On Hour
Report Function:
Number of Vehicles: This report determines Peak (highest traffic volume) AM/PM times for each Lane and tabulates Hourly Vehicle Count data associated with each time.
Reporting Interval: Hourly; over a 24 hour period, for the specified date.
Includes: Vehicle Count calculations.
Complimentary Report: Lane By Hour.
Data: Per Vehicle (All Vehicles)
D.5.3.1 Lane By Peaks - On Hour: Report Detail
Column Definitions
Column Heading Description
Classification Vehicle Lane; Site Determined or User Specified.
All Peak Hour AM/PM with the highest traffic volume (All Lanes).
Peak Hour AM/PM Vehicle Counts (All Lanes).
Row Definitions
Row Counts Row Description
AM Time AM Peak Hour per Lane.
AM Peak Value AM Peak Hour Vehicle Count per Lane.
PM Peak Time PM Peak Hour per Lane.
PM Peak Value PM Peak Hour Vehicle Count per Lane.
D.5.3.2 Lane By Peaks - On Hour: Sample Report
Appendix Report 17 Peaks: Lane By Peaks - On Hour
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-34
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.5.4 Lane By Peaks - Quarter Hours
Report Function:
Number of Vehicles: This report determines Peak (highest traffic volume) AM/PM times on the Quarter hour for each Lane and tabulates associated Hourly Vehicle Count data.
Reporting Interval: Hourly, On-the-Quarter Hour; over a 24 hour period, for the specified date.
Includes: Total, Subtotal and Percentage calculations.
Complimentary Report: Lane By Hour.
Data: Per Vehicle (All Vehicles).
D.5.4.1 Lane By Peaks - Quarter Hours: Report Detail
Column Definitions
Column Heading Description
Classification Lane; Site Determined or User Specified.
All Peak Hour (on the ¼ hour) AM/PM with the highest traffic volume (All Lanes).
Peak Hour (on the ¼ hour) AM/PM Vehicle Counts (All Lanes).
Row Definitions
Row Counts Row Description
AM Time AM (on the quarter hour) Peak Hour per Lane.
AM Peak Value AM (on the quarter hour) Peak Hour Vehicle Count per Lane.
PM Peak Time PM (on the quarter hour) Peak Hour per Lane.
PM Peak Value PM (on the quarter hour) Peak Hour Vehicle Count per Lane.
D.5.4.2 Lane By Peaks - Quarter Hours: Sample Report
Appendix Report 18 Peaks: Lane By Peaks - Quarter Hours
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-35
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.5.5 Top 100 Peak Hours - On Hour
Report Function:
Number of Vehicles: This report tabulates the top 100 Peak (highest traffic volume) AM/PM dates, times and associated vehicle counts for the specified reporting period.
Reporting Interval: Peaks; 100 in Descending order 1- Highest Traffic Volume Peak, 100-Lowest.
Includes: Total vehicle count calculations.
Data: Per Vehicle (All Vehicles).
D.5.5.1 Top 100 Peak Hours - On Hour: Report Detail
Column Definitions
Column Heading Description
Date Date associated with Peak Hour.
Hour Peak Hour.
Total Total Vehicle Count tabulated for Peak Hour.
Row Definitions
Row Counts Row Description
Per Peak List Number Peak Date, Hour and Vehicle Count
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-36
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.5.5.2 Top 100 Peak Hours - On Hour: Sample Report
Appendix Report 19 Peaks: Top 100 Peak Hours - On Hour
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-37
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.5.6 Top 100 Peak Hours - Quarter Hours
Report Function:
Number of Vehicles: This report tabulates the top 100 Peak (highest traffic volume) on-the-quarter-hour AM/PM dates, times and associated vehicle counts for the specified reporting period.
Reporting Interval: Peaks; 100 in Descending order 1- Highest Traffic Volume Peak, 100-Lowest.
Includes: Total vehicle count calculations.
Data: Per Vehicle (All Vehicles).
D.5.6.1 Top 100 Peak Hours - Quarter Hours: Report Detail
Column Definitions
Column Heading Description
Date Date associated with Peak Hour.
Hour Peak Hour; on the quarter hour.
Total Total Vehicle Count tabulated for Peak Hour.
Row Definitions
Row Counts Row Description
Per Peak List Number Peak Date, Hour and Vehicle Count.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-38
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.5.6.2 Top 100 Peak Hours - Quarter Hours: Sample Report
Appendix Report 20 Peaks: Top 100 Peak Hours - Quarter Hours
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-39
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.5.7 Weekly Summary - Weekday By Peaks
Report Function:
Number of Vehicles: This report determines Peak (highest traffic volume) AM/PM times and Vehicle Count data associated with each time over the specified Week providing both Workday and Weekday Averages.
Reporting Unit: Daily, for the specified week (Monday Start).
Includes: Total and Average calculations.
Complimentary Report: Weekly Summary - Weekday By Hour
Data: Per Vehicle (All Vehicles)
D.5.7.1 Weekly Summary - Weekday By Peaks: Report Detail
Column Definitions
Column Heading Description
Day of Week Day of Week; Monday through Sunday.
Work Day Average Median Peak Hour for the Workweek. Average Vehicle Counts per Peak Hours (Mon - Fri); Total Hourly Peak Vehicle Counts per Workweek/5
Week Day Average Median Peak Hour (All Week Days). Average Vehicle Counts per Peak Hour (All Week Days); Total (Col)/7
Total (Col) Median Peak Hour (All Week Days).
Total peak Hour Vehicle Counts (All Week Days).
Row Definitions
Row Counts Row Description
AM Time AM Peak Hour per Day.
AM Peak Value AM Peak Hour Vehicle Count per Day.
PM Peak Time PM Peak Hour per Day.
PM Peak Value PM Peak Hour Vehicle Count per Day.
K-Factor Percentage daily Peak Hour Vehicle Count over the Overall Site Estimated AADT.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-40
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.5.7.2 Weekly Summary - Weekday By Peaks: Sample Report
Appendix Report 21 Peaks: Weekly Summary - Weekday By Peaks
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-41
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
SPEED Speed reports provide vehicle data statistics using Speed Intervals (ranges) as the primary unit of analysis.
D.6.1 Speed By Hour
Report Function
The main report tabulates:
Number of Vehicles: Vehicle Count Per Speed Range
By: Hour
for the user specified date.
Reporting Interval: Hourly; over a 24 hour period.
Provides: Aggregate: Sub-count Totals, Count Totals, Percentages.
Data: Per Vehicle (All Non-Error Vehicles).
Application: Used in the statistical analysis of Daily CVO Speed data.
The summary report tabulates:
For each summary Speed Range Veh Count, % Count
For the Report
Average Speed Average speed calculated over all vehicle speeds.
Median Speed Midpoint speed in a list of ascending list of vehicle speeds.
15th Percentile Vehicle speed at 15th percentile in an ascending list of speeds.
85th Percentile Vehicle speed at 85th percentile in an ascending list of speeds.
Pace Speed Interval 10 Unit (kph/mph) Speed Range with the highest vehicle count, and highest percentage of total vehicles in the range.
D.6.1.1 Speed By Hour: Report Detail
Column Definitions
Column Heading Description
Hour One Hour intervals over a 24 Hour Period.
Speed (Kph) Vehicle Speed Ranges; User Specified.
Total Total Vehicle Counts (All speed Ranges) per Hour.
Row Definitions
Hour Row Description
Per Hour Hourly Vehicle Count per Speed Range.
(Subtotal) Vehicle Count every six (6) hours per Speed Range. Grand Subtotal: Quarterly Vehicle Counts (All Speed Ranges).
(Row) Total Daily (24 Hours) Vehicle Count per Speed Range. Grand Total: Total Vehicle Count (All Speed Ranges) (All Classes).
Percent Total Daily Vehicle Count Percentage per Speed Range: (Total /Grand Total) * 100
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-42
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Summary Report Detail:
Summary Column Definitions
Column Heading Description
Speed kph >= Speed Interval Category.
>=0 Total Vehicle Count.
Summary Row Definitions
Row Counts Row Description
Veh Count Vehicle Counts per Speed Category.
% Count Vehicle Count Percentage per Speed Category: (Veh Count/Total Vehicle Count) * 100.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-43
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.6.1.2 Speed By Hour: Sample Report
Appendix Report 22 Speed: Speed By Hour
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-44
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.6.2 Average Speed By Hour
Report Function:
Average Speed: This report displays Average Hourly Speeds.
Reporting Interval: Hourly; over a 24 hour period, for the specified date.
Includes: Average calculations.
Data: Per Vehicle (All Vehicles).
D.6.2.1 Average Speed By Hour: Report Detail
Column Definitions
Column Heading Description
Average Speed Average Speed
Hour Hour; over a 24 Hour Period
Row Definitions
Row Counts Row Description
Per Hour Average Speed per Hour
D.6.2.2 Average Speed By Hour: Sample Report
Appendix Report 23 Speed: Average Speed By Hour
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-45
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.6.3 Weekday By Speed
Report Function:
Number of Vehicles: This report tabulates Weekly Vehicle Count data by Speed Interval.
Reporting Unit: Speed Interval.
Includes: Total calculations.
Data: Per Vehicle (All Vehicles)
D.6.3.1 Weekday By Speed: Report Detail
Column Definitions
Column Heading Description
Day of Week Day of Week; Sunday through Saturday
Speed Speed Intervals; User Specified
Total (Col) Total Vehicle Count per Speed Interval (All Days)
Grand Total: Total Weekly Vehicle Count (All Speed Intervals)
Row Definitions
Row Counts Row Description
Kph/Mph Vehicle Counts per Speed Interval by Weekday
Total (Row) Total Daily Vehicle Count (All Speed Intervals)
D.6.3.2 Weekday By Speed: Sample Report
Appendix Report 24 Speed: Weekday By Speed
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-46
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
LENGTH
Length reports provide vehicle data statistics using Vehicle Length Ranges as the primary unit of analysis.
D.7.1 Length By Hour
Report Function:
Number of Vehicles: This report tabulates Hourly Vehicle Count data by vehicle Length Range (User Specified Intervals).
Reporting Interval: Hourly; over a 24 hour period, for the specified date.
Includes: Total and Subtotal calculations.
Data: Per Vehicle (All Non-Error Vehicles)
D.7.1.1 Length By Hour: Report Detail
Column Definitions
Column Heading Description
Length (ft) Vehicle Length Interval Range; (User Specified)
Hour Hour; over a 24 Hour Period
Row Definitions
Row Counts Row Description
Per Hour Hourly Vehicle Count per Length Interval
Quarterly Subtotal Vehicle Count every six (6) Hours per vehicle Length Interval
Total (Row) Total Daily (24 hr.) Vehicle Count per vehicle Length Interval
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-47
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.7.1.2 Length By Hour: Sample Report
Appendix Report 25 Length: Length By Hour
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-48
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.7.2 Weekday By Length
Report Function:
Number of Vehicles: This report tabulates Weekly Vehicle Count data by Length Range.
Reporting Unit: Length Range.
Includes: Total calculations.
Data: Per Vehicle (All Vehicles)
D.7.2.1 Weekday By Length: Report Detail
Column Definitions
Column Heading Description
Day of Week Day of Week; Sunday through Saturday.
Length Range Length Ranges; User Specified.
Total Total Vehicle Count per Length Range (All Days).
Grand Total: Total Weekly Vehicle Count (All Length Ranges).
Row Definitions
Row Counts Row Description
Ft/Meter Vehicle Counts per Length Range by Weekday.
Total Total Daily Vehicle Counts (All Length Ranges).
D.7.2.2 Weekday By Length: Sample Report
Appendix Report 26 Length: Weekday By Length
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-49
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
ERROR / STATUS
Error/Status reports provide vehicle data statistics using Error/Status Types and/or conditions as the primary unit of analysis.
Notes
Include the Error class (usually class 0 in FHWA scheme) for reports.
TCC type counters: record both binned and per vehicle counts for each specific error type; all other counters record only the Bin Total error count and record per vehicle counts for specific error types.
TCC site: display the greater of the two counts (binned or per vehicle) for each specific error type.
D.8.1 Lane By Error
Report Function
This report tabulates:
Number of Vehicles: Lane Vehicle Count and Lane Vehicle Count Percentage
By: Error Type
for the user specified reporting period.
Reporting Unit: Error Condition.
Provides: Aggregate: Count Totals, Percentages.
Data: Per Vehicle (All Vehicles); No Binned data.
Application: Used in the statistical analysis of CVO Error states and types.
D.8.1.1 Lane By Error: Report Detail
Column Definitions
Column Heading Description
Error Error Type.
Lane Count Lane Vehicle Count per Error type.
Lane % Lane Vehicle Count Percentage per Error type: (Lane Count/ Total Lane Vehicle Count) * 100
Count Total (All Lanes) Vehicle Count per Error condition.
% Total (All Lanes) Vehicle Count Percentage per Error type: (Count/Total Count Vehicle Count) * 100
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-50
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Row Definitions
Error Row Description
None Lane Vehicle Count; Lane Vehicle Count Percentage Per Non-Error vehicles.
Per Error Type Lane Vehicle Count; Lane Vehicle Count Percentage
(Row) Total(s) Total Lane Vehicle Count;
Total Lane Error Count %: (Total Lane Vehicle Count - None Lane Count/ Total Lane Vehicle Count) * 100;
Total Count Vehicle Count (All Error/Statuses) (All Lanes);
Total %: 100%
D.8.1.2 Lane By Error: Sample Report
Appendix Report 27 Error/Status: Lane By Error
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-51
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.8.2 Lane By Status
Report Function
This report tabulates:
Number of Vehicles: Lane Vehicle Count and Lane Vehicle Count Percentage
By: Status State
for the user specified reporting period.
Reporting Unit: Status State.
Provides: Count Totals, Percentages.
Data: Per Vehicle (All Non-Error Vehicles); No Binned data.
Application: Used in the statistical analysis of CVO Status states and conditions.
Notes: Ensure that the Error Class (usually class 0 in FHWA scheme) is included.
A vehicle can have more than one Status state.
D.8.2.1 Lane By Status: Report Detail
Column Definitions
Column Heading Description
Status Status State.
Lane Count Lane Vehicle Count per Status state.
Lane % Lane Vehicle Count Percentage per Status state: (Lane Count/ Total Lane Vehicle Count) * 100
Veh Count Total (All Lanes) Vehicle Count per Status state.
% Veh Count Total (All Lanes) Vehicle Count Percentage per Status state: (Veh Count/Total Count Vehicle Count) * 100
Row Definitions
Status Row Description
None Lane Vehicle Count; Lane Vehicle Count Percentage Per Non-Error vehicles.
Per Status Type Lane Vehicle Count; Lane Vehicle Count Percentage.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-52
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.8.2.2 Lane By Status: Sample Report
Appendix Report 28 Error/Status: Lane By Status
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-53
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.8.3 Error By Hour
Report Function
This report tabulates:
Number of Vehicles: Vehicle Count Per Error Type
By: Hour
for the user specified date.
Reporting Interval: Hourly; over a 24 hour period.
Provides: Aggregate: Sub-count Totals, Count Totals.
Data: Per Vehicle (All Vehicles).
Application: Used in the statistical analysis of Daily CVO Error types.
Notes: Ensure that the Error Class (usually class 0 in FHWA scheme) is included.
Select Data Choose a single data file for this report.
Binned Data Sites with no Binned data will display 0’s.
To exclude BIN Total from the report display:
Set Data Filters | Traffic Data to Per Vehicle Data.
D.8.3.1 Error By Hour: Report Detail
Column Definitions
Column Heading Description
Hour One Hour Intervals over a 24 Hours period.
BIN Total Binned Vehicle Count per Hour.
PV Total Per Vehicle Count per Hour.
None Non-Error Vehicle Count per Hour.
Per Error Type Vehicle Count by Error Type per Hour.
Row Definitions
Hour Row Description
Per Hour Hourly Vehicle Count per Error Type.
(Daily Quarterly Subtotals) Vehicle Counts every six (6) hours per Error Type.
(Daily) Total(s) Daily Binned Vehicle Count.
Daily PV Total Count.
Daily Non-Error Vehicle Count.
Daily Vehicle Counts per Error Type.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-54
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.8.3.2 Error By Hour: Sample Report
Appendix Report 29 Error/Status: Error By Hour
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-55
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.8.4 Status By Hour
Report Function
This report tabulates:
Number of Vehicles: Vehicle Count Per Status State
By: Hour
for the user specified date.
Reporting Interval: Hourly; over a 24 hour period.
Provides: Aggregate: Sub-count Totals, Count Totals.
Data: Per Vehicle (All Non-Error Vehicles).
Application: Used in the statistical analysis of Daily CVO Status states and conditions.
Notes: Ensure that the Error Class (usually class 0 in FHWA scheme) is included.
A vehicle can have more than one Status state.
Select Data Choose a single data file for this report.
Binned Data Status counts are based only on per vehicle data (no binned status counts are taken).
To exclude BIN Total from the report display:
Set Data Filters | Traffic Data to Per Vehicle Data.
D.8.4.1 Status By Hour: Report Detail
Column Definitions
Column Heading Description
Hour One Hour Intervals over 24 Hours.
PV Total Per Vehicle Count per Hour.
None Non-Status Vehicle Count per Hour.
Per Status state Vehicle Count by Status state per Hour.
Row Definitions
Row Counts Row Description
Per Hour Hourly Vehicle Count per Status State.
Quarterly Subtotal Vehicle Count every six (6) hours per Status state.
(Daily) Total(s) Daily PV Total Count.
Daily Non-Error Vehicle Count.
Daily Vehicle Counts per Status state.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-56
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.8.4.2 Status By Hour: Sample Report
Appendix Report 30 Error/Status: Status By Hour
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-57
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.8.5 Error By Weekday
Report Function:
Number of Vehicles: This report tabulates Vehicle Error Count and Percentage data by Weekday for the reporting period.
Reporting Interval: Daily; for the specified weekly date range.
Includes: Total and Percentage calculations.
Data: Per Vehicle (All Vehicles)
D.8.5.1 Error By Weekday: Report Detail
BIN Total Sites with no Binned data will display 0’s in this column.
To remove the column from the report display, set Data Filters Traffic Data to Per Vehicle Data only.
Column Definitions
Column Heading Description
Week Day Weekday; Sunday through Saturday.
BIN Total Total Hourly Binned Vehicle Count (Typically passenger vehicles).
PV Total Total Hourly Per Vehicle Count.
None Hourly Count of Non-Error Vehicles
Error Type Hourly Count of Error Vehicles per Error Type.
Row Definitions
Row Counts Row Description
Per Error Error Vehicle Counts per Weekday by Error Type.
Total (Row) Total Weekday (Daily) Vehicle Counts (All Errors).
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-58
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.8.5.2 Error By Weekday: Sample Report
Appendix Report 31 Error/Status: Error By Weekday
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-59
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.8.6 Status By Weekday
Report Function:
Number of Vehicles: This report tabulates Vehicle Warning Count and Percentage data by Weekday for the reporting period.
Reporting Interval: Daily; for the specified weekly date range.
Includes: Total and Percentage calculations.
Complimentary Report:
Data: Per Vehicle (All Non-Error Vehicles)
D.8.6.1 Status By Weekday: Report Detail
BIN Total *Sites with no Binned data will display 0’s in this column. To remove the column from the report display, set Data Filters Traffic Data to Per Vehicle Data only.
PV Total Total Per Vehicle Count for the day.
None Count of Status Clear vehicles
Warnings Vehicle Count for each Warning Status Type.
With iSINC data, a vehicle may have more than 1 status flag set.
Column Definitions
Column Heading Description
Hour Hour; over a 24 Hour Period.
BIN Total Total Hourly Binned Vehicle Count (typically passenger vehicles).
PV Total Total Hourly Per Vehicle Count.
None Hourly Count of Status Clear Vehicles (No Warnings).
Warning Status Hourly Count of Warning Status Vehicles per Warning Status.
Row Definitions
Row Counts Row Description
Per Warning Warning Status Vehicle Counts per Weekday by Warning Status.
Total (Row) Total Weekday (Daily) Vehicle Counts (All Warnings).
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-60
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.8.6.2 Status By Weekday: Sample Report
Appendix Report 32 Error/Status: Status By Weekday
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-61
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.8.7 Status Percent By Hour
Report Function:
Percentage of Vehicles: This report tabulates Hourly Vehicle Count Percentages by Warning Status.
Reporting Interval: Hourly; over a 24 hour period, for the specified date.
Includes: Percentage calculations.
Data: Per Vehicle (All Non-Error Vehicles)
D.8.7.1 Status Percent By Hour: Report Detail
Column Definitions
Column Heading Description
Classification Warning Status Interval Unit Hour
Total Row Total: Hourly Group Row Total: Every six (6) Hours Grand Total: Daily Total (All Vehicles)
Row Definitions
Row Counts Row Description
Per Hour Hourly Vehicle Count Percentage per Warning Status Quarterly Subtotal Subtotal Vehicle Status Count Percentage every six (6) hours Total Total Daily Vehicle Count Percentage per Status Type Percent Total Daily Percentage per Status of Grand Total (All Vehicles).
D.8.7.2 Status Percent By Hour: Sample Report
Appendix Report 33 Error/Status: Status Percent By Hour
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-62
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.8.8 Status Percent By Weekday
Report Function:
Number of Vehicles: This report tabulates Daily Warning Status Vehicle Count Percentages for a specified week.
Reporting Interval: Daily; for the specified date range.
Includes: Percentage calculations.
Complimentary Report:
Data: Per Vehicle (All Non-Error Vehicles)
D.8.8.1 Status Percent By Weekday: Report Detail
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-63
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.8.8.2 Status Percent By Weekday: Sample Report
Appendix Report 34 Error/Status: Status Percent By Weekday
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-64
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.8.9 Error Percent By Hour
Report Function:
Percentage of Vehicles: This report tabulates Hourly Vehicle Count Percentages by Error condition.
Reporting Interval: Hourly; over a 24 hour period, for the specified date.
Includes: Percentage calculations.
Data: Per Vehicle (All Vehicles).
D.8.9.1 Error Percent By Hour: Report Detail
Column Definitions
Column Heading Description
Hour Hour; over a 24 Hour Period.
BIN Total* Total Hourly Binned Vehicle Count (typically passenger vehicles).
PV Total Total Hourly Per Vehicle Count Percentage.
None Hourly Percentage of Non-Error vehicle Count.
Error Type Hourly Percentage of Error vehicle Count per Error Type.
Row Definitions
Row Counts Row Description
Per Hour Hourly Vehicle Count Percentage per Error Type
Total (Row) Total Binned Vehicle Count Percentages (All Hours).
Total Per Vehicle Count Percentage (All Hours).
Total Daily (24 hr.) Vehicle Count Percentages per Error Type.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-65
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.8.9.2 Error Percent By Hour: Sample Report
Appendix Report 35 Error/Status: Error Percent By Hour
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-66
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.8.10 Error Percent By Weekday
Report Function:
Number of Vehicles: This report tabulates daily Error Vehicle Count percentages for a specified week.
Reporting Interval: Daily; for the specified week date range.
Includes: Percentage calculations.
Data: Per Vehicle (All Vehicles).
D.8.10.1 Error Percent By Weekday: Report Detail
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-67
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.8.10.2 Error Percent By Weekday: Sample Report
Appendix Report 36 Error/Status: Error Percent By Weekday
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-68
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.8.11 Lane By Sensor Errors & Statuses
Report Function
This report tabulates:
Number of Vehicles: Lane Vehicle Count and Lane Vehicle Count Percentage
By: Sensor Error and Status Type
for the user specified reporting period.
Reporting Unit: Sensor Error and Status Type.
Provides: Aggregate: Count Totals, Percentages.
Data: Per Vehicle (All Vehicles); No Binned data.
Application: Used in the determination of potential data collections sensor issues.
Note: Ensure that the Error Class (usually class 0 in FHWA scheme) is included.
D.8.11.1 Lane By Sensor Errors & Statuses: Report Detail
Column Definitions
Column Heading Description
Error/Status Sensor Error/Status Type.
Lane Count Lane Vehicle Count per Error/Status Types.
Lane % Lane Vehicle Count Percentage per Error/Status. (Lane Count/ Total Lane Vehicle Count) * 100
Count Total (All Lanes) Vehicle Count per Error/Status Type.
% Total (All Lanes) Vehicle Count Percentage per Error/Status: (Count/Total Count Vehicle Count) * 100
Row Definitions
Error/Status Row Description
Legal Lane Vehicle Count; Lane Vehicle Count Percentage Per Non-Error vehicles.
Per Error/Status Type Lane Vehicle Count; Lane Vehicle Count Percentage
(Row) Total(s) Total Lane Vehicle Count;
Total Lane Error/Status Count %: (Total Lane Vehicle Count - Legal Lane Count/ Total Lane Vehicle Count) * 100;
Total Count Vehicle Count (All Error/Statuses) (All Lanes);
Total %: 100%
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-69
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.8.11.2 Lane By Sensor Errors & Statuses: Sample Report
Appendix Report 37 Error/Status: Lane By Sensor Errors & Statuses
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-70
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
FHWA
FHWA reports provide data in the formats required by the Federal Highway Administration Traffic Monitoring Guide report submission protocol.
For an explanation of the most current formats refer to Chapter 7 of the FHWA Traffic Monitoring Guide, 2013 edition: http://www.fhwa.dot.gov/ohim/tmguide/index.htm.
These files may also be used as input for programs that can generate additional statistical analysis of the data.
D.9.1 FHWA TMG 2001 Reports
For an explanation of these formats refer to Chapter 6 of the FHWA Traffic Monitoring Guide, 2001 Edition: http://www.fhwa.dot.gov/ohim/tmguide/index.htm.
Data records for motorized data are divided into four (4) types:
1. Station Description 2. Traffic Volume 3. Vehicle Classification 4. Truck Weight Data
D.9.1.1 Purpose
The purpose of FHWA TMG reports is to provide legacy input to national databases maintained by FHWA, including the Travel Monitoring Analysis System (TMAS).
D.9.1.2 TMG 2001 Report Format Rules and Conventions
Report Data
All reports use Both summary (binned) data and per vehicle data.
Data Measurement Unit: Metric
TMG reports are always specified in Metric units.
Record Length
Each record format has a specific length.
In order to submit a record format that is smaller or larger than the specified
length, it is necessary to submit a CSV file with a pipe character | between each
field in the record.
Common Field Item to All Records
Station Identification Six (6) character; allows States to use a common identification system for all traffic monitoring stations.
Field Data
There are no decimals or commas used in any fields.
Field Length
When a field value does not consume all allocated columns for that field, either leading blanks or zeros, starting at the left of the field are to be used.
Example: For a field five columns wide and a data value of 250
Blank-Filled Representation _ _250
Zero-Filled Representation 00250.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-71
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Field Status
Critical (C) Required field for record processing by TMAS software.
Optional (O) Field data not required for record processing by TMAS.
Critical/Optional (C/O) In certain cases, the field may be critical to record processing by TMAS, based on other field input for the record.
D.9.1.3 TMG 2001 Output Filename Syntax
<SS><YY>[<sID>].Typ
Where:
<SS> State FIPS code; 2 letters
<YY> Year; last 2 digits
[<sID>] [Optional] Site ID (See section 9.8.13 Add Site ID to FHWA Export File Names); and
.Typ Represents the 3 letter report extension.
D.9.1.4 TMG 2001 Report Filenames
Custom Report Output Filename
FHWA Station File <SS><YY>.STA
FHWA Traffic Volume <SS><YY>.VOL
FHWA Vehicle Classification <SS><YY>.CLA
FHWA Truck Weight <SS><YY>.WGT
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-72
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.9.2 TMG 2001 Station Description
Report Function:
The Station Description report (file) contains one record per traffic monitoring station, per direction, per lane (unless lanes are combined by the data collection device), per year.
The Station Description record format is used for all traffic volume, vehicle classification, and truck weight monitoring stations.
Updated station records can be submitted at any time during the year if an equipment change occurs at a site resulting in a different type of data submission from that location.
Omitting a Station Description record prevents processing of any succeeding record formats by the TMAS software.
All fields are considered to be character fields.
iAnalyze Report Display: Linked Report Directory.
D.9.2.1 TMG 2001 Station Description: Sample Report
Appendix Report 38 FHWA: TMG 2001 Station Description Report
D.9.2.2 TMG 2001 Station Description: Report Detail
Field and Format Description
Record Type: S Station Record
Field Column Width Description Type
1 1 1 Record Type C
2 2-3 2 FIPS State Code C
3 4-9 6 Station ID C
4 10 1 Direction of Travel Code C
5 11 1 Lane of Travel C
6 12-13 2 Year of Data C
7 14-15 2 Functional Classification Code C
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-73
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Field Column Width Description Type
8 16 1 Number of Lanes in Direction Indicated C
9 17 1 Sample Type for Traffic Volume C
10 18 1 Number of Lanes Monitored for Traffic Volume C
11 19 1 Method of Traffic Volume Counting C
12 20 1 Sample Type for Vehicle Classification C
13 21 1 Number of Lanes Monitored for Vehicle Class. C/O
14 22 1 Method of Vehicle Classification C/O
15 23 1 Algorithm for Vehicle Classification C/O
16 24-25 2 Classification System for Vehicle Classification C
17 26 1 Sample Type for Truck Weight C/O
18 27 1 Number of Lanes Monitored for Truck Weight C/O
19 28 1 Method of Truck Weighing C
20 29 1 Calibration of Weighing System C
21 30 1 Method of Data Retrieval O
22 31 1 Type of Sensor C
23 32 1 Second Type of Sensor C
24 33 1 Primary Purpose - NEW C
25 34-45 12 LRS Identification - NEW C
26 46-51 6 LRS Location Point - NEW C
27 52-59 8 Latitude - NEW O
28 60-68 9 Longitude - NEW O
29 69-72 4 SHRP Site Identification - NEW C
30 73-78 6 Previous Station ID O
31 79-80 2 Year Station Established C
32 81-82 2 Year Station Discontinued C
33 83-85 3 FIPS County Code C/O
34 86 1 HPMS Sample Type C
35 87-98 12 HPMS Sample Identifier C
36 99 1 National Highway System - NEW C
37 100 1 Posted Route Signing C
38 101-108 8 Posted Signed Route Number C
39 109 1 Concurrent Route Signing C
40 110-117 8 Concurrent Signed Route Number C
41 118-167 50 Station Location C
Appendix Table 2 TMG 2001 Station Description Record Detail
For an in-depth detailed explanation of the Station Description Record format refer to the FHWA Traffic Monitoring Guide, 2001 Edition Section 6.2 Station Description Data Formats.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-74
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.9.3 TMG 2001 Traffic Volume
Report Function:
The Hourly Traffic Volume report captures hourly traffic volume for each calendar day in the specified range.
The Traffic Volume file contains one record for each day of traffic monitoring.
Format: Fixed Length, Fixed Field.
All numeric fields should be right-justified and zero-filled.
iAnalyze Report Display: Linked Report Directory.
D.9.3.1 TMG 2001 Traffic Volume: Sample Report
Appendix Report 39 FHWA: TMG 2001 Traffic Volume Report
D.9.3.2 TMG 2001 Traffic Volume: Report Detail
Field and Format Description
Record Type: 3 #3 Record
Field Column Width Description Type
1 1 1 Record Type C
2 2-3 2 FIPS State Code C
3 4-5 2 Functional Classification C
4 6-11 6 Station Identification C
5 12 1 Direction of Travel C
6 13 1 Lane of Travel C
7 14-15 2 Year of Data C
8 16-17 2 Month of Data C
9 18-19 2 Day of Data C
10 20 1 Day of Week C
11 21-25 5 Traffic Volume Counted, 00:01 - 01:00 C
12 26-30 5 Traffic Volume Counted, 01:01 - 02:00 C
13 31-35 5 Traffic Volume Counted, 02:01 - 03:00 C
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-75
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Field Column Width Description Type
14 36-40 5 Traffic Volume Counted, 03:01 - 04:00 C
15 41-45 5 Traffic Volume Counted, 04:01 - 05:00 C
16 46-50 5 Traffic Volume Counted, 05:01 - 06:00 C
17 51-55 5 Traffic Volume Counted, 06:01 - 07:00 C
18 56-60 5 Traffic Volume Counted, 07:01 - 08:00 C
19 61-65 5 Traffic Volume Counted, 08:01 - 09:00 C
20 66-70 5 Traffic Volume Counted, 09:01 - 10:00 C
21 71-75 5 Traffic Volume Counted, 10:01 - 11:00 C
22 76-80 5 Traffic Volume Counted, 11:01 - 12:00 C
23 81-85 5 Traffic Volume Counted, 12:01 - 13:00 C
24 86-90 5 Traffic Volume Counted, 13:01 - 14:00 C
25 91-95 5 Traffic Volume Counted, 14:01 - 15:00 C
26 96-100 5 Traffic Volume Counted, 15:01 - 16:00 C
27 101-105 5 Traffic Volume Counted, 16:01 - 17:00 C
28 106-110 5 Traffic Volume Counted, 17:01 - 18:00 C
29 111-115 5 Traffic Volume Counted, 18:01 - 19:00 C
30 116-120 5 Traffic Volume Counted, 19:01 - 20:00 C
31 121-125 5 Traffic Volume Counted, 20:01 - 21:00 C
32 126-130 5 Traffic Volume Counted, 21:01 - 22:00 C
33 131-135 5 Traffic Volume Counted, 22:01 - 23:00 C
34 136-140 5 Traffic Volume Counted, 23:01 - 24:00 C
35 141 1 Restrictions
Appendix Table 3 TMG 2001 Hourly Traffic Volume Record (# 3 Record) Detail
For an in-depth detailed explanation of the Hourly Traffic Volume Record format refer to the FHWA Traffic Monitoring Guide, 2001 Edition Section 6.3 Traffic Volume Data Formats.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-76
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.9.4 TMG 2001 Vehicle Classification
Report Function:
The Vehicle Classification report captures hourly traffic volume by vehicle class.
All lanes in one direction should have the same data being collected.
The Vehicle Classification file contains one record for each hour with the traffic volume by vehicle class.
The length of the record (number of columns in each record) is determined by the value in Field 15 (columns 25-26) of the Station Description Record.
If two different kinds of data collection equipment are used at a site and those different pieces of equipment collect classification data in different formats (e.g., one uses length classes and the other uses the 13-FHWA categories), then an updated State Description Record should be submitted prior to submitting data using the second classification system to ensure proper analysis.
Format: Variable Length Record
iAnalyze Report Display: Linked Report Directory
D.9.4.1 TMG 2001 Vehicle Classification: Sample Report
Appendix Report 40 FHWA: TMG 2001 Vehicle Classification Report
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-77
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.9.4.2 TMG 2001 Vehicle Classification: Report Detail
Field and Format Description
Record Type: C Classification Record
Field Columns Width Description Type
1 1 1 Record Type C
2 2-3 2 FIPS State Code C
3 4-9 6 Station ID C
4 10 1 Direction of Travel Code C
5 11 1 Lane of Travel C
6 12-13 2 Year of Data C
7 14-15 2 Month of Data C
8 16-17 2 Day of Data C
9 18-19 2 Hour of Data C
10 20-24 5 Total Volume C
11 25-29 5 Class 1 Count C
12 30-34 5 Class 2 Count C
13 35-39 5 Class 3 Count C
14 40-44 5 Class 4 Count C
15 45-49 5 Class 5 Count C
16 50-54 5 Class 6 Count C
17 55-59 5 Class 7 Count C
18 60-64 5 Class 8 Count C
19 65-69 5 Class 9 Count C
20 70-74 5 Class 10 Count C
21 75-79 5 Class 11 Count C
22 80-84 5 Class 12 Count C
23 85-89 5 Class 13 Count C
End the record here if the FHWA 13 class system is being used.
24 90-94 5 Class 14 Count O
25 95-99 5 Class 15 Count O
Appendix Table 4 TMG 2001 Vehicle Classification Record Detail
For an in-depth detailed explanation of the Vehicle Classification Record format refer to the FHWA Traffic Monitoring Guide, 2001 Edition Section 6.4 Vehicle Classification Data Formats.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-78
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.9.5 TMG 2001 Truck Weight
Report Function:
The Weight Data report captures vehicle axle weights and axle spacings, one record for each vehicle.
iAnalyze Report Display: Linked Report Directory
D.9.5.1 TMG 2001 Truck Weight: Sample Report
Appendix Report 41 FHWA: TMG 2001 Truck Weight Report
D.9.5.2 TMG 2001 Truck Weight: Report Detail
Field and Format Description
Record Type: W Weight Record
Field Columns Width Description Type
1 1 1 Record Type C
2 2-3 2 FIPS State Code C
3 4-9 6 Station ID C
4 10 1 Direction of Travel Code C
5 11 1 Lane of Travel C
6 12-13 2 Year of Data C
7 14-15 2 Month of Data C
8 16-17 2 Day of Data C
9 18-19 2 Hour of Data C
10 20-21 2 Vehicle Class C
11 22-24 3 Open C
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-79
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Field Columns Width Description Type
12 25-28 4 Total Weight of Vehicle C
13 29-30 2 Number of Axles C
14 31-33 3 A-axle Weight C
15 34-36 3 A-B Axle Spacing C
16 37-39 3 B-axle Weight C
17 40-42 3 B-C Axle Spacing C
18 43-45 3 C-axle Weight C
19 46-48 3 C-D Axle Spacing C
20 49-51 3 D-axle Weight C
21 52-54 3 D-E Axle Spacing C
22 55-57 3 E-axle Weight C
23 58-60 3 E-F Axle Spacing C
24 61-63 3 F-axle Weight C
25 64-66 3 F-G Axle Spacing C
26 67-69 3 G-axle Weight C
27 70-72 3 G-H Axle Spacing C
28 73-75 3 H-axle Weight C
29 76-78 3 H-I Axle Spacing C
30 79-81 3 I-axle Weight C
31 82-84 3 I-J Axle Spacing C
32 85-87 3 J-axle Weight C
33 88-90 3 J-K Axle Spacing C
34 91-93 3 K-axle Weight C
35 94-96 3 K-L Axle Spacing C
36 97-99 3 L-axle Weight C
37 100-102 3 L-M Axle Spacing C
38 103-105 3 M-axle Weight C
Appendix Table 5 TMG 2001 Truck Weight Record detail
For an in-depth detailed explanation of the Truck Weight Data format refer to the FHWA Traffic Monitoring Guide, 2001 Edition Section 6.5 Truck Weight Data Formats.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-80
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.9.6 FHWA TMG 2013 Reports
For an explanation of the most current formats refer to Chapter 7 of the FHWA Traffic Monitoring Guide, 2013 Edition: http://www.fhwa.dot.gov/ohim/tmguide/index.htm.
Data records for motorized data are divided into six (6) types:
1. Station Description 2. Traffic Volume 3. Speed 4. Vehicle Classification 5. Weight; and 6. Per Vehicle Format (PVF).
D.9.6.1 Purpose
The purpose of FHWA TMG reports is to provide input to national databases maintained by FHWA, including the Travel Monitoring Analysis System (TMAS).
D.9.6.2 TMG 2013 Report Format Rules and Conventions
Report Data
All reports use Both summary (binned) data and per vehicle data.
Data Measurement Unit: Metric
TMG reports are always specified in Metric units.
Record Length
Each record format has a specific length.
In order to submit a record format that is smaller or larger than the specified
length, it is necessary to submit a CSV file with a pipe character | between each
field in the record.
Common Field Item to All Records
Station Identification Six (6) character; allows States to use a common identification system for all traffic monitoring stations.
Field Data
There are no decimals or commas used in any fields.
Field Length
When a field value does not consume all allocated columns for that field, either leading blanks or zeros, starting at the left of the field are to be used.
Example: For a field five columns wide and a data value of 250
Blank-Filled Representation _ _250
Zero-Filled Representation 00250.
Field Status
Critical (C) Required field for record processing by TMAS software.
Optional (O) Field data not required for record processing by TMAS.
Critical/Optional (C/O) In certain cases, the field may be critical to record processing by TMAS, based on other field input for the record.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-81
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.9.6.3 TMG 2013 Output Filename Syntax
<SS><ABC123><YY><YYYY>[<sID>].TYP
Where:
<SS> State FIPS Code; 2 letters
<ABC123> Station ID; 6 characters* (See section 9.8.1 TMG Data: Station Description Information.) * Omitted if file contains multiple site data.
<MM> Month; 2 digits
<YYYY> Year; 4 digits
[<sID>] [Optional] Site ID (See section 6.1.13 Add Site ID to FHWA Export File Names); and
.TYP Represents the 3 letter report extension.
D.9.6.4 TMG 2013 Report Filenames
Custom Report Output Filename
FHWA Station File <SS><ABC123><YY><YYYY>.STA
FHWA Traffic Volume <SS><ABC123><YY><YYYY>.VOL
FHWA Vehicle Classification <SS><ABC123><YY><YYYY>.CLA
FHWA Truck Weight <SS><ABC123><YY><YYYY>.WGT
FHWA Truck Speed <SS><ABC123><YY><YYYY>.SPD
FHWA Truck PVR <SS><ABC123><YY><YYYY>.PVR
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-82
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.9.7 TMG 2013 Station Description
Report Function:
The Station Description report (file) contains one record per traffic monitoring station, per direction, per lane (unless lanes are combined by the data collection device), per year.
The Station Description record format is used for all traffic volume, vehicle classification, and truck weight monitoring stations.
Updated station records can be submitted at any time during the year if an equipment change occurs at a site resulting in a different type of data submission from that location.
Omitting a Station Description record prevents processing of any succeeding record formats by the TMAS software.
All fields are considered to be character fields.
iAnalyze Report Display: Linked Report Directory.
D.9.7.1 TMG 2013 Station Description: Sample Report
Appendix Report 42 FHWA: TMG 2013 Station Description Report
D.9.7.2 TMG 2013 Station Description: Report Detail
Field and Format Description
Record Type: S Station Record.
Field Columns Width Description Type
1 1 1 Record Type C
2 2-3 2 FIPS State Code C
3 4-9 6 Station ID C
4 10 1 Direction of Travel Code C
5 11 1 Lane of Travel C
6 12-15 4 Year of Data C
7 16-17 2 Functional Classification Code C
8 18 1 Number of Lanes in Direction Indicated C
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-83
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Field Columns Width Description Type
9 19 1 Sample Type for TMAS C
10 20 1 Number of Lanes Monitored for Traffic Volume C
11 21 1 Method of Traffic Volume Counting C
12 22 1 Number of Lanes Monitored for Vehicle Class C
13 23 1 Method of Vehicle Classification C/O
14 24 1 Algorithm for Vehicle Classification C/O
15 25-26 2 Vehicle Classification Groupings C/O
16 27 1 Number of Lanes Monitored for Truck Weight C
17 28 1 Method of Truck Weighing C/O
18 29 1 Calibration of Weighing System C/O
19 30 1 Method of Data Retrieval C
20 31 1 Type of Sensor C
21 32 1 Second Type of Sensor O
22 33 1 Primary Purpose C
23 34-93 60 LRS Identification C
24 94-101 8 LRS Location Point C
25 102-109 8 Latitude C
26 110-118 9 Longitude C
27 119-122 4 LTPP Site Identification O
28 123-128 6 Previous Station ID O
29 129-132 4 Year Station Established C
30 133-136 4 Year Station Discontinued O
31 137-139 3 FIPS County Code C
32 140 1 HPMS Sample Type C
33 141-152 12 HPMS Sample Identifier C/O
34 153 1 National Highway System C
35 154-155 2 Posted Route Signing C
36 156-163 8 Posted Signed Route Number C
37 164-213 50 Station Location O
Appendix Table 6 TMG 2013 Station Description Record Detail
For an in-depth detailed explanation of the Station Description Record format refer to the FHWA Traffic Monitoring Guide, 2013 Edition Section 7.2 Station Description Data Format.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-84
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.9.8 TMG 2013 Traffic Volume
Report Function:
The Hourly Traffic Volume report captures hourly traffic volume for each calendar day in the specified range.
The Traffic Volume file contains one record for each day of traffic monitoring.
Format: Fixed Length, Fixed Field.
All numeric fields should be right-justified and zero-filled.
iAnalyze Report Display: Linked Report Directory.
D.9.8.1 TMG 2013 Traffic Volume: Sample Report
Appendix Report 43 FHWA: TMG 2013 Traffic Volume Report
D.9.8.2 TMG 2013 Traffic Volume: Report Detail
Field and Format Description
Record Type: 3 # 3 Record
Field Columns Width Description Type
1 1 1 Record Type C
2 2-3 2 FIPS State Code C
3 4-5 2 Functional Classification C
4 6-11 6 Station Identification C
5 12 1 Direction of Travel C
6 13 1 Lane of Travel C
7 14-17 4 Year of Data C
8 18-19 2 Month of Data C
9 20-21 2 Day of Data C
10 22 1 Day of Week C
11 23-27 5 Traffic Volume Counted, after 00:00 – to 01:00 O
12 28-32 5 Traffic Volume Counted, after 01:00 – to 02:00 O
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-85
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Field Columns Width Description Type
13 33-37 5 Traffic Volume Counted, after 02:00 – to 03:00 O
14 38-42 5 Traffic Volume Counted, after 03:00 – to 04:00 O
15 43-47 5 Traffic Volume Counted, after 04:00 – to 05:00 O
16 48-52 5 Traffic Volume Counted, after 05:00 – to 06:00 O
17 53-57 5 Traffic Volume Counted, after 06:00 – to 07:00 O
18 58-62 5 Traffic Volume Counted, after 07:00 – to 08:00 O
19 63-67 5 Traffic Volume Counted, after 08:00 – to 09:00 O
20 68-72 5 Traffic Volume Counted, after 09:00 – to 10:00 O
21 73-77 5 Traffic Volume Counted, after 10:00 – to 11:00 O
22 78-82 5 Traffic Volume Counted, after 11:00 – to 12:00 O
23 83-87 5 Traffic Volume Counted, after 12:00 – to 13:00 O
24 88-92 5 Traffic Volume Counted, after 13:00 – to 14:00 O
25 93-97 5 Traffic Volume Counted, after 14:00 – to 15:00 O
26 98-102 5 Traffic Volume Counted, after 15:00 – to 16:00 O
27 103-107 5 Traffic Volume Counted, after 16:00 – to 17:00 O
28 108-112 5 Traffic Volume Counted, after 17:00 – to 18:00 O
29 113-117 5 Traffic Volume Counted, after 18:00 – to 19:00 O
30 118-122 5 Traffic Volume Counted, after 19:00 – to 20:00 O
31 123-127 5 Traffic Volume Counted, after 20:00 – to 21:00 O
32 128-132 5 Traffic Volume Counted, after 21:00 – to 22:00 O
33 133-137 5 Traffic Volume Counted, after 22:00 – to 23:00 O
34 138-142 5 Traffic Volume Counted, after 23:00 – to 24:00 O
35 143 1 Restrictions C
Appendix Table 7 TMG 2013 Hourly Traffic Volume Record Detail
For an in-depth detailed explanation of the Traffic Volume Record format refer to the FHWA Traffic Monitoring Guide, 2013 Edition Section 7.3 Traffic Volume Data Format.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-86
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.9.9 TMG 2013 Speed Data
Report Function:
The Speed Data report captures the number of vehicles traveling in specified 5 mph speed bins during specified time period.
Each record can contain: 1 hour of data, 15 minutes of data, or 5 minutes of data.
Both the date range and time intervals as are user specified.
Additional Notes:
To submit data to FHWA, the speed data format must have a minimum of 15 bins up to a maximum of 25 bins and should supply data in 5 mph speed bins.
When submitting data using the minimum number of speed bins (15):
Speed Bin 1 All Vehicles traveling <=20 mph
Speed Bin 2 All Vehicles traveling >20 mph and <=25 mph
Last Speed Bin All Vehicles traveling >85 mph
Slow Speed Bins
Additionally, report data may include one or two speed bins for slower traveling vehicles (<=15 mph) or (<= 10 mph) and (>10 mph and <= 15 mph).
High Speed Bins
Up to eight additional bins may be added to provide more detail on high speed travel. The number of additional high speed bins being reported should be indicated on the speed record.
Any speed data records that do not meet these data specifications are purged by the TMAS software.
Format: Variable Length Record, Fixed Width Field.
iAnalyze Report Display: Linked Report Directory.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-87
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.9.9.1 TMG 2013 Speed Data: Sample Report
Appendix Report 44 FHWA: TMG 2013 Speed Data Report
D.9.9.2 TMG 2013 Speed Data: Report Detail
Field and Format Description
Record Type: T Speed Record
Field Columns Width Description Type
1 1 1 Record Type C
2 2-3 2 FIPS State Code C
3 4-9 6 Station ID C
4 10 1 Direction of Travel Code C
5 11 1 Lane of Travel C
6 12-15 4 Year of Data C
7 16-17 2 Month of Data C
8 18-19 2 Day of Data C
9 20-21 2 Hour of Data C
10 22 1 Speed Data Time Interval O
11 23 1 Definition of First Speed Bin O
12 24-25 2 Total Number of Speed Bins Reported O
13 26-30 5 Total Interval Volume O
14 31-35 5 Bin 1 Count C
15 36-40 5 Bin 2 Count C
16 41-45 5 Bin 3 Count C
17 46-50 5 Bin 4 Count C
18 51-55 1 Bin 5 Count C
19 56-60 5 Bin 6 Count C
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-88
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Field Columns Width Description Type
20 61-65 5 Bin 7 Count C
21 66-70 5 Bin 8 Count C
22 71-75 5 Bin 9 Count C
23 76-80 5 Bin 10 Count C
24 81-85 5 Bin 11 Count C
25 86-90 5 Bin 12 Count C
26 91-95 5 Bin 13 Count C
27 96-100 5 Bin 14 Count C
28 101-105 5 Bin 15 Count C
29 106-110 5 Bin 16 Count C/O
30 111-115 5 Bin 17 Count C/O
31 116-120 5 Bin 18 Count C/O
32 121-125 5 Bin 19 Count C/O
33 126-130 5 Bin 20 Count C/O
34 131-135 5 Bin 21 Count C/O
35 136-140 5 Bin 22 Count C/O
36 141-145 5 Bin 23 Count C/O
37 146-150 5 Bin 24 Count C/O
38 151-155 5 Bin 25 Count C/O
Appendix Table 8 TMG 2013 Vehicle Speed Record Detail
For an in-depth detailed explanation of the Vehicle Speed Record format refer to the FHWA Traffic Monitoring Guide, 2013 Edition Section 7.4 Speed Data Format.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-89
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.9.10 TMG 2013 Vehicle Classification
Report Function:
The Vehicle Classification report captures hourly traffic volume by vehicle class.
All lanes in one direction should have the same data being collected.
Additional Notes:
The length of the record (number of columns in each record) is determined by the value in Field 15 (columns 25-26) of the Station Description Record.
If two different kinds of data collection equipment are used at a site and those different pieces of equipment collect classification data in different formats (e.g., one uses length classes and the other uses the 13-FHWA categories), then an updated State Description Record should be submitted prior to submitting data using the second classification system to ensure proper analysis.
Format: Variable Length Record
iAnalyze Report Display: Linked Report Directory
D.9.10.1 TMG 2013 Vehicle Classification: Sample Report
Appendix Report 45 FHWA: TMG 2013 Vehicle Classification Report
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-90
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.9.10.2 TMG 2013 Vehicle Classification: Report Detail
Field and Format Description
Record Type: C Classification Record
Field Columns Width Description Type
1 1 1 Record Type C
2 2-3 2 FIPS State Code C
3 4-9 6 Station ID C
4 10 1 Direction of Travel Code C
5 11 1 Lane of Travel C
6 12-15 4 Year of Data C
7 16-17 2 Month of Data C
8 18-19 2 Day of Data C
9 20-21 2 Hour of Data C
10 22 1 Classification Data Time Interval O
11 23-27 5 Total Interval Volume C
12 28 1 Restrictions C
13 29-33 5 Class 1 Count C
14 34-38 5 Class 2 Count C
15 39-43 5 Class 3 Count C/O
16 44-48 5 Class 4 Count C/O
17 49-53 5 Class 5 Count C/O
18 54-58 5 Class 6 Count C/O
19 59-63 5 Class 7 Count C/O
20 64-68 5 Class 8 Count C/O
21 69-73 5 Class 9 Count C/O
22 74-78 5 Class 10 Count C/O
23 79-83 5 Class 11 Count C/O
24 84-88 5 Class 12 Count C/O
25 89-93 5 Class 13 Count C/O
Appendix Table 9 TMG 2013 Vehicle Classification Record Detail
For an in-depth detailed explanation of the Vehicle Classification Record format refer to the FHWA Traffic Monitoring Guide, 2013 Edition Section 7.5 Vehicle Classification Data Format.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-91
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.9.11 TMG 2013 Truck Weight
Report Function:
The Weight Data report captures vehicle axle weights and axle spacings, one record for each vehicle.
iAnalyze Report Display: Linked Report Directory
D.9.11.1 TMG 2013 Truck Weight: Sample Report
Appendix Report 46 FHWA: TMG 2013 Truck Weight Report
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-92
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.9.11.2 TMG 2013 Truck Weight: Report Detail
Field and Format Description
Record Type: W Weight Record
Field Columns Width Description Type
1 1 1 Record Type C
2 2-3 2 FIPS State Code C
3 4-9 6 Station ID C
4 10 1 Direction of Travel Code C
5 11 1 Lane of Travel C
6 12-15 4 Year of Data C
7 16-17 2 Month of Data C
8 18-19 2 Day of Data C
9 20-21 2 Hour of Data C
10 22-23 2 Vehicle Class C
11 24-26 3 Open O
12 27-32 6 Total Weight of Vehicle C
13 33-34 2 Number of Axles C
14 35-39 5 Axle Weight 1 C
15 40-43 4 Axles 1-2 Spacing C
16 44-48 5 Axle Weight 2 C
17 49-52 4 Axles 2-3 Spacing C/O
18 53-57 5 Axle Weight 3 C/O
19 58-61 4 Axles 3-4 Spacing C/O
20 62-66 5 Axle Weight 4 C/O
21 67-70 4 Axles 4-5 Spacing C/O
22 71-75 5 Axle Weight 5 C/O
23 76-79 4 Axles 5-6 Spacing C/O
24 80-84 5 Axle Weight 6 C/O
25 85-88 4 Axles 6-7 Spacing C/O
26 89-93 5 Axle Weight 7 C/O
27 94-97 4 Axles 7-8 Spacing C/O
28 98-102 5 Axle Weight 8 C/O
29 103-106 4 Axles 8-9 Spacing C/O
30 107-111 5 Axle Weight 9 C/O
31 112-115 4 Axles 9-10 Spacing C/O
32 116-120 5 Axle Weight 10 C/O
33 121-124 4 Axles 10-11 Spacing C/O
34 125-129 5 Axle Weight 11 C/O
35 130-133 4 Axles 11-12 Spacing C/O
36 134-138 5 Axle Weight 12 C/O
37 139-142 4 Axles 12-13 Spacing C/O
38 143-147 5 Axle Weight 13 C/O
Appendix Table 10 TMG 2013 Weight Record Detail
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-93
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
For an in-depth detailed explanation of the Weight Record format refer to the FHWA Traffic Monitoring Guide, 2013 Edition Section 7.6 Weight Data Format.
D.9.12 TMG 2013 Detailed Per Vehicle Report
Report Function:
Standard Detailed Per Vehicle Reports can capture the following as individual records:
Volume Speed Vehicle Classification; and Vehicle Weight data.
This specific iANALYZE report captures classification and weight data.
This provides for a much more detailed analysis of traffic patterns and permits the investigation of a number of key traffic flow and vehicle characteristics (e.g., vehicle gap analysis, speed by class, and changes in axle spacing distributions) that are not possible with aggregate traffic records.
iAnalyze Report Display: Linked Report Directory
D.9.12.1 TMG 2013 Detailed Per Vehicle Report: Sample Report
Appendix Report 47 FHWA: TMG 2013 Detailed Per Vehicle Report
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-94
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.9.12.2 TMG 2013 Detailed Per Vehicle Report: Report Detail
Field and Format Description
Record Type: I Per Vehicle Record
W Individual Vehicle Record Collected By Weight (Axle) Device (W Variant).
C Individual Vehicle Record Collected By Classification Device (C Variant).
Field Columns Width Description Type
1 1 1 Record Type C
2 2-3 2 FIPS State Code C
3 4-9 6 Station ID C
4 10 1 Direction of Travel Code C
5 11 1 Lane of Travel C
6 12-15 4 Year of Data C
7 16-17 2 Month of Data C
8 18-19 2 Day of Data C
9 20-27 8 Time of Data C
10 28 1 C C
11 29-32 4 Vehicle Signature/Other Use O
12 33-36 4 Vehicle Speed C
13 37-38 2 Vehicle Classification C
14 39-40 2 Number of Axles C
15 41-44 4 Total Vehicle Length (bumper to bumper) O
16 45-48 4 Axles 1-2 Spacing C
17 49-52 4 Axles 2-3 Spacing C/O
18 53-56 4 Axles 3-4 Spacing C/O
19 57-60 4 Axles 4-5 Spacing C/O
20 61-64 4 Axles 5-6 Spacing C/O
21 65-68 4 Axles 6-7 Spacing C/O
22 69-72 4 Axles 7-8 Spacing C/O
23 73-76 4 Axles 8-9 Spacing C/O
24 77-80 4 Axles 9-10 Spacing C/O
25 81-84 4 Axles 10-11 Spacing C/O
26 85-88 4 Axles 11-12 Spacing C/O
27+
Use additional spacing in
4-digit increments up to 25 axles
C/O
Appendix Table 11 TMG 2013 Individual Vehicle Record (C Variant) Detail
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-95
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Field and Format Description
Field Columns Width Description Type
1 1 1 Record Type C
2 2-3 2 FIPS State Code C
3 4-9 6 Station ID C
4 10 1 Direction of Travel Code C
5 11 1 Lane of Travel C
6 12-15 4 Year of Data C
7 16-17 2 Month of Data C
8 18-19 2 Day of Data C
9 20-27 8 Time of Data C
10 28 1 W C
11 29-32 4 Vehicle Signature/Other Use O
12 33-36 4 Vehicle Speed C
13 37-38 2 Vehicle Classification C
14 39-40 2 Number of Axles C
15 41-44 4 Total Vehicle Length (bumper to bumper) O
16 45-47 3 Pavement Temperature O
17 48-52 5 Axle Weight 1 C
18 53-56 4 Axles 1-2 Spacing C
19 57-61 5 Axle Weight 2 C/O
20 62-65 4 Axles 2-3 Spacing C/O
21 66-70 5 Axle Weight 3 C/O
22 71-74 4 Axles 3-4 Spacing C/O
23 75-79 5 Axle Weight 4 C/O
24 80-83 4 Axles 4-5 Spacing C/O
25 84-88 5 Axle Weight 5 C/O
26 89-92 4 Axle Weight 7 C/O
27 93-97 5 Axle Weight 6 C/O
28 98-101 4 Axles 6-7 Spacing C/O
29 102-106 5 Axle Weight 7 C/O
30 107-110 4 Axles 7-8 Spacing C/O
31 111-115 5 Axle Weight 8 C/O
32 116-119 4 Axles 8-9 Spacing C/O
33 120-124 5 Axle Weight 9 C/O
34 125-128 4 Axles 9-10 Spacing C/O
35 129-133 5 Axle Weight 10 C/O
36 134-137 4 Axles 10-11 Spacing C/O
37 138-142 5 Axle Weight 11 C/O
38 143-146 4 Axles 11-12 Spacing C/O
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-96
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Field Columns Width Description Type
39 147-151 5 Axle Weight 12 C/O
40+
Use additional spacing in
4-digit increments up to 25 axles
C/O
41+
Use additional weights in
5-digit increments up to 25 axles
C/O
Appendix Table 12 TMG 2013 Individual Vehicle Record (W Variant) Detail
For an in-depth detailed explanation of the Individual Vehicle Record formats refer to the FHWA Traffic Monitoring Guide, 2013 Edition Section 7.7 Detailed Per Vehicle Format (PVF).
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-97
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
MEPDG
D.10.1 MEPDG Export (Pavement MEDesign)
Report Function:
This report creates the Traffic and Axle Load Distribution XML files for import into the AASHTOWare Pavement ME Design software.
D.10.1.1 MEPDG Export: Axle Load Distribution Report Detail
Filename Syntax:
<siteid>_MEPDGExport (Pavement MEDesign) _AxleLoadDistribution. xml
Where <siteid> is the site id configured in the Site Editor.
Contents of Axle Load Distribution XML File
Contains the normalized axle load distribution for all months, classes and group
types; single, tandem, tridem or quadrem.
When imported to Pavement ME Design, overwrites all values.
Only contains values for months, classes, group types and weight bins which
have data. Otherwise, values are set to 0. Weight.
D.10.1.2 MEPDG Export: Traffic XML Report Detail
Filename Syntax:
<siteid>_MEPDGExport (Pavement MEDesign)_Traffic.xml
Where <siteid> is the site id configured in the Site Editor.
Date Range: Requires a Year of data to create this report.
Using less than 1 full year results in default settings for monthly based
values.
Units Kips/Ft or Pounds/Inches; set values in the xml file for US
Customary units.
Metric; sets values in the xml file for SI units.
Classes Uses FHWA TMG classifications.
The report uses classes 4 to 13 in its analysis.
Axle Group Tandem, Tridem, Quadrem; reflective of the definitions in the
classification scheme used by iAnalyze or by the equipment on site.
Within the Pavement ME Design software, there are percentages which should total
100%. However, due to rounding and conversion to the values in the xml file, sometimes
these percentages will be slightly off and the Pavement ME Design will flag this as a
warning or error.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-98
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Contents of Traffic XML File
Traffic Field Comment
Two-way AADTT Calculated using procedure for AADT as per AASHTO Guidelines for Traffic Data Programs 2009 Uses classes 4 to 13.
Tandem axle spacing Tridem axle spacing Quadrem axle spacing
Calculated as the Average Intra-Axle Spacing, per group. tridem has 2 intra-axle spacings; quadrem has 3 intra-axle spacings
Wheelbase Fields Average spacing of <type> axles Percent trucks with <type> axles
Calculated as the Average Front Axle Spacing FHWA classes 8 to 13 vehicles with the following ranges:
Short 10.0 ft up to 13.4 ft Medium 13.4 ft up to 16.5 ft Long 16.5 ft up to 20.0 ft
*Front axle spacings not in these ranges are ignored.
Display Name/Identifier Set to Custom Traffic Data
Description of object Set to: <sitename> (<siteid>) <From timestamp> to <To timestamp> where: <sitename> Site Name configured in the Site Editor. <siteid> Site Identifier configured in the Site Editor <From timestamp> Start time of the data processed by
iAnalyze to create the report. <To timestamp> End time of the data processed by
iAnalyze to create the report.
Date approved Set to the Time the xml file was created by iAnalyze.
Author Set to IRD iAnalyze followed by the version of iAnalyze used to create the xml file.
Date created Set to the Time the xml file was created by iAnalyze.
Vehicle Class Distribution Distribution (%)
Percentage of each Class in the Total of All Trucks Classes 8 - 13
Vehicle Class Distribution Growth Rate (%)
< 2 years data processed by iAnalyze for this report: Growth Rate set to the Default. >= 2 years data processed by iAnalyze for this report: Values calculated using procedure for growth rate as per AASHTO Guidelines for Traffic Data Programs 2009.
Monthly Adjustment Calculated using procedure for monthly adjustment factors as per AASHTO Guidelines for Traffic Data Programs 2009.
Axles Per Truck Calculated as the Ratio of Number of Each Axle Group Type in a Class divided by Number of Trucks in that Class.
Hourly Adjustment Calculated using procedure for Time of Day Factors as per AASHTO Guidelines for Traffic Data Programs 2009.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-99
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
WEIGHT
Vehicle Weight reports provide vehicle data statistics using Vehicle Weight Intervals (ranges) as the primary unit of analysis.
D.11.1 Class By Gross Vehicle Weight
Report Function:
Number of Vehicles: This report tabulates Vehicle Count data by GVW Weight Range for the specified reporting period.
Reporting Interval: GVW Range; Default or User Specified.
Includes: Total calculations.
Data: Per Vehicle (Good Weight Vehicles).
D.11.1.1 Class By Gross Vehicle Weight: Report Detail
Column Definitions
Column Heading Description
Classification Vehicle Class; 1-13 (Default) or User Specified.
Weight (Kips) GVW in 1000’s of Pounds.
Total (Col) Total Vehicle Counts per GVW Range (All Classes).
Row Definitions
Row Counts Row Description
Per GVW Range GVW Range Vehicle Count per Class.
Total (Row) Total Vehicle Count per Class (All GVW Ranges).
Grand Total: Total Class Vehicle Count (All GVW Ranges).
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-100
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.11.1.2 Class By Gross Vehicle Weight: Sample Report
Appendix Report 48 Weight: Class By Gross Vehicle Weight
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-101
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.11.2 Class By Front Axle Weight
Report Function:
Number of Vehicles: This report tabulates Vehicle Count data by Front Axle Weight Range for the specified reporting period.
Reporting Interval: Front Axle Weight Range; Default or User Specified.
Includes: Total calculations.
Data: Per Vehicle (Good Weight Vehicles).
D.11.2.1 Class By Front Axle Weight: Report Detail
Column Definitions
Column Heading Description
Classification Vehicle Class; 1-13 (Default) or User Specified.
Weight (Kips) Front Axle Weight in 1000’s of Pounds.
Total (Col) Total Vehicle Counts per Front Axle Weight Range (All Classes).
Row Definitions
Row Counts Row Description
Per Front Axle Weight Range
Front Axle Weight Range Vehicle Count per Class.
Total (Row) Total Vehicle Count per Class (All Front Axle Weight Ranges).
Grand Total: Total Class Vehicle Count (All Front Axle Weight Ranges).
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-102
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.11.2.2 Class By Front Axle Weight: Sample Report
Appendix Report 49 Weight: Class By Front Axle Weight
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-103
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.11.3 Class By Single Axle Weight
Report Function:
Number of Axles: This report tabulates Vehicle Count data by Single Axle Weight Range (excluding the front axle) for the specified reporting period.
Reporting Interval: Single Axle Weight Range; Default or User Specified.
Includes: Total calculations.
Data: Per Vehicle (Good Weight Vehicles).
D.11.3.1 Class By Single Axle Weight: Report Detail
Column Definitions
Column Heading Description
Classification Vehicle Class; 1-13 (Default) or User Specified.
Weight (Kips) Single Axle Weight in 1000’s of Pounds.
Total (Col) Total Vehicle Counts per Single Axle Weight Range (All Classes).
Row Definitions
Row Counts Row Description
Per Single Axle Weight Range
Single Axle Weight Range Vehicle Count per Class.
Total (Row) Total Vehicle Count per Class (All Single Axle Weight Ranges).
Grand Total: Total Class Vehicle Count (All Single Axle Weight Ranges).
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-104
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.11.3.2 Class By Single Axle Weight: Sample Report
Appendix Report 50 Weight: Class By Single Axle Weight
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-105
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.11.4 Class By Tandem Axle Weight
Report Function:
Number of Axles: This report tabulates Vehicle Count data by Tandem Axle Weight Range for the specified reporting period.
Reporting Interval: Tandem Axle Weight Range; Default or User Specified.
Includes: Total calculations.
Data: Per Vehicle (Good Weight Vehicles).
D.11.4.1 Class By Tandem Axle Weight: Report Detail
Column Definitions
Column Heading Description
Classification Vehicle Class; 1-13 (Default) or User Specified.
Weight (Kips) Tandem Axle Weight in 1000’s of Pounds.
Total (Col) Total Vehicle Counts per Tandem Axle Weight Range (All Classes).
Row Definitions
Row Counts Row Description
Per Tandem Axle Weight Range
Tandem Axle Weight Range Vehicle Count per Class.
Total (Row) Total Vehicle Count per Class (All Tandem Axle Weight Ranges).
Grand Total: Total Class Vehicle Count (All Tandem Axle Weight Ranges).
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-106
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.11.4.2 Class By Tandem Axle Weight: Sample Report
Appendix Report 51 Weight: Class By Tandem Axle Weight
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-107
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.11.5 Class By Tridem Axle Weight
Report Function:
Number of Axles: This report tabulates Vehicle Count data by Tridem Axle Weight Range for the specified reporting period.
Reporting Interval: Tridem Axle Weight Range; Default or User Specified.
Includes: Total calculations.
Data: Per Vehicle (Good Weight Vehicles).
D.11.5.1 Class By Tridem Axle Weight: Report Detail
Column Definitions
Column Heading Description
Classification Vehicle Class; 1-13 (Default) or User Specified.
Weight (Kips) Tridem Axle Weight in 1000’s of Pounds.
Total (Col) Total Vehicle Counts per Tridem Axle Weight Range (All Classes).
Row Definitions
Row Counts Row Description
Per Tridem Axle Weight Range
Tridem Axle Weight Range Vehicle Count per Class.
Total (Row) Total Vehicle Count per Class (All Tridem Axle Weight Ranges).
Grand Total: Total Class Vehicle Count (All Tridem Axle Weight Ranges).
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-108
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.11.5.2 Class By Tridem Axle Weight: Sample Report
Appendix Report 52 Weight: Class By Tridem Axle Weight
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-109
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.11.6 Class By Quadrem Axle Weight
Report Function:
Number of Axles: This report tabulates Vehicle Count data by Quadrem Axle Weight Range for the specified reporting period.
Reporting Interval: Quadrem Axle Weight Range; Default or User Specified.
Includes: Total calculations.
Data: Per Vehicle (Good Weight Vehicles).
D.11.6.1 Class By Quadrem Axle Weight: Report Detail
Column Definitions
Column Heading Description
Classification Vehicle Class; 1-13 (Default) or User Specified.
Weight (Kips) Quadrem Axle Weight in 1000’s of Pounds.
Total (Col) Total Vehicle Counts per Quadrem Axle Weight Range (All Classes).
Row Definitions
Row Counts Row Description
Per Quadrem Axle Weight Range
Quadrem Axle Weight Range Vehicle Count per Class.
Total (Row) Total Vehicle Count per Class (All Quadrem Axle Weight Ranges).
Grand Total: Total Class Vehicle Count (All Quadrem Axle Weight Ranges).
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-110
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.11.6.2 Class By Quadrem Axle Weight: Sample Report
Appendix Report 53 Weight: Class By Quadrem Axle Weight
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-111
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.11.7 Average GVW Class By Hour
Report Function:
Average GVW (kips): This report displays Average Hourly GVW by Vehicle Class.
Reporting Interval: Hourly; over a 24 hour period, for the specified date.
Includes: Average calculations.
Data: Per Vehicle (All Non-Error Vehicles).
D.11.7.1 Average GVW Class By Hour: Report Detail
Column Definitions
Column Heading Description
Classification Vehicle Class; 1-13 (Default) or User Specified.
Hour Hour; over a 24 Hour Period.
Overall (Col) Average GVW Vehicle Counts Hourly (All Classes).
Row Definitions
Row Counts Row Description
Per Hour Hourly Vehicle Count per Class.
Overall (Row) Total Daily (24 hr.) Average GVW Vehicle Count per Class.
Grand Total: Total Daily Average GVW Vehicle Count (All Classes).
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-112
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.11.7.2 Average GVW Class By Hour: Sample Report
Appendix Report 54 Weight: Avg GVW Class By Hour
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-113
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.11.8 Average GVW Weekday By Class
Report Function:
Number of Vehicles: This report tabulates Average Weekday Vehicle Count data by Class.
Reporting Interval: Hourly; over a 24 hour period, for the specified date.
Includes: Total, Subtotal and Percentage calculations.
Complimentary Report: Class By Hour
Data: Per Vehicle (All Vehicles)
The average gross vehicle weight on each day of the week (Saturday through Sunday).
D.11.8.1 Average GVW Weekday By Class: Report Detail
Report columns are:
day of the week
overall class average GVW Report rows are:
vehicle class
average for all classes for each day
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-114
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.11.8.2 Average GVW Weekday By Class: Sample Report
Appendix Report 55 Weight: Avg GVW Weekday By Class
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-115
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.11.9 Maximum GVW Weekday By Class
Report Function:
Number of Vehicles: This report tabulates Weekly Vehicle Count data by Class.
Reporting Interval: Hourly; over a 24 hour period, for the specified date.
Includes: Total, Subtotal and Percentage calculations.
Complimentary Report: Class By Hour
Data: Per Vehicle (All Vehicles)
The maximum gross vehicle weight that occurred in each class on each day of the week (Saturday through Sunday).
D.11.9.1 Maximum GVW Weekday By Class: Report Detail
Report columns are:
day of the week
overall class average GVW Report rows are:
vehicle class
average for all classes for each day
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-116
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.11.9.2 Maximum GVW Weekday By Class: Sample Report
Appendix Report 56 Weight: Max GVW Weekday By Class
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-117
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.11.10 GVW By Hour
Report Function:
Number of Vehicles: This report tabulates Hourly Vehicle Count data by GVW Range.
Reporting Interval: Hourly; over a 24 hour period, for the specified date.
Includes: Total and Subtotal calculations.
Data: Per Vehicle (Good Weight Vehicles).
D.11.10.1 GVW By Hour: Report Detail
Column Definitions
Column Heading Description
GVW Range (Kips) Gross Vehicle Weight Ranges; Default or User Specified.
Hour Hour; over a 24 Hour Period.
Total (Col) Total Hourly Vehicle Counts (All GVW Ranges).
Total Quarterly Vehicle Counts (All GVW Ranges).
Grand Total: Total Daily Vehicle Count (All Classes).
Row Definitions
Row Counts Row Description
Per Hour Hourly Vehicle Count per GVW Range.
Quarterly Subtotal Quarterly Vehicle Count every six (6) hours per GVW Range.
Total (Row) Total Daily (24 hr.) Vehicle Count per GVW Range.
Grand Total: Total Daily Vehicle Count (All GVW Ranges).
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-118
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.11.10.2 GVW By Hour: Sample Report
Appendix Report 57 Weight: GVW By Hour
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-119
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.11.11 GVW By Day Of Month
Report Function:
Number of Vehicles: This report tabulates Monthly Vehicle Count data by GVW Range.
Reporting Interval: By Day; over a Month.
Includes: Total calculations.
Data: Per Vehicle (Good Weight Vehicles).
D.11.11.1 GVW By Day Of Month: Report Detail
Column Definitions
Column Heading Description
GVW Range (Kips) Gross Vehicle Weight Ranges; Default or User Specified.
Day Day of Month; Weekday.
Total (Col) Total Daily Vehicle Counts (All GVW Ranges).
Weekly Subtotal Vehicle Counts (All GVW Ranges).
Row Definitions
Row Counts Row Description
Day; Weekday Daily Vehicle Counts per GVW Range. Beginning on the first day of the month.
Weekly Subtotal Weekly Vehicle Count Subtotal per GVW Range; Every seven (7) days or portion thereof.
Total (Row) Total Monthly Vehicle Count per GVW Range.
Grand Total: Total Monthly Vehicle Count (All GVW Ranges).
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-120
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.11.11.2 GVW By Day Of Month: Sample Report
Appendix Report 58 Weight: GVW By Day Of Month
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-121
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.11.12 GVW By Month
Report Function:
Data: Per Vehicle (Good Weight Vehicles).
D.11.12.1 GVW By Month: Report Detail
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-122
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.11.12.2 GVW By Month: Sample Report
Appendix Report 59 Weight: GVW By Month
WEIGHT VIOLATION
Weight Violation reports provide vehicle violation data statistics using vehicle weight violations as the primary unit of analysis.
D.12.1 Weight Violation By Hour
Report Function:
Number of Violation Vehicles: This report tabulates Hourly Vehicle Violation Count by Axle Weight class.
Reporting Interval: Hourly; over a 24 hour period for the specified date.
Includes: Total calculations.
Data: Per Vehicle (All Vehicles).
Data: Per Vehicle (Good Weight Vehicles)
Per Hour: Total Vehicle Count; Number of Valid vehicles; Number of Violating vehicles; Percentage of Violation vehicles;
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-123
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Number of vehicles with single/tandem/tridem/quadrem axle violations; Number of vehicles with bridge, balance and individual axle unit violations.
D.12.1.1 Weight Violation By Hour: Report Detail
Provides an hourly count of weight violations for the specified day.
Report columns are:
Valid Count of good weight vehicles.
Viol Count of good weight vehicles with a weight violation.
Viol% Percentage of violating vehicles: Viol / Valid * 100
Good Weight Vehicle Count (1 violation count per specified axle unit).
Steer Steering axle violation. Single Single axle violation. Tandem Tandem axle violation. Tridem Tridem axle violation. Quadrem Quadrem axle violation. GVW GVW violation. GrpInd Axle group individual violation. GrpCom Axle group combination violation or an axle unit
combination violation. Balan Weight imbalance between the axles in an axle unit
of the vehicle. Unit Axle unit individual violation.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-124
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.12.1.2 Weight Violation By Hour: Sample Report
Appendix Report 60 Weight Violation: Weight Violation By Hour
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-125
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.12.2 Weight Violation By Class
Report Function:
Number of Violation Vehicles: This report tabulates Vehicle Weight Violation Count and Percentage data by Class for the reporting period.
Reporting Interval: As per the specified date range.
Includes: Total and Percentage calculations.
Complimentary Report:
Data: Per Vehicle (All Non-Error Vehicles)
Provides a count of weight violations occurring per vehicle Class.
Per Class: Total Vehicle Count; Number of Warning vehicles; Number of Valid vehicles; Number of Violating vehicles; Percentage of Violation vehicles; Number of vehicles with single/tandem/tridem/quadrem axle violations; Number of vehicles with bridge, balance and individual axle unit violations.
D.12.2.1 Weight Violation By Class: Report Detail
Report columns are:
Totcnt Total Vehicle Count
InvID
Valid Count of good weight vehicles.
Viol Count of good weight vehicles with a weight violation.
Viol% Percentage of violating vehicles: Viol / Valid * 100
Good Weight Vehicle Count (1 violation count per specified axle unit).
Steer Steering axle violation. Single Single axle violation. Tandem Tandem axle violation. Tridem Tridem axle violation. Quadrem Quadrem axle violation. GVW GVW violation. GrpInd Axle group individual violation. GrpCom Axle group combination violation or an axle unit
combination violation. Balan Weight imbalance between the axles in an axle unit
of the vehicle. Unit Axle unit individual violation.
Sub-table values: % of unclassified vehicles; and % of vehicles with warnings.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-126
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.12.2.2 Weight Violation By Class: Sample Report
Appendix Report 61 Weight Violation: Weight Violation By Class
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-127
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.12.3 Weight Violation Class By Hour
Report Function:
Number of Vehicles: This report tabulates Hourly Weight Class Violations by Vehicle Class.
Reporting Interval: Hourly; over a 24 hour period, for the specified date.
Includes: Total and Percentage calculations.
Data: Per Vehicle (Good Weight Vehicles)
Per Hour: Number of good (valid) vehicles; Number of Violation vehicles; Percentage of Violation vehicles; Number of vehicles in each class with weight violations.
D.12.3.1 Weight Violation Class By Hour: Report Detail
Provides a count of weight violations occurring in each vehicle class by hour.
Report columns are:
Valid Count of good weight vehicles.
Viol Count of good weight vehicles with a weight violation.
Viol% Percentage of violating vehicles: Viol / Valid * 100
Good Weight Vehicle Count (1 violation count per specified axle unit).
Class Count of violation vehicles per vehicle class.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-128
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.12.3.2 Weight Violation Class By Hour: Sample Report
Appendix Report 62 Weight Violation: Weight Violation Class By Hour
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-129
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.12.4 Weight Violation By Weekday
Report Function:
Number of Violation Vehicles: This report tabulates Vehicle Weight Violation Count and Percentage data by Weekday for the reporting period.
Reporting Interval: Daily; for the specified weekly date range. Sunday through Saturday
Includes: Total and Percentage calculations.
Complimentary Report:
Data: Per Vehicle (Good Weight Vehicles)
D.12.4.1 Weight Violation By Weekday: Report Detail
Provides a daily count of weight violations for the specified week.
Per Day: Total Vehicle Count; Number of Valid vehicles; Number of Violating vehicles; Percentage of Violation vehicles; Number of vehicles with single/tandem/tridem/quadrem axle violations; Number of vehicles with bridge, balance and individual axle unit violations.
Report columns are:
Valid Count of good weight vehicles.
Viol Count of good weight vehicles with a weight violation.
Viol% Percentage of violating vehicles: Viol / Valid * 100
Good Weight Vehicle Counts (1 violation count per specified axle unit).
Steer Steering axle violation.
Single Single axle violation.
Tandem Tandem axle violation.
Tridem Tridem axle violation.
Quadrem Quadrem axle violation.
GVW GVW violation.
GrpInd Axle group individual violation.
GrpCom Axle group combination violation or an axle unit combination violation.
Balan Weight imbalance between the axles in an axle unit of the vehicle.
Unit Axle unit individual violation.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-130
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.12.4.2 Weight Violation By Weekday: Sample Report
Appendix Report 63 Weight Violation: Weight Violation By Weekday
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-131
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
IRD ASCII
IRD ASCII reports provide data in CSV format which is typically used as input for programs that can generate additional statistical analysis of the data.
Data: All reports use Both summary (binned) data and per vehicle data.
Output Filename Extension: .CSV
iANALYZE Report Display: Linked Directory
D.13.1 IRD ASCII Raw Data
Report Function:
D.13.1.1 IRD ASCII Raw Data: Sample Report
Appendix Report 64 IRD ASCII: IRD ASCII Raw Data
D.13.1.2 IRD ASCII Raw Data: Report Detail
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-132
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.13.2 IRD ASCII Extended Raw Data Set
Report Function:
D.13.2.1 IRD ASCII Extended Raw Data Set: Sample Report
Appendix Report 65 IRD ASCII: IRD ASCII Extended RAW Data Set
D.13.2.2 IRD ASCII Extended Raw Data Set: Report Detail
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-133
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
ESAL
D.14.1 Total ESAL Class By Hour
Report Function:
Total ESAL: This report tabulates Hourly ESAL Totals data by ESAL class.
Reporting Interval: Hourly; over a 24 hour period for the specified date.
Includes: Total, Subtotal and summary calculations.
Data: Per Vehicle (Good Weight Vehicles).
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-134
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.14.1.1 Total ESAL Class By Hour: Sample Report
Appendix Report 66 ESAL: Total ESAL Class By Hour
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-135
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.14.1.2 Total ESAL Class By Hour: Report Detail
Column Heading Description
Classification Class Identifiers Interval Unit Hour
Total Row Total: Hourly Group Row Total: Every six (6) Hours Grand Total: Daily Total (All ESAL)
Row Counts Row Description
Per Hour Hourly ESAL Counts per Class Quarterly Subtotal Subtotal ESAL Counts every six (6) hours per Class Total Total Daily ESAL Count per Class Percent Total Daily Percentage per Class of Grand Total (All ESAL)
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-136
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.14.2 Max ESAL Weekday By Class
Report Function:
D.14.2.1 Max ESAL Weekday By Class: Sample Report
Appendix Report 67 ESAL: Max ESAL Weekday By Class
D.14.2.2 Max ESAL Weekday By Class: Report Detail
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-137
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
SAFETY SYSTEM
Report Function:
Safety System reports provide vehicle data statistics using vehicle weight ranges as the primary unit of analysis.
The reports in this section provide information that can be used to monitor the operation of electronic safety systems, such as rollover warning or downhill speed warning systems.
The two primary items reported are:
Sign Actvtd:sign activated ; the onsite system determined that action should be taken for a vehicle. The action taken is dependent on the type of safety system.
Sign Not Actvtd:sign not activated ; the onsite system determined that no action should be taken for a vehicle.
D.15.1 Safety System Site Summary
Report Function:
Number of Vehicles: This report tabulates Hourly Vehicle Count data by Peak Time.
Reporting Interval: Hourly; over a 24 hour period, for the specified date.
Includes: Total, Subtotal and Percentage calculations.
Complimentary Report: Class By Hour
Data: Per Vehicle (All Vehicles)
Provides an overview of the activity at the site for all selected vehicle classes.
This report contains the same information as the Site Summary Report with additional Safety system information.
D.15.1.1 Safety System Site Summary: Report Detail
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-138
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.15.1.2 Safety System Site Summary: Sample Report
Appendix Report 68 Safety System: Safety System Site Summary
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-139
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.15.2 Safety System Class By Hour
Report Function:
Number of Vehicles: This report tabulates Hourly Vehicle Count data by Peak Time.
Reporting Interval: Hourly; over a 24 hour period, for the specified date.
Includes: Total, Subtotal and Percentage calculations.
Complimentary Report: Class By Hour
Data: Per Vehicle (All Vehicles)
The Safety System Class by Hour report lists the counts of occurrences of the Sign Activated and Sign Not Activated states for each selected vehicle class over each hour of the day.
D.15.2.1 Safety System Class By Hour: Report Detail
Column Heading Description
Classification Vehicle Class Identifiers Interval Unit Hour
Total Row Total: Hourly Group Row Total: Every six (6) Hours Grand Total: Daily Total (All Vehicles)
Row Counts Row Description
Per Hour Hourly Vehicle Counts per Class Quarterly Subtotal Subtotal Vehicle Counts every six (6) hours per Class Total Total Daily Vehicle Count per Class Percent Total Daily Percentage per Class of Grand Total (All Vehicles)
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-140
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.15.2.2 Safety System Class By Hour: Sample Report Page 1
Appendix Report 69 Safety System: Safety System Class By Hour Page 1
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-141
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.15.2.3 Safety System Class By Hour: Sample Report Page 2
Appendix Report 70 Safety System: Safety System Class By Hour Page 2
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-142
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.15.3 Safety System Lane By Hour
Report Function:
Number of Vehicles: This report tabulates Hourly Vehicle Count data by Peak Time.
Reporting Interval: Hourly; over a 24 hour period, for the specified date.
Includes: Total, Subtotal and Percentage calculations.
Complimentary Report: Class By Hour
Data: Per Vehicle (All Vehicles)
The Safety System Lane by Hour report lists the counts of occurrences of the Sign Activated and Sign Not Activated states for each of the selected lanes over each hour of the day:
Note that this report is similar in layout and content to the Lane by Hour report, Appendix D.3.1, except that the columns are split into Sign Activated and Sign Not Activated for each lane.
D.15.3.1 Safety System Lane By Hour: Report Detail
Column Heading Description
Classification Vehicle Class Identifiers Interval Unit Hour
Total Row Total: Hourly Group Row Total: Every six (6) Hours Grand Total: Daily Total (All Vehicles)
Row Counts Row Description
Per Hour Hourly Vehicle Counts per Class Quarterly Subtotal Subtotal Vehicle Counts every six (6) hours per Class Total Total Daily Vehicle Count per Class Percent Total Daily Percentage per Class of Grand Total (All Vehicles)
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-143
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.15.3.2 Safety System Lane By Hour: Sample Report
Appendix Report 71 Safety System: Safety System Lane By Hour
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-144
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
ROAD CONDITION
Road Condition reports provide information useful in tracking and analyzing the road conditions of a given site. Report data is based on road condition status flags from vehicle external data items.
Road Condition reports provide vehicle data statistics using Road Condition Types as the primary unit of analysis.
D.16.1 Road Condition By Hour
Report Function:
Number of Vehicles: This report tabulates Hourly Vehicle Count data by Road Condition type.
Reporting Interval: Hourly; over a 24 hour period, for the specified date.
Includes: Total, Subtotal and Percentage calculations.
Data: Per Vehicle (All Non-Error Vehicles).
Displays a count of vehicles recorded per Hour for each road condition; as defined by the site reporting parameters.
D.16.1.1 Road Condition By Hour: Report Detail
Column Heading Description
Classification Road Condition Types Interval Unit Hour Bin Total Total number of Vehicles recorded for the Hour PV Total Total number of Vehicles recorded for the Hour Total Group Row Total: Every six (6) Hours
Grand Total: Daily Total (All Vehicles)
Row Counts Row Description
Hours Hourly Vehicle Counts per Condition Type Quarterly Subtotal Subtotal Vehicle Counts every six (6) hours per Condition Type Total Grand Total: Daily Total (All Vehicles) per Condition Type
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-145
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.16.1.2 Road Condition By Hour: Sample Report
Appendix Report 72 Road Condition: Road Condition By Hour
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-146
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.16.2 Road Condition By Weekday
Report Function:
Number of Vehicles: This report tabulates daily count data by road condition over each day of the week.
Reporting Interval: Hourly; over a 24 hour period, for the specified date.
Includes: Total, Subtotal and Percentage calculations.
Complimentary Report: Class By Hour
Data: Per Vehicle (All Non-Error Vehicles)
D.16.2.1 Road Condition By Weekday: Report Detail
Column Heading Description
Bin Total PV Total Total Number of Vehicles recorded for the Day Road Conditions Conditions ranging from Dry to Frost; Number of vehicles
recorded per Day per Condition. Measurement Unit Day
Row Counts Row Description
Weekday Sunday through Saturday; Daily Vehicle Total per Condition
Total Grand Total: for All Vehicles per Condition for the entire week
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-147
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.16.2.2 Road Condition By Weekday: Sample Report
Appendix Report 73 Road Condition: Road Condition By Weekday
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-148
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.16.3 Road Condition Percent By Hour
Report Function:
Number of Vehicles: This report tabulates the percentages of specific road condition occurrences over each hour of the day.
Reporting Interval: Hourly; over a 24 hour period, for the specified date.
Includes: Total, Subtotal and Percentage calculations.
Complimentary Report: Class By Hour
Data: Per Vehicle (All Non-Error Vehicles)
D.16.3.1 Road Condition Percent By Hour: Report Detail
Column Heading Description
Classification Road Condition Types Interval Unit Hour Bin Total Vehicle Count Percentage recorded for the Hour PV Total Vehicle Count Percentage recorded for the Hour Total Group Row Total Percentage: Every six (6) Hours
Grand Total: Daily Percentage (All Vehicles)
Row Counts Row Description
Hours Hourly Vehicle Count Percentage per Road Condition Type Quarterly Subtotal Subtotal Vehicle Count Percentage every six (6) hours per Road
Condition Type Total Grand Total: Daily Total (All Vehicles) per Condition Type
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-149
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.16.3.2 Road Condition Percent By Hour: Sample Report
Appendix Report 74 Road Condition: Road Condition Percent By Hour
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-150
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.16.4 Road Condition Percent By Weekday
Report Function:
Number of Vehicles: This report tabulates the percentages of specific road condition occurrences over each day of the week.
Reporting Interval: Hourly; over a 24 hour period, for the specified date.
Includes: Total, Subtotal and Percentage calculations.
Complimentary Report: Class By Hour
Data: Per Vehicle (All Non-Error Vehicles)
D.16.4.1 Road Condition Percent By Weekday: Report Detail
Column Heading Description
Bin Total
PV Total Total Percentage of Vehicle counts recorded for the Weekday: 100%
Road Conditions Conditions ranging from Dry to Frost; Percentage of Vehicle counts recorded per Weekday per Condition.
Measurement Unit Weekday
Row Counts Row Description
Weekdays Weekday Vehicle Count Percentages per Condition
D.16.4.2 Road Condition Percent By Weekday: Sample Report
Appendix Report 75 Road Condition: Road Condition Percent By Weekday
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-151
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.16.5 Road Condition Changes Summary
Report Function:
Number of Vehicles: This report that displays the road conditions and the time each has chnaged.
Reporting Interval: Hourly; over a 24 hour period, for the specified date.
Includes: Total, Subtotal and Percentage calculations.
Complimentary Report: Class By Hour
Data: Per Vehicle (All Non-Error Vehicles)
D.16.5.1 Road Condition Changes Summary: Report Detail
Column Heading Description
Text File Display
Row Display Row Description
Condition Change Date, Time and Condition
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-152
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.16.5.2 Road Condition Changes Summary: Sample Report
Appendix Report 76 Road Condition: Road Condition Changes Summary
Text File Contents
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-153
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.16.6 Road Condition Daily Summary
Report Function:
Number of Vehicles: This report tabulates Hourly Vehicle Count data during Slippery Road conditions.
Reporting Interval: Hourly; over a 24 hour period, for the specified date.
Includes: Total, Subtotal and Percentage calculations.
Complimentary Report: Class By Hour
Data: Per Vehicle (All Vehicles)
Lists the counts and percentages of vehicles during slippery road conditions over each hour; recorded for the site as defined by the reporting parameters.
Data in this report: Per Vehicle (All Non-Error Vehicles)
Road conditions that are considered slippery are controlled by the user configurable Column value setting in the Report Parameters Window:
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-154
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.16.6.1 Road Condition Daily Summary: Report Detail
Column Heading Description
Total Grand Total of All Vehicles per Hour Non-Slippery Number of Vehicles experiencing Non-Slippery Conditions per
Hour % Non-Slippery Percentage of Vehicles experiencing Non-Slippery Conditions
per Hour Slippery Number of Vehicles experiencing Slippery Conditions per Hour
% Non-Slippery Percentage of Vehicles experiencing Non-Slippery Conditions per Hour
Measurement Unit Hours
Row Counts Row Description
Hour Hourly Vehicle Counts
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-155
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.16.6.2 Road Condition Daily Summary: Sample Report
Appendix Report 77 Road Condition: Road Condition Daily Summary
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-156
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.16.7 Road Condition Monthly Summary
Report Function:
Number of Vehicles: This report displays monthly road conditions during each day of the month.
Reporting Interval: Hourly; over a 24 hour period, for the specified date.
Includes: Total, Subtotal and Percentage calculations.
Complimentary Report: Class By Hour
Data: Per Vehicle (All Vehicles)
Displays road conditions experienced each day of the month; recorded for the site as defined by the reporting parameters.
Data in this report: Per Vehicle (All Non-Error Vehicles)
D.16.7.1 Road Condition Monthly Summary: Report Detail
Column Heading Description
Road Conditions Conditions Ranging from Dry to Frost
Row Display Row Description
Month Day Charted display of Daily Road Conditions per date range.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-157
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.16.7.2 Road Condition Monthly Summary: Sample Report
Appendix Report 78 Road Condition: Road Condition Monthly Summary
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-158
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
EXTERNAL DATA ITEMS CSV
All reports follow the basic format of:
Vehicle Number
Lane
Year
Month
Day
Hour
Minutes
Seconds
([external data item: label, information] x number of relevant external data item types).
Vehicle records which do not have the relevant external data items will output with empty CSV columns.
For vehicle records which contain more than one set of relevant external data items (eg. a vehicle with two each of licence plate number, confidence, and jurisdiction), the vehicle record will be separated into multiple output lines, one for each set.
D.17.1 External Data Items CSV - License Plate Information
D.17.1.1 External Data Items CSV - License Plate Information: Report Detail
For the Licence Plate Information report, the appropriate external data item types that can be output are:
Name Label
License Plate Number LP_NUM
License Plate Number Confidence LP_CONF
License Plate Jurisdiction LP_JUR
License Plate Jurisdiction Confidence LP_JURCONF
Even for vehicles with the first three Licence Plate Information external data item types, it is common for nothing to exist (and therefore not be output) for Licence Plate Jurisdiction Confidence.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-159
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.17.1.2 External Data Items CSV - License Plate Information: Sample Report
Appendix Report 79 External Data Items CSV - License Plate Information Report
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-160
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.17.2 External Data Items CSV - Identifier Tags
D.17.2.1 External Data Items CSV - Identifier Tags: Report Detail
For the Identifier Tags report, the appropriate external data item types that can be output are:
Name Label
AVI AVI
Mark IV GRS TAG_M4
Hughes TAG_H
Amtech ATA TAG_AMA
Amtech IT2000 TAG_AMI
Identec TAG_IDENT
D.17.2.2 External Data Items CSV - Identifier Tags: Sample Report
Appendix Report 80 External Data Items CSV - Identifier Tags
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-161
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.17.3 External Data Items CSV - USDOT
D.17.3.1 External Data Items CSV - USDOT: Report Detail
For the USDOT Information report:
Name Label
USDOT Code USDOT
USDOT Code Confidence USDOT_CONF
D.17.3.2 External Data Items CSV - USDOT: Sample Report
Appendix Report 81 External Data items CSV – USDOT
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-162
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
CTWIM California class specific WIM reports are intended for use with the FHWA Classifications.
The iANALYZE measurement unit must be set to Kips (Ft) for these reports.
There is no Report Footer display on these reports.
CTWIM Report Notes:
Vehicle Weight Criteria Front Left Wheel >= 3 kips and <= 12 kips
Front Right Wheel >= 3 kips and <= 12 kips
Front Axle Weight >=3 kips
Only vehicles meeting the above weight criteria are included in the report data.
D.18.1 Lane By GVW Class 9
Report Function
The main report tabulates:
Number of Vehicles: Lane Vehicle Count, Lane Vehicle Count Percentage, and Average Lane Speed
By: GVW Range (FHWA Class 9)
for the user specified reporting period.
Reporting Unit: GVW Range (Kips).
Provides: Aggregate: Count Totals, Percentages, Average Speeds.
Data: Per Vehicle (Good Weight Vehicles). (and meeting the CTWIM Report Weight Criteria).
The summary report tabulates:
For each Lane Avg. GVW Average Gross Vehicle Weight.
Std Dev Standard Deviation of Avg. GVW.
Avg Axle 1 W Average Weight of the first Axle.
Std Dev Standard Deviation of the first Axle weight.
Application: Used in the statistical analysis of FHWA Class 9 Vehicles.
Notes: Ensure that Class Range selection is set to or includes Class 9.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-163
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.18.1.1 Lane By GVW Class 9: Report Detail
Column Definitions
Column Heading Description
GVW Range (Kips) Gross Vehicle Weight Ranges for Class 9 Vehicles
Lane Count Lane Vehicle Count per GVW range.
Lane % Lane Vehicle Count Percentage per GVW range: (Lane Count/ Total Lane Vehicle Count) * 100
Avg Spd Average Lane Speed per GVW range.
Count Total (All Lanes) Vehicle Count per GVW range.
% Total (All Lanes) Vehicle Count Percentage per GVW range: (Count/Total Count Vehicle Count) * 100
Avg Spd Average Lane Speed per GVW range.
Row Definitions
GVW Range (Kips) Row Description
Per GVW Range Lane Vehicle Count, Lane Vehicle Count Percentage, Average Lane Speed
(Row) Total(s) Total Lane Vehicle Count;
Total Lane Vehicle Count %: (Total Lane Vehicle Count/Total Count Vehicle Count) * 100;
Average Lane Speed (All Ranges);
Total Count Vehicle Count (All Ranges) (All Lanes);
Total %: 100%
Average Speed (All Ranges, All Lanes).
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-164
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.18.1.2 Lane By GVW Class 9: Sample Report
Appendix Report 82 CTWIM: Lane By GVW Class 9
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-165
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.18.2 Lane By GVW Class 11
Report Function
The main report tabulates:
Number of Vehicles: Lane Vehicle Count, Lane Vehicle Count Percentage, and Average Lane Speed
By: GVW Range (FHWA Class 11)
for the user specified reporting period.
Reporting Unit: GVW Range (Kips).
Provides: Aggregate: Count Totals, Percentages, Average Speeds.
Data: Per Vehicle (Good Weight Vehicles). (and meeting the CTWIM Report Weight Criteria).
The summary report tabulates:
For each Lane Avg. GVW Average Gross Vehicle Weight.
Std Dev Standard Deviation of Avg. GVW.
Avg Axle 1 W Average Weight of the first Axle.
Std Dev Standard Deviation of the first Axle weight.
Application: Used in the statistical analysis of FHWA Class 11 Vehicles.
Notes: Ensure that Class Range selection is set to or includes Class 11.
D.18.2.1 Lane By GVW Class 11: Report Detail
Column Definitions
Column Heading Description
GVW Range (Kips) Gross Vehicle Weight Ranges for Class 11 Vehicles
Lane Count Lane Vehicle Count per GVW range.
Lane % Lane Vehicle Count Percentage per GVW range: (Lane Count/ Total Lane Vehicle Count) * 100
Avg Spd Average Lane Speed per GVW range.
Count Total (All Lanes) Vehicle Count per GVW range.
% Total (All Lanes) Vehicle Count Percentage per GVW range: (Count/Total Count Vehicle Count) * 100
Avg Spd Average Lane Speed per GVW range.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-166
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Row Definitions
GVW Range (Kips) Row Description
Per GVW Range Lane Vehicle Count, Lane Vehicle Count Percentage, Average Lane Speed
(Row) Total(s) Total Lane Vehicle Count;
Total Lane Vehicle Count %: (Total Lane Vehicle Count/Total Count Vehicle Count) * 100;
Average Lane Speed (All Ranges);
Total Count Vehicle Count (All Ranges) (All Lanes);
Total %: 100%
Average Speed (All Ranges, All Lanes).
D.18.2.1 Lane By GVW Class 11: Sample Report
Appendix Report 83 CTWIM: Lane By GVW Class 11
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-167
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.18.3 Lane By GVW Class 14
Report Function
The main report tabulates:
Number of Vehicles: Lane Vehicle Count, Lane Vehicle Count Percentage, and Average Lane Speed
By: GVW Range (FHWA Class 14)
for the user specified reporting period.
Reporting Unit: GVW Range (Kips).
Provides: Aggregate: Count Totals, Percentages, Average Speeds.
Data: Per Vehicle (Good Weight Vehicles). (and meeting the CTWIM Report Weight Criteria).
The summary report tabulates:
For each Lane Avg. GVW Average Gross Vehicle Weight.
Std Dev Standard Deviation of Avg. GVW.
Avg Axle 1 W Average Weight of the first Axle.
Std Dev Standard Deviation of the first Axle weight.
Application: Used in the statistical analysis of FHWA Class 14 Vehicles.
Notes: Ensure that Class Range selection is set to or includes Class 14.
D.18.3.1 Lane By GVW Class 14: Report Detail
Column Definitions
Column Heading Description
GVW Range (Kips) Gross Vehicle Weight Ranges for Class 14 Vehicles
Lane Count Lane Vehicle Count per GVW range.
Lane % Lane Vehicle Count Percentage per GVW range: (Lane Count/ Total Lane Vehicle Count) * 100
Avg Spd Average Lane Speed per GVW range.
Count Total (All Lanes) Vehicle Count per GVW range.
% Total (All Lanes) Vehicle Count Percentage per GVW range: (Count/Total Count Vehicle Count) * 100
Avg Spd Average Lane Speed per GVW range.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-168
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Row Definitions
GVW Range (Kips) Row Description
Per GVW Range Lane Vehicle Count, Lane Vehicle Count Percentage, Average Lane Speed
(Row) Total(s) Total Lane Vehicle Count;
Total Lane Vehicle Count %: (Total Lane Vehicle Count/Total Count Vehicle Count) * 100;
Average Lane Speed (All Ranges);
Total Count Vehicle Count (All Ranges) (All Lanes);
Total %: 100%
Average Speed (All Ranges, All Lanes).
D.18.3.2 Lane By GVW Class 14: Sample Report
Appendix Report 84 CTWIM: Lane By GVW Class 14
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-169
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.18.4 Average Weights & Spacings By Speed Class 9
Report Function
This report tabulates:
For FHWA Class 9 Vehicles
Weight(kips): Vehicle Axle Weights (kips) and GVW
Count: Vehicle Counts, Overweight Vehicle Counts and Overweight Vehicle Count Percentage
Spacing(ft): Tractor and Trailer Tandem Axle Spacings
By: Speed Range
for the user specified reporting period.
Reporting Unit: Speed Range (mph).
Provides: Aggregate: Count Totals, Percentages, Averages, Standard Deviations.
Data: Per Vehicle (Good Weight Vehicles). (and meeting the CTWIM Report Weight Criteria).
Application: Used in the statistical analysis of FHWA Class 9 Vehicles.
Notes: Ensure that Class Range selection is set to or includes Class 9.
D.18.4.1 Average Weights & Spacings By Speed, Class 9: Report Detail
Overweight: Refers to a vehicle with an Overweight WIM Status Condition.
Column Definitions
Column Heading Description
Speed (mph) Speed Interval Ranges.
Weight(kips)
Axle 1 Left Wheel Weight of first Left Wheel Axle per Speed Range.
Axle 1 Right Wheel Weight of first Right Wheel Axle per Speed Range.
Steer Axle Weight of Steer Axle (combined 1st axle wheel weights) per Speed Range.
Tractor Tandem Axles Combined Weight of 2nd and 3rd axles per Speed Range.
Trailer Tandem Axles Combined Weight of 4th and 5th axles per Speed Range.
GVW Gross Vehicle Weight per Speed Range.
Count
Total Vehicle Count per Speed Range.
Overweight Overweight Vehicle Count per Speed Range.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-170
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Column Heading Description
% Overweight Overweight Vehicle Count % per Speed Range: (Overweight Vehicle Count/Total Overweight Vehicle Count) * 100;
Spacings(ft)
Tractor Tandem Axles Spacing between 2nd and 3rd axles, per Speed Range.
Trailer Tandem Axles Spacing between 4th and 5th axles, per Speed Range.
Row Definitions
Speed (mph) Row Description
Per Speed Range Vehicle Weights; Vehicle Counts; Overweight Vehicle Counts and Percentages; Tandem Axle Spacings.
(Row) Avg.(s) Average Weights (Over All Speeds);
Total Vehicle Count (Over All Speeds);
Total Overweight Vehicle Count (Over All Speeds);
Average Overweight Vehicle Count %: (Overweight Vehicle Count/Total Overweight Vehicle Count) * 100)/ Number of Speed Ranges;
Average Spacings (Over All Speeds).
(Row) Std Dev.(s) Standard Weight Deviations (Over All Speeds);
Standard Spacing Deviations (Over All Speeds).
D.18.4.1 Average Weights & Spacings By Speed Class 9: Sample Report
Appendix Report 85 CTWIM: Avg Weights & Spacings By Speed Class 9
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-171
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.18.5 Average Weights & Lengths By Speed Class 11
Report Function
This report tabulates:
For FHWA Class 11 Vehicles
Weight(kips): Vehicle Weights (kips) and GVW
Count: Vehicle Counts, Overweight Vehicle Counts and Overweight Vehicle Count Percentage
Lengths(ft): Vehicle Length and Wheel Base
By: Speed Range
for the user specified reporting period.
Reporting Unit: Speed Range (mph).
Provides: Aggregate: Count Totals, Percentages, Averages, Standard Deviations.
Data: Per Vehicle (Good Weight Vehicles). (and meeting the CTWIM Report Weight Criteria).
Application: Used in the statistical analysis of FHWA Class 11 Vehicles.
Notes: Ensure that Class Range selection is set to or includes Class 11.
D.18.5.1 Average Weights & Lengths By Speed Class 11: Report Detail
Overweight: Refers to a vehicle with an Overweight WIM Status Condition.
Column Definitions
Column Heading Description
Speed (mph) Speed Interval Ranges.
Weight(kips)
Axle 1 Left Wheel Weight of first Left Wheel Axle per Speed Range.
Axle 1 Right Wheel Weight of first Right Wheel Axle per Speed Range.
Steer Axle Weight of Steer Axle (combined 1st axle wheel weights) per Speed Range.
Tractor Tandem Axles Combined Weight of 2nd and 3rd axles per Speed Range.
Trailer Tandem Axles Combined Weight of 4th and 5th axles per Speed Range.
GVW Gross Vehicle Weight per Speed Range.
Count
Total Vehicle Count per Speed Range.
Overweight Overweight Vehicle Count per Speed Range.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-172
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Column Heading Description
% Overweight Overweight Vehicle Count % per Speed Range: (Overweight Vehicle Count/Total Overweight Vehicle Count) *100;
Lengths(ft)
Vehicle Length Vehicle Length per Speed Range.
Wheel Base Vehicle Wheel Base (combined total of axle spacings), per Speed Range.
Row Definitions
Speed (mph) Row Description
Per Speed Range Vehicle Weights; Vehicle Counts; Overweight Vehicle Counts and Percentages; Vehicle Length and Wheel Base.
(Row) Avg.(s) Average Weights (Over All Speeds);
Total Vehicle Count (Over All Speeds);
Total Overweight Vehicle Count (Over All Speeds);
Average Overweight Vehicle Count %: (Overweight Vehicle Count/Total Overweight Vehicle Count) * 100)/ Number of Speed Ranges;
Average Lengths (Over All Speeds).
(Row) Std Dev.(s) Standard Weight Deviations (Over All Speeds);
Standard Length Deviations (Over All Speeds).
D.18.5.2 Average Weights & Lengths By Speed Class 11: Sample Report
Appendix Report 86 CTWIM: Avg Weights & Lengths By Speed Class 11
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-173
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.18.6 Average Weights & Lengths By Speed Class 14
Report Function
This report tabulates:
For FHWA Class 14 Vehicles
Weight(kips): Vehicle Weights (kips) and GVW
Count: Vehicle Counts, Overweight Vehicle Counts and Overweight Vehicle Count Percentage
Lengths(ft): Vehicle Length and Wheel Base
By: Speed Range
for the user specified reporting period.
Reporting Unit: Speed Range (mph).
Provides: Aggregate: Count Totals, Percentages, Averages, Standard Deviations.
Data: Per Vehicle (Good Weight Vehicles). (and meeting the CTWIM Report Weight Criteria).
Application: Used in the statistical analysis of FHWA Class 14 Vehicles.
Notes: Ensure that Class Range selection is set to or includes Class 14.
D.18.6.1 Average Weights & Lengths By Speed Class: Report Detail
Overweight: Refers to a vehicle with an Overweight WIM Status Condition.
Column Definitions
Column Heading Description
Speed (mph) Speed Interval Ranges.
Weight(kips)
Axle 1 Left Wheel Weight of first Left Wheel Axle per Speed Range.
Axle 1 Right Wheel Weight of first Right Wheel Axle per Speed Range.
Steer Axle Weight of Steer Axle (combined 1st axle wheel weights) per Speed Range.
Tractor Tandem Axles Combined Weight of 2nd and 3rd axles per Speed Range.
Trailer Tandem Axles Combined Weight of 4th and 5th axles per Speed Range.
GVW Gross Vehicle Weight per Speed Range.
Count
Total Vehicle Count per Speed Range.
Overweight Overweight Vehicle Count per Speed Range.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-174
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Column Heading Description
% Overweight Overweight Vehicle Count % per Speed Range: (Overweight Vehicle Count/Total Overweight Vehicle Count) *100;
Lengths(ft)
Vehicle Length Vehicle Length per Speed Range.
Wheel Base Vehicle Wheel Base (combined total of axle spacings) per Speed Range.
Row Definitions
Speed (mph) Row Description
Per Speed Range Vehicle Weights; Vehicle Counts; Overweight Vehicle Counts and Percentages; Vehicle Length and Wheel Base.
(Row) Avg.(s) Average Weights (Over All Speeds);
Total Vehicle Count (Over All Speeds);
Total Overweight Vehicle Count (Over All Speeds);
Average Overweight Vehicle Count %: (Overweight Vehicle Count/Total Overweight Vehicle Count) * 100)/ Number of Speed Ranges;
Average Lengths (Over All Speeds).
(Row) Std Dev.(s) Standard Weight Deviations (Over All Speeds);
Standard Length Deviations (Over All Speeds).
D.18.6.2 Average Weights & Lengths By Speed Class 14: Sample Report
Appendix Report 87 CTWIM: Avg Weights & Lengths By Speed Class 14
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-175
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
OTHER
D.19.1 Average Temperature By Hour
A temperature sensor must be installed on site to supply requisite data for this report.
Report Function:
Avg Temp Per Hour: This report displays Average Hourly Temperatures for the day.
Reporting Interval: Hourly; over a 24 hour period, for the specified date.
Includes: N/A.
Data: Per Vehicle (All Vehicles)
D.19.1.1 Average Temperature By Hour: Report Detail
Column Definitions
Column Heading Description
Avg Temp Average Temperature
Hour Hour; over a 24 Hour Period
Row Definitions
Row Counts Row Description
Per Hour Average Temperature per Hour
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-176
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.19.1.2 Average Temperature By Hour: Sample Report
Appendix Report 88 Other: Average Temperature By Hour
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-177
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.19.2 Autocalibration
Report Function:
Number of Vehicles: This report tabulates Hourly Vehicle Count data by Peak Time.
Reporting Interval: Hourly; over a 24 hour period, for the specified date.
Includes: Total, Subtotal and Percentage calculations.
Complimentary Report: Class By Hour
Data: Per Vehicle (All Vehicles)
For each lane, a count of the number of calibration class vehicles for each sub-range, the average front axle weight, standard deviation and percent standard deviation. Uses weight good vehicles of the autocalibration vehicle type.
Please refer to the Software Users Manual, IRD Weigh in Motion Data Collection System, Version 7.5.0, Rev. E, Section 6.7 for a detailed explanation of autocalibration and how it works.
D.19.2.1 Autocalibration: Report Detail
Report columns are:
GVW range – for each lane there is a GVW range as listed below in the report rows.
count of autocalibration vehicles (typically a specified type of class 9 vehicles)
average front axle weight of specified type of vehicles
standard deviation of the front axle weight of specified type of vehicles
% Std – std / avg * 100 Report rows are:
lane
< 32 Kips
32 – 70 Kips
> 70 Kips
The GVW ranges can be adjusted in the Report Parameters window.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-178
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.19.2.2 Autocalibration: Sample Report
Appendix Report 89 Other: Autocalibration
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-179
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.19.3 WIM Error By Class - CVO
Report Function:
This report calculates: Average time for a vehicle on the static scale; and Calculates differences between WIM and static scale weights during the specified reporting period.
Reporting Interval: As per the specified date range.
Includes: Average, Standard Deviation and Percentage calculations.
Complimentary Report:
Data: Per Vehicle (All Non-Error Vehicles)
D.19.3.1 WIM Error By Class - CVO: Sample Report
Appendix Report 90 Other: WIM Error By Class – CVO
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-180
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.19.3.2 WIM Error By Class - CVO: Report Detail
Provides a count of WIM Errors occurring per vehicle Class.
Error for each selected class of vehicle is displayed by type of axle grouping (steer, single, tandem, tridem and quadrem) and for GVW, listed as average percent error between WIM and static scale weights and as percentage of WIM weights that are more than two standard deviations from static scale weights.
To produce this report, the site data must contain static scale weights. The site configuration (section 7) Lane information must specify a static scale lane by includingSS (case sensitive) or the wordscale (not case sensitive) in the Name of the lane:
In the Report Wizard (section 6.1.3) Lane Grouping must be set toSeparate and the static scale lane must be selected:
If any of the above three requirements are not met, a warning message will be displayed stating that information in the report should be disregarded.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-181
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.19.4 PRN Speed By Class
Report Function:
The PRN Speed by Class report is used to convert per vehicle data from any iANALYZE input data file into a standard PRN Speed By Class data file.
iANALYZE Report Display:
FHWA Output Filename Syntax:
<D><MM><DD><nnn>.PRN
Where:
<D> D Prefix; 1 letter
<MM> Month; 2 digits
<DD> Day; 2 digits
<NN> 2 digits; and
.PRN Represents the 3 letter Printer report format extension.
D.19.4.1 PRN Speed By Class: Sample Report
Appendix Report 91 Other Reports: PRN Speed By Class
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-182
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.19.4.2 PRN Speed By Class: Report Detail
Lane Direction Codes: 0 – North; 1 – East; 2 – South; 3 – West
The table below describes the default .PRN format:
RECORD 1 CHARACTERS
STATION # 1-12
BUFFER 13
ID # 14-25
BUFFER 26
UNIT ID 27-28
BUFFER 29
START TIME 30-33
BUFFER 34
START DATE 35-40
BUFFER 41
END TIME 42-45
BUFFER 46
END DATE 47-52
BUFFER 53
MAIN INTERVAL 54-57
BUFFER 58
LANE LAYOUT 59-60
BUFFER 61
TOTAL LANES 62
BUFFER 63
RATIO 64-66
BUFFER 67-70
# OF RECORDS 71-75
FORMAT CODE 76-78
BUFFER 79-88
CR/LF 89-90
RECORD 2 CHARACTERS
PEAK 1 ST TIME 1-4
BUFFER 5
PEAK 1 ED TIME 6-9
BUFFER 10
PEAK 1 INTV 11-14
BUFFER 15
PEAK 2 ST TIME 16-19
BUFFER 20
PEAK 2 ED TIME 21-24
BUFFER 25
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-183
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
PEAK 2 INTV 26-29
BUFFER 30
PEAK 3 ST TIME 31-34
BUFFER 35
PEAK 3 ED TIME 36-39
BUFFER 40
PEAK 3 INTV 41-44
BUFFER 45
DIR CODES 46-53
BUFFER 54-88
CR/LF 89-90
RECORD 3 CHARACTERS
(‘) APOSTROPHE 1
CITY 2-21
(‘) APOSTROPHE 22
COUNTY 23-42
(‘) APOSTROPHE 43
LOCATION 44-83
BUFFER 84-88
CR/LF 89-90
RECORDS 4 to 6 CHARACTERS
BIN DATA TYPE 1-2
BUFFER 3
NUMBER OF BINS 4-5
BUFFER 6-13
BIN 1 LIMIT 14-17
BUFFER 18
BIN 2 LIMIT 19-22
BUFFER 23
BIN 3 LIMIT 24-27
BUFFER 28
BIN 4 LIMIT 29-32
BUFFER 33
BIN 5 LIMIT 34-37
BUFFER 38
BIN 6 LIMIT 39-42
BUFFER 43
BIN 7 LIMIT 44-47
BUFFER 48
BIN 8 LIMIT 49-52
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-184
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
BUFFER 53
BIN 9 LIMIT 54-57
BUFFER 58
BIN 10 LIMIT 59-62
BUFFER 63
BIN 11 LIMIT 64-67
BUFFER 68
BIN 12 LIMIT 69-72
BUFFER 73
BIN 13 LIMIT 74-77
BUFFER 78
BIN 14 LIMIT 79-82
BUFFER 83
BIN 15 LIMIT 84-87
BUFFER 88
CR/LF 89-90
DATA RECORDS CHARACTERS
SEC BIN # 1-2
BUFFER 3
ROW BIN # 4-5
BUFFER 6
DIRECTION 7
BUFFER 8
END INTV TIME 9-12
BIN 1 DATA 14-17
BUFFER 18
BIN 2 DATA 19-22
BUFFER 23
BIN 3 DATA 24-27
BUFFER 28
BIN 4 DATA 29-32
BUFFER 33
BIN 5 DATA 34-37
BUFFER 38
BIN 6 DATA 39-42
BUFFER 43
BIN 7 DATA 44-47
BUFFER 48
BIN 8 DATA 49-52
BUFFER 53
BIN 9 DATA 54-57
BUFFER 58
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-185
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
BIN 10 DATA 59-62
BUFFER 63
BIN 11 DATA 64-67
BUFFER 68
BIN 12 DATA 69-72
BUFFER 73
BIN 13 DATA 74-77
BUFFER 78
BIN 14 DATA 79-82
BUFFER 83
BIN 15 DATA 84-87
BUFFER 88
CR/LF 89-90
NOTES:
Direction codes are controlled by the definitions the user creates in Road Reporter
LANE LAYOUT
00 = ONE TUBE/PIEZO
01 = ONE LOOP
02 = TWO TUBE/PEIZO
03 = TWO TUBE/PIEZO WITH ONE LOOP
04 = TWO LOOPS
05 = TWO LOOPS WITH ONE TUBE/PIEZO
FORMAT CODE
DIGIT 1 = LANE CODE
DIGIT 2 = 0 FOR PIEZO, 1 FOR NO PIEZO
DIGIT 3 = 0 FOR IMPERIAL, 1 FOR METRIC
DATA TYPE
01 = LANE
02 = CLASSIFICATION
03 = SPEED
04 = HEADWAY
05 = GAP
06 = LENGTH
07 = PVR
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-186
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.19.5 ASTM 1318 Type I WIM Compliance
The ASTM WIM Compliance reports shows the accuracy of the WIM weights and compared to the static scale weights for the specified report period.
The ASTM WIM Compliance reports display the count of the total number of weights, the percent of compliant weights and an explicit Pass/Fail for each weight type (Single Axle Weight, Axle Group Weight, and GVW) as well as the total number of vehicles used.
These reports use the following WIM accuracies taken from the ASTM E1318-09 standard.
Type I Type II Type III
Single Axle +/- 20% +/- 30% +/- 15%
Axle Group +/- 15% +/- 20% +/- 10%
GVW +/- 10% +/- 15% +/- 6%
To produce this report, the site data must contain static scale weights. The site configuration (section 7) Lane information must specify a static scale lane by including SS (case sensitive) or the wordscale (not case sensitive) in the Name of the lane.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-187
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
In the Report Wizard (section 6.1.3) Lane Grouping must be set toSeparate and the static scale lane must be selected:
If any of the above three requirements are not met, a warning message will be displayed stating that information in the report should be disregarded.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-188
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.19.5.1 ASTM 1318 Type I WIM Compliance: Report Detail
D.19.5.2 ASTM 1318 Type I WIM Compliance: Sample Report
Appendix Report 92 Other: ASTM 1318 Type I WIM Compliance
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-189
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.19.6 ASTM 1318 Type II WIM Compliance
D.19.6.1 ASTM 1318 Type II WIM Compliance: Report Detail
D.19.6.2 ASTM 1318 Type II WIM Compliance: Sample Report
Appendix Report 93 Other: ASTM 1318 Type II WIM Compliance
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-190
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.19.7 ASTM 1318 Type III WIM Compliance
D.19.7.1 ASTM 1318 Type III WIM Compliance: Report Detail
D.19.7.2 ASTM 1318 Type III WIM Compliance: Sample Report
Appendix Report 94 Other: ASTM 1318 Type III WIM Compliance
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX D IANALYZE REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE D-191
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
D.19.8 Customizable WIM Compliance
This report is similar to the ASTM reports (Appendix A.14.5).
However, this report has the following WIM accuracies as default values.
Single Axle +/- 10%
Axle Group +/- 6%
GVW +/- 4%
These values are configurable in the Report Parameters Window
D.19.8.1 Customizable WIM Compliance: Report Detail
D.19.8.2 Customizable WIM Compliance: Sample Report
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX E CUSTOM REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE E-1
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Appendix E CUSTOM REPORTS
CUSTOM
Custom reports provide vehicle data statistics with variations of and additions to standard report formats.
Reference will be made to the supporting report format.
Ensure that the appropriate unit is selected (imperial or metric) for the specified range parameters.
E.1.1 Custom: TRIPS - 200
Report Function:
The custom TRIPS (Transport Improvement Planning System) report provides a specialized lane count report in which 15 WIM Axle Weight classes are compressed into four (4) bins.
This report cannot be generated with Binned data.
Data Filter: Must be set to Hour (warning message will be generated).
Data: Per Vehicle (All Vehicles).
iANALYZE Report Display: Linked Report Directory.
Report Filename: TRIPS.<sID>
Where <sID> is the Site ID configured in the Site Editor.
E.1.1.1 Custom: TRIPS - 200; Sample Report
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX E CUSTOM REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE E-2
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Appendix Report 95 Custom: TRIPS - 200 Report
E.1.1.2 Custom: TRIPS - 200; Report Detail
Report Detail Description
Report Header
*BEGIN 90 <sID>000 0060 2 *AXLES 1 2 3 4 AXLE #
Report Footer
*AXLES 1 2 3 4 AXLE # *END 90 <sID>000 0060 2 Site Identification: rcs
Date Range/Time: 150715 2015, July 15
0100, 2400 12 AM - 12 PM
Lanes: 6
Each hourly block (row) of data consists of:
Date YYMMDD format
Time 24 hour format (0100 to 2400)
Vehicle Counts for each enabled lane (includes 4 vehicle count bins)
Bin1 Classes 0 to 3; and 15 (special class).
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX E CUSTOM REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE E-3
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Generated from either data summary or vehicle record data as determined by reporting parameters selection.
Bin2 Classes 4 to 7.
Generated from vehicle record file data.
Bin3 Classes 8 to 10.
Generated from vehicle record file data.
Bin4 Classes 11 to 14.
Generated from vehicle record file data.
Axle Count Total Number of Axles divided by 2.
Error vehicles without defined axles assumed to have two axles.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX E CUSTOM REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE E-4
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
E.1.2 Custom: PVR (Per Vehicle Record) - 201
Report Function:
This custom PVR generates an CSV listing of vehicle data records and captures the following as individual records:
Vehicle Classification; and Vehicle Weight data.
Supporting Report: TMG 2013 Detailed Per Vehicle Report
See Appendix D.9.1.2 TMG 2013 Detailed Per Vehicle Report.
Data: Per Vehicle (All Vehicles).
iANALYZE Report Display: Linked Report Directory.
Report Filename:
<SS><YY>[<sID].CSV
Where: <SS> State Code; 2 characters. <YY> Year; Last 2 digits. [<sID>] Optional Site ID.
CSV File Type Extension.
E.1.2.1 Custom: PVR (Per Vehicle Record) - 201; Sample Report
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX E CUSTOM REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE E-5
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Appendix Report 96 Custom: PVR (Per Vehicle Record) - 201 Report
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX E CUSTOM REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE E-6
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
E.1.2.2 Custom: PVR (Per Vehicle Record) - 201; Report Detail
Field and Format Description
Field Description
Record Type
FIPS State Code
Station ID
1 Direction of Travel Code
2 Lane of Travel
3 Year of Data
4 Month of Data
5 Day of Data
6 Day of Week
7 Hour
8 Minute
9 Second
10 Total Weight
11 Total Length (bumper to bumper)
12 Vehicle Speed
13 Vehicle Classification
14 Number of Axles
15 Axles 1-2 Spacing
16 Axles 2-3 Spacing
17 Axles 3-4 Spacing
18 Axles 4-5 Spacing
19 Axles 5-6 Spacing
20 Axles 6-7 Spacing
21 Axles 7-8 Spacing
22 Axles 8-9 Spacing
23 Axles 9-10 Spacing
24 Axles 10-11 Spacing
25 Axles 11-12 Spacing
25+
Appendix Table 13 Individual Vehicle Record (C Variant) Detail
For an in-depth detailed explanation of the Individual Vehicle Record formats refer to the FHWA Traffic Monitoring Guide, 2013 Edition Section 7.7 Detailed Per Vehicle Format (PVF).
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX E CUSTOM REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE E-7
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
E.1.3 Custom: Vehicle Classification - 202
Report Function:
The Vehicle Classification report captures hourly traffic volume by vehicle class.
All lanes in one direction should have the same data being collected.
Report data is separated into Lanes.
Supporting Report: FHWA: TMG 2013 Vehicle Classification.
Format: Variable Length Record.
iAnalyze Report Display: Linked Report Directory.
Output File Name Syntax:
4<sID><mm><dd>.<yy>
Where: <sID> Site Identifier <mm> Month; 2 digits <dd > Day; 2 digits; and
File Extension:
<yy> Year; Last 2 digits.
E.1.3.1 Custom: Vehicle Classification - 202; Sample Report
Appendix Report 97 Custom: Vehicle Classification Report - 202
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX E CUSTOM REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE E-8
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
E.1.3.2 Custom: Vehicle Classification - 202; Report Detail
Field and Format Description
Record Type: C Classification Record
Field Columns Width Description Type
1 1 1 Record Type C
2 2-3 2 FIPS State Code C
3 4-9 6 Station ID C
4 10 1 Direction of Travel Code C
5 11 1 Lane of Travel C
6 12-15 4 Year of Data C
7 16-17 2 Month of Data C
8 18-19 2 Day of Data C
9 20-21 2 Hour of Data C
10 22 1 Classification Data Time Interval O
11 23-27 5 Total Interval Volume C
12 28 1 Restrictions C
13 29-33 5 Class 1 Count C
14 34-38 5 Class 2 Count C
15 39-43 5 Class 3 Count C/O
16 44-48 5 Class 4 Count C/O
17 49-53 5 Class 5 Count C/O
18 54-58 5 Class 6 Count C/O
19 59-63 5 Class 7 Count C/O
20 64-68 5 Class 8 Count C/O
21 69-73 5 Class 9 Count C/O
22 74-78 5 Class 10 Count C/O
23 79-83 5 Class 11 Count C/O
24 84-88 5 Class 12 Count C/O
25 89-93 5 Class 13 Count C/O
Appendix Table 14 Custom: Vehicle Classification Record - 202 (C Variant) Detail
For an in-depth detailed explanation of the Vehicle Classification Record format refer to the FHWA Traffic Monitoring Guide, 2013 Edition Section 7.5 Vehicle Classification Data Format.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX E CUSTOM REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE E-9
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
E.1.4 Custom: Truck Weight - 203
Report Function:
The Weight Data report captures vehicle axle weights and axle spacings, one record for each vehicle.
Class Range user specified; Filtering allowed below class 4.
Report data is separated into lanes.
Supporting Report: TMG 2013 Truck Weight Report
Output File Name Syntax:
7<sID><mm><dd>.<yy>
Where: <sID> Site Identifier <mm> Month; 2 digits <dd> Day; 2 digits; and
File Extension:
<yy> Year; Last 2 digits.
E.1.4.1 Custom: Truck Weight - 203: Sample Report
Appendix Report 98 Custom: Truck Weight Report - 203
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX E CUSTOM REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE E-10
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
E.1.4.2 Custom: Truck Weight - 203; Report Detail
Field and Format Description
Record Type: W Weight Record
Field Columns Width Description Type
1 1 1 Record Type C
2 2-3 2 FIPS State Code C
3 4-9 6 Station ID C
4 10 1 Direction of Travel Code C
5 11 1 Lane of Travel C
6 12-15 4 Year of Data C
7 16-17 2 Month of Data C
8 18-19 2 Day of Data C
9 20-21 2 Hour of Data C
10 22-23 2 Vehicle Class C
11 24-26 3 Open O
12 27-32 6 Total Weight of Vehicle C
13 33-34 2 Number of Axles C
14 35-39 5 Axle Weight 1 C
15 40-43 4 Axles 1-2 Spacing C
16 44-48 5 Axle Weight 2 C
17 49-52 4 Axles 2-3 Spacing C/O
18 53-57 5 Axle Weight 3 C/O
19 58-61 4 Axles 3-4 Spacing C/O
20 62-66 5 Axle Weight 4 C/O
21 67-70 4 Axles 4-5 Spacing C/O
22 71-75 5 Axle Weight 5 C/O
23 76-79 4 Axles 5-6 Spacing C/O
24 80-84 5 Axle Weight 6 C/O
25 85-88 4 Axles 6-7 Spacing C/O
26 89-93 5 Axle Weight 7 C/O
27 94-97 4 Axles 7-8 Spacing C/O
28 98-102 5 Axle Weight 8 C/O
29 103-106 4 Axles 8-9 Spacing C/O
30 107-111 5 Axle Weight 9 C/O
31 112-115 4 Axles 9-10 Spacing C/O
32 116-120 5 Axle Weight 10 C/O
33 121-124 4 Axles 10-11 Spacing C/O
34 125-129 5 Axle Weight 11 C/O
35 130-133 4 Axles 11-12 Spacing C/O
36 134-138 5 Axle Weight 12 C/O
Appendix Table 15 Custom Truck Weight - 203 Record Detail
For an in-depth detailed explanation of the Individual Vehicle Record formats refer to the FHWA Traffic Monitoring Guide, 2013 Edition Section 7.7 Detailed Per Vehicle Format (PVF).
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX E CUSTOM REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE E-11
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
E.1.5 Custom: Traffic Volume - 204
Report Function:
The Hourly Traffic Volume report captures hourly traffic volume for each calendar day in the specified range.
The Traffic Volume file contains one record for each day of traffic monitoring.
All lanes in one direction should have the same data being collected.
Report Data is separated into Lanes.
Supporting Report: FHWA: TMG 2013 Traffic Volume.
Format: Fixed Record Length, Fixed Width Field.
All numeric fields should be right-justified and zero-filled.
iAnalyze Report Display: Linked Report Directory.
Output File Name Syntax:
3<sID><mm><dd>.<yy>
Where: <sID> Site Identifier. <mm> Month; 2 digits. <dd > Day; 2 digits; and
File Extension:
<yy> Year; Last 2 digits.
E.1.5.1 Custom: Traffic Volume-204; Sample Report
Appendix Report 99 Custom: Traffic Volume Report - 204
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX E CUSTOM REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE E-12
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
E.1.5.2 Custom: Traffic Volume - 204; Report Detail
Field and Format Description
Record Type: 3 # 3 Record
Field Columns Width Description Type
1 1 1 Record Type C
2 2-3 2 FIPS State Code C
3 4-5 2 Functional Classification C
4 6-11 6 Station Identification C
5 12 1 Direction of Travel C
6 13 1 Lane of Travel C
7 14-17 4 Year of Data C
8 18-19 2 Month of Data C
9 20-21 2 Day of Data C
10 22 1 Day of Week C
11 23-27 5 Traffic Volume Counted, after 00:00 – to 01:00 O
12 28-32 5 Traffic Volume Counted, after 01:00 – to 02:00 O
13 33-37 5 Traffic Volume Counted, after 02:00 – to 03:00 O
14 38-42 5 Traffic Volume Counted, after 03:00 – to 04:00 O
15 43-47 5 Traffic Volume Counted, after 04:00 – to 05:00 O
16 48-52 5 Traffic Volume Counted, after 05:00 - to 06:00 O
17 53-57 5 Traffic Volume Counted, after 06:00 – to 07:00 O
18 58-62 5 Traffic Volume Counted, after 07:00 – to 08:00 O
19 63-67 5 Traffic Volume Counted, after 08:00 – to 09:00 O
20 68-72 5 Traffic Volume Counted, after 09:00 – to 10:00 O
21 73-77 5 Traffic Volume Counted, after 10:00 – to 11:00 O
22 78-82 5 Traffic Volume Counted, after 11:00 – to 12:00 O
23 83-87 5 Traffic Volume Counted, after 12:00 - to 13:00 O
24 88-92 5 Traffic Volume Counted, after 13:00 – to 14:00 O
25 93-97 5 Traffic Volume Counted, after 14:00 – to 15:00 O
26 98-102 5 Traffic Volume Counted, after 15:00 – to 16:00 O
27 103-107 5 Traffic Volume Counted, after 16:00 – to 17:00 O
28 108-112 5 Traffic Volume Counted, after 17:00 – to 18:00 O
29 113-117 5 Traffic Volume Counted, after 18:00 - to 19:00 O
30 118-122 5 Traffic Volume Counted, after 19:00 – to 20:00 O
31 123-127 5 Traffic Volume Counted, after 20:00 – to 21:00 O
32 128-132 5 Traffic Volume Counted, after 21:00 – to 22:00 O
33 133-137 5 Traffic Volume Counted, after 22:00 – to 23:00 O
34 138-142 5 Traffic Volume Counted, after 23:00 – to 24:00 O
35 143 1 Restrictions C
Appendix Table 16 Custom Traffic Volume - 204 Record Detail
For an in-depth detailed explanation of the Hourly Traffic Volume Record format refer to the FHWA Traffic Monitoring Guide, 2001 Edition Section 6.3 Traffic Volume Data Formats.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX E CUSTOM REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE E-13
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
E.1.6 Custom: Speed Data - 205
Report Function:
The Speed Data report captures the number of vehicles traveling in specified 5 mph speed bins during specified time period.
Each record contains 1 hour of data.
Both the date range and time intervals as are user specified.
Report data is separated into lanes.
Lanes or hours with no data are not included in the report.
For overlapping Bin ranges, the first value in a bin is inclusive and the second is exclusive, i.e.,
a vehicle with a speed of 35 mph will be included in the 2nd bin (35-40mph) and excluded from the first bin (0-35mph).
Report includes non-error vehicles only.
Supporting Report: FHWA: TMG 2013 Speed Data.
Format: Fixed Length Record, Fixed Width Field.
All numeric fields should be right-justified and zero-filled.
Data: Per Vehicle (All Non-Error Vehicles).
iAnalyze Report Display: Linked Report Directory.
Output File Name Syntax:
S<sID><mm><dd>.<yy>
Where: <sID> Site Identifier. <mm> Month; 2 digits. <dd > Day; 2 digits; and
File Extension:
<yy> Year; Last 2 digits.
E.1.6.1 Custom: Speed Data - 205; Sample Report
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX E CUSTOM REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE E-14
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Appendix Report 100 Custom: Speed Data Report - 205
E.1.6.2 Custom: Speed Data - 205; Report Detail
Field and Format Description
In an ASCII format report, fields are separated by commas.
Field Width Description
1 1 Lane Number
2 2 Hour of Day
3 4 Speed Bin 1 (0-35 mph) Vehicle Count
4 4 Speed Bin 2 (35-40 mph) Vehicle Count
5 4 Speed Bin 3 (40-45 mph) Vehicle Count
6 4 Speed Bin 4 (45-50 mph) Vehicle Count
7 4 Speed Bin 5 (50-55 mph) Vehicle Count
8 4 Speed Bin 6 (55-60 mph) Vehicle Count
9 4 Speed Bin 7 (60-65 mph) Vehicle Count
10 4 Speed Bin 8 (65-70 mph) Vehicle Count
11 4 Speed Bin 9 (70-75 mph) Vehicle Count
12 4 Speed Bin 10 (75-80 mph) Vehicle Count
13 4 Speed Bin 11 (80-85 mph) Vehicle Count
14 4 Speed Bin 12 (85+ mph) Vehicle Count
15 3 Site ID
16 6 Date of Data (mmddyy)
Appendix Table 17 Custom: Speed Data Report - 205 Record Detail
For an in-depth detailed explanation of the Vehicle Speed Record format refer to the FHWA Traffic Monitoring Guide, 2013 Edition Section 7.4 Speed Data Format.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX E CUSTOM REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE E-15
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
E.1.7 Custom: ASCII Raw Data - 206
Report Function:
Provides a data output very similar to the IRD ASCII Vehicle Records report with the following differences:
Timestamps now contain hundredths of seconds (previously were rounded to the nearest second)
Empty eternal data fields now displayNO_AVI_TAG (previously would just be blank)
Default temperature changed to 32. (previously, whatever data was actually in the data file was displayed.)
Status field removed.
The error field displays the single worst error or status, depending on the user priority assigned to a given error/status. Refer to the table at the bottom of this page for a listing of error/warning codes.
E.1.7.1 Custom: ASCII Raw Data - 206; Sample Report
Appendix Report 101 Custom: ASCII Raw Data - 206 Report
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX E CUSTOM REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE E-16
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
E.1.7.2 Custom: ASCII Raw Data - 206; Report Detail
One report row contains the information for one vehicle.
Report columns in each row (i.e. vehicle record) are:
year, month, day, hour, minute, second, hundredths of a second, error number, record type, lane, speed, class, length, gvw, esal, weight 1, axle spacing 1-2, weight 2, axle spacing 2-3, …, weight 13, axle spacing 13-14, weight 14, external data fields (from 1-10), temperature.
The priority of errors is determined by checking for an error priority table in the following order:
1. The error priority file, named ErrorPriorities.xml, in the iANALYZEParams directory;
2. or, if the above can be found but is not readable, the Error Priority will be set to the value listed in the column below
3. or, if the above cannot be found the Error Priority (default) will be set to the value listed in the column below:
Code Description Type (Error/
Warning) Error
Priority
0 Good Vehicle (no Errors or Warnings) None 0
1 Min Speed Error 192
2 Missed Axle Transfer Error 192
3 Missed Axle Processing Error 192
4 Loop A Only Error 192
5 Too Fast Error 192
6 Unequal Axle Count Error 192
7 Loop B Only Error 192
8 Too Fast 1 Error 192
9 Too Many Axles Error 192
10 Zero Axles Detected Error 192
11 One Axle Detected Error 192
12 Min Speed 1 Error 192
13 Axle Order Error 192
14 Loop Order Error 192
15 Offscale Error 192
16 Offscale Warning 64
17 Overheight Warning 64
18 Speed Change Warning 64
19 Significant Weight Difference Warning 64
20 Interrupt Interruption Warning 64
21 Unequal Axle Count Warning 64
22 Wrong Lane Warning 32
23 Tailgaiting Warning 32
24 Onscale Missed Warning 64
25 Safety Sort Warning 32
26 Invalid vehicle Error 224
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX E CUSTOM REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE E-17
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Code Description Type (Error/
Warning) Error
Priority
27 Speed Limit Exceeded Warning 32
28 Overweight Warning 16
29 Parking Lot vehicle Error 224
30 Not WIM Lane Warning 32
31 Late Warning 64
32 Unexpected Warning 64
33 Past Due Warning 64
34 Overlength Warning 64
35 No match Warning 32
36 Lateral Position Warning 33
37 Running Scale Warning 32
38 Cross Over Vehicle Error 224
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX E CUSTOM REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE E-18
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
E.1.8 Custom: Heartbeat-207
Report Function:
Provides the parsed output of the heartbeat logs maintained by some IRD systems.
These logs are simple records of system operation taken at certain time intervals.
E.1.8.1 Custom: Heartbeat-207; Sample Report
Appendix Report 102 Custom: Heartbeat - 207 Report
E.1.8.2 Custom: Heartbeat-207; Report Detail
For example, an excerpt from a sample log set to 15 min intervals:
May 16 00:13:00 2006 up 18 days, 13:27,
May 16 00:28:00 2006 up 18 days, 13:42,
May 16 00:43:00 2006 up 18 days, 13:57,
May 16 00:58:00 2006 up 18 days, 14:12,
Each log entry is contained on one line.
Each log entry will be one of the following:
A system Startup event (e.g.Apr 27 10:46:53 2006 System Starting Up ).
A system Shutdown event (e.g.Apr 27 09:39:35 2006 System Shutting Down ).
An indication of a missing log file. (e.g.Could not find heartbeat log file C:Alaska\VEH_RCRD\20060517.POA.hbt ).
An indication of a corrupt/unreadable log file (e.g.Found but could not read heartbeat log file C:Alaska\VEH_RCRD\20060517.POA.hbt ).
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX E CUSTOM REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE E-19
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
E.1.9 Custom: Vehicle Classification with Zeros - 208
Report Function:
The Vehicle Classification report captures hourly traffic volume by vehicle class.
All lanes in one direction should have the same data being collected.
The report data is separated into lanes.
Lanes and/or time periods that have no data are filled with zeros.
The length of the record (number of columns in each record) is determined by the value in Field 15 (columns 25-26) of the Station Description Record.
Supporting Report: FHWA: TMG 2013 Vehicle Classification.
Format: Variable Length Record.
iAnalyze Report Display: Linked Report Directory.
Output File Name Syntax:
4<sID><mm><dd> (Custom: Vehicle Classification with Zeros).<yy>
Where: <sID> Site Identifier <mm> Month; 2 digits <dd > Day; 2 digits Custom: Vehicle Classification with Zeros; and
File Extension:
<yy> Year; Last 2 digits.
E.1.9.1 Custom: Vehicle Classification with Zeros - 208; Sample Report
Appendix Report 103 Custom: Vehicle Classification With Zeroes - 208 Report
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX E CUSTOM REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE E-20
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
E.1.9.2 Custom: Vehicle Classification with Zeros -208; Report Detail
Field and Format Description
Field Columns Width Description Type
1 1 1 Record Type C
2 2-3 2 FIPS State Code C
3 4-9 6 Station ID C
4 10 1 Direction of Travel Code C
5 11 1 Lane of Travel C
6 12-15 4 Year of Data C
7 16-17 2 Month of Data C
8 18-19 2 Day of Data C
9 20-21 2 Hour of Data C
10 22 1 Classification Data Time Interval O
11 23-27 5 Total Interval Volume C
12 28 1 Restrictions C
13 29-33 5 Class 1 Count C
14 34-38 5 Class 2 Count C
15 39-43 5 Class 3 Count C/O
16 44-48 5 Class 4 Count C/O
17 49-53 5 Class 5 Count C/O
18 54-58 5 Class 6 Count C/O
19 59-63 5 Class 7 Count C/O
20 64-68 5 Class 8 Count C/O
21 69-73 5 Class 9 Count C/O
22 74-78 5 Class 10 Count C/O
23 79-83 5 Class 11 Count C/O
24 84-88 5 Class 12 Count C/O
25 89-93 5 Class 13 Count C/O
Appendix Table 18 Custom: Vehicle Class w Zeroes - 208 (C Variant) Detail
For an in-depth detailed explanation of the Vehicle Classification Record format refer to the FHWA Traffic Monitoring Guide, 2013 Edition Section 7.5 Vehicle Classification Data Format.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX E CUSTOM REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE E-21
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
E.1.10 Custom: Axle Load Survey-209
Report Function:
The Custom Axle Load Survey provides tables of ESAL data. For each time period (usually by hour) the table lists the ESAL average equivalency factor for each axle by class, the average GVW for each class, the Total ESAL for the class, and the Equivalency Factor (ESAL divided by number of vehicles) for the class.
E.1.10.1 Custom: Axle Load Survey-209; Report Detail
Report columns are:
Hour.
Class, Class Description, and Axle Range (number of axles)
Traffic Volume (vehicle count)
One column for each axle (1 through 12)
Average GVW (tonnes)
Total ESAL (sum ESALs for the class)
Total ESAL Equivalence Factors ( Total ESAL divided by the number of vehicles) Report rows are:
Vehicle classes; an example of the classes, descriptions and axle ranges is:: Class Description Axle Range
2 Passenger Cars (with or without Trailers) 2-4 3 2 Axle, 4 Tire Single Units (with or without Trailers) 2-5 4 Busses 2-3 5 2 Axle 6 Tire Single Unit Trucks 2-5 6 3 Axle Single Unit Trucks 3 7 4 Axle Single Unit Trucks 4 8 3 or 4 Axle Single Trailer Trucks 3-4 9 5 Axle Single Trailer Trucks 5 10 6 or More Axle Single Trailer Trucks 5 11 5 Axle Multi-Trailer Vehicles 5 12 6 Axle Multi-Trailer Vehicles 6 13 7 or More Axle Multi-Trailer Vehicles 7-12
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX E CUSTOM REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE E-22
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
E.1.10.2 Custom: Axle Load Survey-209; Sample Report
Appendix Report 104 Custom: Axle Load Summary - 209
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX E CUSTOM REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE E-23
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
E.1.11 Custom: Traffic Volume with Zeros - 210
Report Function:
This is a custom FHWA TMG Truck Weight report.
E.1.11.1 Custom: Traffic Volume with Zeros - 210; Sample Report
Appendix Report 105 Custom: Traffic Volume With Zeroes - 210
E.1.11.2 Custom: Traffic Volume with Zeros - 210; Report Detail
The report data is separated into lanes.
The report will fill lanes and/or time periods that have no data with zeros.
The output file name is in the format: 7<stn><mm><dd>.<yy> where <stn> is
the site identifier, <mm> is the two digit month number, <dd > is the two digit day of
month, and <yy> is the two digit year number.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX E CUSTOM REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE E-24
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
E.1.12 Custom: Speed Data with Zeros - 211
Report Function:
The Speed Data report captures the number of vehicles traveling in specified 5 mph speed bins during specified time period.
Each record contains 1 hour of data.
Both the date range and time intervals as are user specified.
Report data is separated into lanes.
Lanes or hours with no data are included in the report and are filled with zeros.
For overlapping Bin ranges, the first value in a bin is inclusive and the second is exclusive, i.e.,
a vehicle with a speed of 35 mph will be included in the 2nd bin (35-40mph) and excluded from the first bin (0-35mph).
Report includes non-error vehicles only.
Supporting Report: FHWA: TMG 2013 Speed Data.
Format: Fixed Length Record, Fixed Width Field.
All numeric fields should be right-justified and zero-filled.
Data: Per Vehicle (All Non-Error Vehicles).
iAnalyze Report Display: Linked Report Directory.
Output File Name Syntax:
S<sID><mm><dd>(Custom Speed Data with Zeroes - 211).<yy>
Where: <sID> Site Identifier <mm> Month; 2 digits (Custom Speed Data with Zeroes - 211)
<dd> Day; 2 digits; and
File Extension:
<yy> Year; Last 2 digits.
E.1.12.1 Custom: Speed Data with Zeros - 211; Sample Report
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX E CUSTOM REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE E-25
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Appendix Report 106 Custom: Speed Data With Zeroes Report - 211
E.1.12.2 Custom: Speed Data with Zeros - 211; Report Detail
Field and Format Description
In an ASCII format report, fields are separated by commas.
Field Width Description
1 1 Lane Number
2 2 Hour of Day
3 4 Speed Bin 1 (0-35 mph) Vehicle Count
4 4 Speed Bin 2 (35-40 mph) Vehicle Count
5 4 Speed Bin 3 (40-45 mph) Vehicle Count
6 4 Speed Bin 4 (45-50 mph) Vehicle Count
7 4 Speed Bin 5 (50-55 mph) Vehicle Count
8 4 Speed Bin 6 (55-60 mph) Vehicle Count
9 4 Speed Bin 7 (60-65 mph) Vehicle Count
10 4 Speed Bin 8 (65-70 mph) Vehicle Count
11 4 Speed Bin 9 (70-75 mph) Vehicle Count
12 4 Speed Bin 10 (75-80 mph) Vehicle Count
13 4 Speed Bin 11 (80-85 mph) Vehicle Count
14 4 Speed Bin 12 (85+ mph) Vehicle Count
15 3 Site ID
16 6 Date of Data (mmddyy)
Appendix Table 19 Custom: Speed Data With Zeroes - 211 Record Detail
For an in-depth detailed explanation of the Vehicle Speed Record format refer to the FHWA Traffic Monitoring Guide, 2013 Edition Section 7.4 Speed Data Format.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX E CUSTOM REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE E-26
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
E.1.13 Custom: Hourly Volume Summary - 212
Report Function:
This is a custom FHWA TMG Traffic Volume report.
E.1.13.1 Custom: Hourly Volume Summary - 212: Sample Report
Appendix Report 107 Custom: Hourly Volume Summary - 212 Report
E.1.13.2 Custom: Hourly Volume Summary - 212: Report Detail
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX E CUSTOM REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE E-27
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
E.1.14 Custom: ASCII Classification - 213
Report Function:
This is a custom FHWA TMG Vehicle classification report.
The output file name is in the format <yy><mm><dd>CL.<stn>.<ext> where <yy> is
the two digit year number, <mm> is the two digit month number, <dd> is the two digit day
of month, <stn> is the site identifier, and <ext> is the three character file type extension.
E.1.14.1 Custom: ASCII Classification - 213: Sample Report
Appendix Report 108 Custom: ASCII Classification - 213 Report
E.1.14.2 Custom: ASCII Classification - 213; Report Detail
The report data is separated into lanes.
The report will fill lanes and/or time periods that have no data with zeros.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX E CUSTOM REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE E-28
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
E.1.15 Custom: ASCII Speed - 214
Report Function:
The Speed Data report captures the number of vehicles traveling in specified 5 mph speed bins during specified time period.
Each record contains 1 hour of data.
Report is not to be displayed in Intervals.
Report data is separated into lanes.
Lanes or hours with no speed data are filled with zeros.
Report includes non-error vehicles only.
Supporting Report: FHWA: TMG 2013 Vehicle Speed Data.
Format: Fixed Length Record, Fixed Width Field.
All numeric fields should be right-justified and zero-filled.
Data: Per Vehicle (All Non-Error Vehicles).
iAnalyze Report Display: Linked Report Directory.
Output File Name Syntax:
<yy><mm><dd>SP.<sID>
Where: <yy> Year, last 2 digits. <mm> Month, 2 digit format. <dd> Day, 2 digit format. SP. ; and
File Extension:
<sID> Site Identifier.
E.1.15.1 Custom: ASCII Speed - 214; Sample Report
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX E CUSTOM REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE E-29
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Appendix Report 109 Custom: ASCII Speed Report - 214
E.1.15.2 Custom: ASCII Speed - 214: Report Detail
Field and Format Description
In an ASCII format report, fields are separated by commas.
Field Width Description
1 1 Lane Number
2 2 Hour of Day
3 4 Speed Bin 1 (0-35 mph) Vehicle Count
4 4 Speed Bin 2 (36-40 mph) Vehicle Count
5 4 Speed Bin 3 (41-45 mph) Vehicle Count
6 4 Speed Bin 4 (46-50 mph) Vehicle Count
7 4 Speed Bin 5 (51-55 mph) Vehicle Count
8 4 Speed Bin 6 (56-60 mph) Vehicle Count
9 4 Speed Bin 7 (61-65 mph) Vehicle Count
10 4 Speed Bin 8 (66-70 mph) Vehicle Count
11 4 Speed Bin 9 (71-75 mph) Vehicle Count
12 4 Speed Bin10 (76-80 mph) Vehicle Count
13 4 Speed Bin 11 (81-85 mph) Vehicle Count
14 4 Speed Bin 12 (86+ mph) Vehicle Count
Appendix Table 20 Custom: ASCII Speed - 214 Record Detail
For an in-depth detailed explanation of the Vehicle Speed Record format refer to the FHWA Traffic Monitoring Guide, 2013 Edition Section 7.4 Speed Data Format.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX E CUSTOM REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE E-30
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
E.1.16 Custom: ASCII Truck Record - 215
Report Function:
This custom report that outputs speed data as an ASCII file.
FHWA Output Filename Syntax:
yymmddTR.<STA> where yy is the year, mm the month, dd the day of the month, and STA is the three digit site ID. The file format is as specified below:
Data
iANALYZE Report Display: Linked Report Display
E.1.16.1 Custom: ASCII Truck Record - 215; Sample Report
Appendix Report 110 Custom: ASCII Truck Record - 215
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX E CUSTOM REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE E-31
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
E.1.16.2 Custom: ASCII Truck Record - 215; Report Detail
Code Description Type (Error/Warning)
Error Priority
0 Good Vehicle (no Errors or Warnings) None 0
1 Min Speed Error 192
2 Missed Axle Transfer Error 192
3 Missed Axle Processing Error 192
4 Loop A Only Error 192
5 Too Fast Error 192
6 Unequal Axle Count Error 192
7 Loop B Only Error 192
8 Too Fast 1 Error 192
9 Too Many Axles Error 192
10 Zero Axles Detected Error 192
11 One Axle Detected Error 192
12 Min Speed 1 Error 192
13 Axle Order Error 192
14 Loop Order Error 192
15 Offscale Error 192
16 Offscale Warning 64
17 Overheight Warning 64
18 Speed Change Warning 64
19 Significant Weight Difference Warning 64
20 Interrupt Interruption Warning 64
21 Unequal Axle Count Warning 64
22 Wrong Lane Warning 32
23 Tailgaiting Warning 32
24 Onscale Missed Warning 64
25 Safety Sort Warning 32
26 Invalid vehicle Error 224
27 Speed Limit Exceeded Warning 32
28 Overweight Warning 16
29 Parking Lot vehicle Error 224
30 Not WIM Lane Warning 32
31 Late Warning 64
32 Unexpected Warning 64
33 Past Due Warning 64
34 Overlength Warning 64
35 No match Warning 32
36 Lateral Position Warning 33
37 Running Scale Warning 32
38 Cross Over Vehicle Error 224
Description Length Starts in Column
Lane 2 1
Month 2 3
Day 4 6
Year 4 9
Hour 4 12
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX E CUSTOM REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE E-32
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Minute 4 15
Second 4 18
Vehicle No. 4 21
Class 4 27
Gross Weight 4 30
Length 4 37
Speed 4 44
Violation Code 4 50
Axle 1 Rt. Weight 4 54
Axle 1 Lt. Weight 4 59
Axle 2 Rt. Weight 4 64
Axle 2 Lt. Weight 4 69
Axle 1-2 Spacing 4 74
Axle 3 Rt. Weight 4 79
Axle 3 Lt. Weight 4 84
Axle 2-3 Spacing 4 89
Axle 4 Rt. Weight 4 94
Axle 4 Lt. Weight 4 99
Axle 3-4 Spacing 4 104
Axle 5 Rt. Weight 4 109
Axle 5 Lt. Weight 4 114
Axle 4-5 Spacing 4 119
Axle 6 Rt. Weight 4 124
Axle 6 Lt. Weight 4 129
Axle 5-6 Spacing 4 134
Sxle 7 Rt. Weight 4 139
Axle 7 Lt. Weight 4 144
Axle 6-7 Spacing 4 149
Axle 8 Rt. Weight 4 154
Axle 8 Lt. Weight 4 159
Axle 7-8 Spacing 4 164
Axle 9 Rt. Weight 4 169
Axle 9 Lt. Weight 4 174
Axle 8-9 Spacing 4 179
Vendor Specific Optional Fields 4 184
Assumptions:
Report is to include all vehicles Units are Kips and Feet only Report uses Per Vehicle Data Weights, speeds, and lengths are to be rounded to one decimal place Hours displayed 0 through 23
The errors and warnings that will generate a violation code (field 13) are listed in the table below. The priority of errors is determined by checking for an error priority table in the following order:
1. The error priority file, named ErrorPriorities.xml, in the iANALYZEParams directory;
2. or, if the above can be found but is not readable, the Error Priority will be set to the value listed in the column below
3. or, if the above cannot be found the Error Priority (default) will be set to the value listed in the column below.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX E CUSTOM REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE E-33
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
E.1.17 Custom: Overweight Vehicle - 216
Report Function:
This custom report generates a list of all vehicles deemed over the Allowed Gross Vehicle Weight limit for the reporting period.
Data: Per Vehicle (All Vehicles)
E.1.17.1 Custom: Overweight Vehicle - 216; Report Detail
Column Headings Description
SI No SI Number Transaction/Ref No. Transaction Number Lane Lane Class Class Date Date Time Time GVW (tonnes) GVW Allowed GVW (tonnes) Total GVW Overweight Carried (tonnes) Overweight Carried % Overweight Percent of overweight vehicles
= overweight count / good weight vehicles * 100
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX E CUSTOM REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE E-34
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
E.1.17.2 Custom: Overweight Vehicle - 216: Sample Report
Appendix Report 111 Custom: Overweight Vehicle - 216
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX E CUSTOM REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE E-35
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
E.1.18 Custom: Overweight By Day Of Month – 217
Report Function:
This custom report generates a list of all Over Gross Vehicle Weight vehicles by class and day of the month.
Data: Per Vehicle (All Vehicles)
E.1.18.1 Custom: Overweight By Day Of Month - 217; Report Detail
Column Heading Description
Interval Unit Day of Month (Weekday) Classification Vehicle Class Identifiers Count Weighed Overwt % Overwt
Row Counts Row Description
Per Day of the Month; Weekday Daily Vehicle Counts per Class beginning on the first day of the month
Week Total Average of the Vehicle Counts every seven (7) days or portion thereof, per Class. (*Does not include days for which no data has been collected).
Total Total Monthly Vehicle Count per Class
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX E CUSTOM REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE E-36
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
E.1.18.2 Custom: Overweight By Day Of Month - 217; Sample Report
Appendix Report 112 Custom: Overweight By Day Of Month - 217
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX E CUSTOM REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE E-37
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
E.1.19 Custom: Count By Percentage Overweight - 218
Report Function:
This custom report calculates over gross vehicle weight vehicles by class and the percentage that they are overweight (in increments of 10%).
E.1.19.1 Custom: Count By Percentage Overweight - 218; Report Detail
E.1.19.2 Custom: Count By Percentage Overweight - 218; Sample Report
Appendix Report 113 Custom: Count By Percentage Overweight - 218
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX E CUSTOM REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE E-38
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
E.1.20 Custom: ASCII Raw Data Fixed Width - 219
Report Function:
This custom report contains vehicle records in ASCII format; each field is a fixed width, so the fields of data always appear in the same location on a line in the file. Each line contains the information for one vehicle. Each vehicle record will contain 53 fields and ends with a carriage return (ASCII code 013); fields are fixed width, padded with spaces and separated by commas.
E.1.20.1 Custom: ASCII Raw Data Fixed Width - 219; Sample Report
Appendix Report 114 Custom: ASCII Raw Data Fixed Width - 219 Report
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX E CUSTOM REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE E-39
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
E.1.20.2 Custom: ASCII Raw Data Fixed Width - 219; Report Detail
The data fields (number of characters, excluding separator comma) are:
year (2), month (2), day (2), hour (2), minute (2), second (2), thousandths of a second (3) error number (3), record type (2), lane (2), speed (5), class (2), length (7), GVW (7), ESAL (6), weight axle 1 (6), axle spacing 1-2 (4), weight axle 2(6), axle spacing 2-3 (4), weight axle 3 (6), axle spacing 3-4 (4), weight axle 13 (6), axle spacing 13-14 (4), weight 14 (6), External data field 1 (20), External data field 2 (20), External data field 10 (20), temperature (3)
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX E CUSTOM REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE E-40
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
E.1.21 Custom: ASCII PAT Speed Report - 220
Report Function:
The ASCII PAT Speed Report captures the number of vehicles traveling in specified 5 mph speed bins during specified time period.
Each record contains 1 hour of data.
Both the date range and time intervals as are user specified.
The number and range of speed bins is user configurable.
For overlapping Bin ranges, the first value in a bin is inclusive and the second is exclusive, i.e.,
a vehicle with a speed of 35 mph will be included in the 2nd bin (35-40mph) and excluded from the first bin (0-35mph).
Report data is separated into lanes.
Lanes or hours with no data are included in the report and are filled with zeros.
Report includes non-error vehicles only.
Supporting Report: FHWA: TMG 2013 Speed Data.
Format: Variable Length Record, Fixed Width Field.
All numeric fields should be right-justified and zero-filled.
Data: Per Vehicle (All Non-Error Vehicles).
iAnalyze Report Display: Linked Report Directory.
Output File Name Syntax:
S<sID><mm><dd>(Custom ASCII PAT Speed Report - 220).<yy>
Where: <sID> Site Identifier <mm> Month, 2 digit format (Custom ASCII PAT Speed Report - 220)
<dd> Day, 2 digit format; and
File Extension:
<yy> Year, last 2 digits.
E.1.21.1 ASCII PAT Speed Report - 220; Sample Report
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX E CUSTOM REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE E-41
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Appendix Report 115 Custom: ASCII PAT Speed Report - 220
E.1.21.2 Custom: ASCII PAT Speed Report - 220; Report Detail
Field and Format Description
In an ASCII format report, fields are separated by commas.
Field Width Description
1 1 Lane Number
2 2 Hour of Day
3 4 Speed Bin 1 Vehicle Count
4 4 Speed Bin 2 Vehicle Count
5 4 Speed Bin 3 Vehicle Count
6 4 Speed Bin 4 Vehicle Count
7 4 Speed Bin 5 Vehicle Count
N+2 4 Speed Bin N Vehicle Count
N+3 3 Site ID
N+4 6 Date of Data (mmddyy)
Appendix Table 21 Custom: ASCII PAT Speed - 220 Record Detail
For an in-depth detailed explanation of the Vehicle Speed Record detail and format refer to the FHWA Traffic Monitoring Guide, 2013 Edition Section 7.4 Speed Data Format.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX E CUSTOM REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE E-42
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
E.1.22 Custom ASCII PAT Classification Report - 221
Report Function:
This is custom FHWA TMG Vehicle Classification report.
B<sID><mm><dd>.<yy>
Where: <sID> Site Identifier <mm> Month; 2 digits <dd > Day; 2 digits; and
File Extension:
<yy> Year; Last 2 digits.
E.1.22.1 Custom ASCII PAT Classification Report - 221; Sample Report
Appendix Report 116 Custom: ASCII PAT Classification Report - 221
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX E CUSTOM REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE E-43
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
E.1.22.2 Custom ASCII PAT Classification Report - 221; Report Detail
The report data are separated into lanes.
A new column, one character wide, is added after the axle information columns for the lane direction (specified in the TMG settings).
A new column, two characters wide, after the lane direction columns, is added for the number of axles measured on the vehicle.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX E CUSTOM REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE E-44
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
E.1.23 Custom: ASCII PAT Truck Records - 222
Report Function:
Provides a custom report format that outputs truck records as an ASCII file, similar to the Custom ASCII Truck Record.
The user can specify the range of truck classes to be included in the report. This range must be a subset of the general range of classes selected for all data.
Output Filename Syntax:
A<sID><mm><dd>.<yy>
Where: <sID> Site Identifier <mm> Month; 2 digits <dd > Day; 2 digits; and
File Extension:
<yy> Year; Last 2 digits.
E.1.23.1 Custom: ASCII PAT Truck Records - 222; Sample Report
Appendix Report 117 Custom: ASCII PAT Truck Records - 222
E.1.23.2 Custom: ASCII PAT Truck Records - 222; Report Detail
The first column, lane number, is one character wide instead of two.
Columns 3 through 17, class counts, are five characters wide instead of four
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX E CUSTOM REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE E-45
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
A new 18th column is added for the site number, which is 3 characters wide.
A new 19th column is added for the recording date, which is 6 characters wide and in the format <mm><dd><yy>.
Column 13, Violation Code, reports a decimal value that corresponds to the hexadecimal PAT violation code
The number of axles in the report is configured by the user. The minimum number of axles is 2. For each additional axle there will be three columns of information (left weight, right weight, and spacing), up to the user defined number of axles.
The final column, temperature, is reported in degrees Kelvin regardless of user selected units.
Axle weight columns 14, 15; 16, 17; 19*, 20*; 22*, 23* ... are four characters wide. *for the number of axles defined by the user.
Decimal PAT Hex Violation description
1 0x01 Axle overweight
2 0x02 Tandem overweight
4 0x04 Gross overweight
8 0x08 Bridge overweight
16 0x10 Offscale (Unequal axle counts)
32 0x20 Overspeed
64 0x40 Unbalanced (significant weight difference)
128 0x80 Speed change
Appendix Table 22 Custom: ASCII PAT Truck Records - 222 Record Detail
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX E CUSTOM REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE E-46
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
E.1.24 Custom: FHWA TMG Vehicle Classification 4 Card (New Mexico) - 223
Report Function:
Provides a legacy format of the FHWA TMG Truck Weight records report from the second edition of the TMG, added as a custom report for use in New Mexico.
The Station Description report (file) contains one record per traffic monitoring station, per direction, per lane (unless lanes are combined by the data collection device), per year.
Supporting Report: FHWA: TMG 2001 Truck Weight.
Format: Fixed Length Record, Fixed Width Field.
Data (fields) always appear in the same location on each line of the file.
Weight Card: 4
iAnalyze Report Display: Linked Report Directory.
Output Filename Syntax:
<sID><SS><YY><MM><DD><sID>.<WC>cd
Where:
<sID> Site ID
<SS> State FIPS code; 2 letters;
<YY> Year; Last 2 digits
<MM> Month; 2 digits
<DD> Day; 2 digits; and
File Extension:
.<WC>cd Weight Card Number cd
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX E CUSTOM REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE E-47
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
E.1.24.1 Custom: FHWA TMG Vehicle Classification 4 Card (NM) - 223; Sample Report
Appendix Report 118 Custom FHWA TMG Vehicle Classification: 4 Card Format
E.1.24.2 Custom: FHWA TMG Vehicle Classification 4 Card (NM) - 223; Report Detail
Each line contains:
classification counts for the specified hour and lane of travel.
26 fields that take 57 characters in the line; the remainder of the line is padded out to 80 characters with 23 spaces.
Fields are padded with leading zeroes.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX E CUSTOM REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE E-48
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Fields Descriptions Per Line:
Field Characters
Hardcoded Value of 4 1
State Code 2
Functional Class 2
Station ID 3
Direction of Travel 1
Year 2
Month 2
Day 2
Hour 2
Class 1 Count 2
Class 2 Count 4
Class 3 Count 3
Class 4 Count 2
Class 5 Count 3
Class 6 Count 2
Class 7 Count 2
Class 8 Count 2
Class 9 Count 3
Class 10 Count 2
Class 11 Count 2
Class 12 Count 2
Class 13 Count 3
Hardcoded Value of 10 2
Lane of Travel 1
Undefinable Class Count 3
Error Class Count 3
Empty, Padded with spaces 23
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX E CUSTOM REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE E-49
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
E.1.25 Custom: FHWA TMG Truck Weight 7 Card (New Mexico) - 224
Report Function:
This report provides a legacy format of the FHWA TMG Truck Weight records report from the second edition of the TMG, added as a custom report for use in New Mexico.
The Station Description report (file) contains one record per traffic monitoring station, per direction, per lane (unless lanes are combined by the data collection device), per year.
Supporting Report: FHWA: TMG 2001 Truck Weights.
Format: Fixed Length Record, Fixed Width Field.
Data (fields) always appear in the same location on each line of the file.
Weight Card: 7
iAnalyze Report Display: Linked Report Directory.
Output Filename Syntax:
<sID><SS><YY><MM><DD><sID>.<WC>cd
Where:
<sID> Site ID
<SS> State FIPS code; 2 letters;
<YY> Year; Last 2 digits
<MM> Month; 2 digits
<DD> Day; 2 digits; and
File Extension:
.<WC>cd Weight Card Number cd
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX E CUSTOM REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE E-50
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
E.1.25.1 Custom: FHWA TMG Truck Weight 7 Card (NM) - 224; Sample Report
Appendix Report 119 Custom FHWA TMG Vehicle Classification: 7 Card Format
E.1.25.2 Custom: FHWA TMG Truck Weight 7 Card (NM) - 224 Report Detail
One line of data per vehicle; except in the case of a vehicle with more than five axles which is split over two lines.
Field Descriptions: First 28 Characters
Field Characters
Hardcoded value of 7 1
State Code 2
Functional Class 2
Station ID 3
Direction of Travel 1
Year 2
Month 2
Day 2
Hour 2
FHWA Vehicle Type Code 6
Hardcoded value of 999 3
Hardcoded value of two spaces 2
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX E CUSTOM REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE E-51
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Field Characters
Remainder of Line 1:
Hardcoded value of 0009 4
Hardcoded value of two spaces 2
Lane of Travel 1
Hardcoded value of 999999 6
GVW 4
Weight Axle 1 3
Weight Axle 2 3
Weight Axle 3 3
Weight Axle 4 3
Weight Axle 5 3
Axle Spacing 1-2 3
Axle Spacing 2-3 3
Axle Spacing 3-4 3
Axle Spacing 4-5 3
Wheelbase (Vehicle Length) 4
Truck Record Number 3
Line Termination Digit* (0,1) 1
Line 2 for >= 5 Axle Vehicles:
Weight Axle 6 3
Weight Axle 7 3
Weight Axle 8 3
Weight Axle 9 3
Weight Axle 10 3
Weight Axle 11 3
Weight Axle 12 3
Weight Axle 13 3
Axle Spacing 5-6 3
Axle Spacing 6-7 3
Axle Spacing 7-8 3
Axle Spacing 8-9 3
Axle Spacing 9-10 3
Axle Spacing 10-11 3
Axle Spacing 11-12 3
Axle Spacing 12-13 3
Truck Record Number 3
Line Termination Digit* (9) 1
Appendix Table 23 Custom: FHWA TMG Truck Weight 7 Card Record Detail
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX E CUSTOM REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE E-52
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
E.1.26 Custom: FHWA TMG Station Description (South Dakota) - 225
Report Function:
This report provides a legacy format of the FHWA TMG Truck Weight records report from the second edition of the TMG, added as a custom report for use in South Dakota.
The Station Description report (file) contains one record per traffic monitoring station, per direction, per lane (unless lanes are combined by the data collection device), per year.
Supporting Report: FHWA: TMG 2001 Station Description.
Format: Fixed Length Record.
iAnalyze Report Display: Linked Report Directory.
Output Filename Syntax:
2<sID><mm><dd>.<yy>
Where: <sID> Site Identifier <mm> Month; 2 digits <dd> Day; 2 digits; and
File Extension:
<yy> Year; Last 2 digits.
E.1.26.1 Custom: FHWA TMG Station Description (SD) - 225; Sample Report
Appendix Report 120 Custom: FHWA TMG Station Description (SD) - 225 Report
E.1.26.2 Custom: FHWA TMG Station Description (SD) - 225; Report Detail
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX E CUSTOM REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE E-53
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
CUSTOM-DATA VALIDITY CHECKS
E.2.1 Custom: Data Validity Check (TCC) - 500
Report Function:
Provides a summary of data that can be used to check if the data collected by a TCC-540 data collection device was valid for the period in question.
E.2.1.1 Custom: Data Validity Check (TCC) - 500; Report Detail
Columns: For the Specified Day
Day Date and day of the week.
Daily Count Count of vehicles.
# Hrs=0? Number of hours in which zero vehicles were counted.
# Hrs >2500? Number of hours for which the vehicle count exceeded 2500.
Error % Percentage of vehicles generating an error condition such that no weight was obtained.
Cl 9 Cnt Count of Class 9 vehicles.
Cl 9 % Cnt Percentage of Class 9 vehicles of the total classified vehicle count.
Avg Cl 9 Average Weight of Class 9 vehicles.
Avg F Axl Average Front Axle Weight of Class 9 vehicles.
CL 9 Avg 2-3 Spc Average Spacing between drive axles (axles 2 and 3) for Class 9 vehicles.
Summary Row: For the Reporting Period
Daily Count Average Daily vehicle count.
# Hrs=0? Total Number of hours in which zero vehicles were counted.
# Hrs >2500? Total Number of hours for which the vehicle count exceeded 2500.
Error % Average Daily percentage of vehicles generating an error condition in which no weight could be obtained.
Cl 9 Cnt Average Daily Class 9 vehicle count.
Cl 9 % Cnt Average Daily Percentage of Class 9 vehicles of the total classified vehicle count.
Avg Cl 9 Average Weight of Class 9 vehicles.
Avg F Axl Average Front Axle Weight of Class 9 vehicles.
CL 9 Avg 2-3 Spc Average Spacing between drive axles (axles 2 and 3) for Class 9 vehicles.
Any field value outside the normal range for the site may indicate a problem with the data collection device resulting in valid data.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX E CUSTOM REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE E-54
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
E.2.1.2 Custom: Data Validity Check (TCC) - 500; Sample Report
Appendix Report 121 Custom: Data Validity Check (TCC) - 500
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX E CUSTOM REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE E-55
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
E.2.2 Custom: Data Validity Check (iSINC) - 501
Report Function:
Provides a summary of data that can be used to confirm data collected by an iSINC data collection device is valid for a specified reporting period.
Left and right wheel weights are averaged over all vehicle axles.
E.2.2.1 Custom: Data Validity Check (iSINC) - 501; Report Detail
Columns: For the Specified Day
Day Date and day of the week.
Daily Count Daily Count of vehicles.
# Hrs=0? Number of hours in which zero vehicles were counted.
# Hrs >2500? Number of hours for which the vehicle count exceeded 2500.
Error % Percentage of vehicles generating an error condition such that no weight was obtained.
Status Clear % Daily Percentage of vehicles in which no errors or status warnings were generated.
Good Weight % Daily Percentage of vehicles for which an accurate weight was obtained.
Cl 9 Cnt Count of Class 9 vehicles.
Cl 9 % Cnt Percentage of Class 9 vehicles of the total classified vehicle count.
CL 9 % Warn Percentage of Class 9 vehicles generating at least one warning status.
CL 10 % Warn Percentage of Class 10 vehicles generating at least one warning status.
CL 9 Avg GVW Average Weight of class 9 vehicles.
CL 9 Avg 2-3 Spc Average Spacing between drive axles (axles 2 and 3) for Class 9 vehicles.
Avg F Ax Wt Average Front Axle weight for Class 9 vehicles.
Avg L W Wt Average Left Wheel weight for Class 4 vehicles and above.
Avg R W Wt Average Right Wheel weight for Class 4 vehicles and above.
%Diff in LR Wts Percent Difference between Average Left and Right Wheel Weights.
Summary Row: For the Reporting Period
Daily Count Average Daily vehicle count.
# Hrs=0? Total Number of hours in which zero vehicles were counted.
# Hrs >2500? Total Number of hours for which the vehicle count exceeded 2500.
Error % Average Daily Percentage of vehicles generating an error condition in which no weight could be obtained.
Status Clear % Average Daily Percentage of vehicles in which no errors or status warnings were generated.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX E CUSTOM REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE E-56
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Good Weight % Average Daily Percentage of vehicles for which an accurate weight was obtained.
Cl 9 Cnt Average Daily Count of Class 9 vehicles.
Cl 9 % Average Daily Percentage of Class 9 vehicles of the total classified vehicle count.
CL 9 % Warn Average Daily Percentage of Class 9 vehicles generating at least one warning status.
CL 10 % Warn Average Daily Percentage of Class 10 vehicles generating at least one warning status.
CL 9 Avg GVW Average Weight of Class 9 vehicles.
CL 9 Avg 2-3 Spc Average Spacing between drive axles (axles 2 and 3) for Class 9 vehicles.
Avg F Ax Wt Average Front Axle weight for Class 9 vehicles.
Avg L W Wt Average Left Wheel weight for Class 4 vehicles and above.
Avg R W Wt Average Right Wheel weight for Class 4 vehicles and above.
%Diff in LR Wts Percent Difference between Average Left and Right Wheel Weights.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX E CUSTOM REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE E-57
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
E.2.2.2 Custom: Data Validity Check (iSINC) - 501; Sample Report
Appendix Report 122 Custom: Data Validity Check (iSINC) - 501
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX E CUSTOM REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE E-58
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
E.2.3 Custom: Data Validity Check (ASCII) - 502
Report Function:
Provides an ASCII export data in CSV format used to verify data collection for a specified reporting period.
E.2.3.1 Custom: Data Validity Check (ASCII) - 502; Report Detail
This report ignores lane and interval filter settings.
Output File Name Syntax:
502_<yyyy><mm><dd>_<yyyy><mm><dd>_<siteID>.csv
Where:
502_ specifies report type followed by an underscore.
<yyyy><mm><dd>_ start of reporting period; four digit year, two digit month two digit day followed by an underscore.
<yyyy><mm><dd>_ end of reporting period; four digit year, two digit month two digit day followed by an underscore.
<siteID> site identification.
.csv file type extension; (comma separated value) preceded by a period.
Example: 502_20110101_20110231_va1.csv
Report Sort Order: The default report display sorts data by Lane, Day, Month.
Report Description
Column Description
Lane Lane # (starting at 1).
Year Year (four digit display).
Month Month (two digit format).
Day Day (two digit format).
Daily Count Daily vehicle Count.
# Hrs Count = 0 Number of hours in which zero vehicles were counted.
# Hrs Count > 2500 Number of hours for which the vehicle count exceeded 2500.
AM Max Hour AM hour with the highest vehicle count.
AM Max Hour Count Vehicle count associated AM Max Hour.
AM Min Hour AM hour with the lowest vehicle (non-zero) count.
AM Min Hour Count Vehicle count associated AM Min Hour
PM Max Hour PM hour with the highest vehicle count.
PM Max Hour Count Vehicle count associated PM Max Hour.
PM Min Hour PM hour with the lowest vehicle (non-zero) count.
PM Min Hour Count Vehicle count associated PM Min Hour.
Error % Percentage of vehicles generating an error condition in which no weight could be obtained.
Max Error Error Status with the highest frequency.
Max Error % Percentage of Max Error of the total Error status count.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX E CUSTOM REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE E-59
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Column Description
Status Clear % Daily Percentage of vehicles in which no errors or status warnings (flags) were generated. Does not include error vehicles that have pre-set status flags. Ignores overweight or over GVW status flags.
Max Status Non-clear status with the highest frequency. Ignores overweight or over GVW status flags.
Max Status % Percentage of Max Status of the total Non-Clear status count.
Good Weight % Daily Percentage of vehicles for which an accurate weight was obtained.
Excludes error vehicles and vehicles with any of the following status flags:
Offscale Hit Onscale Missed Significant Speed Change
Significant Weight Difference
Vehicle Headway Too Short
Unequal Axle Count on Sensors
Tailgating Lateral Position Error
Column Description
Over GVW % Percentage out of daily count for vehicles with an Over GVW status.
Class 9 Count Daily Count of Class 9 vehicles.
Class 9 Count % percentage out of vehicle counts in per vehicle data for previous field.
Class 9 % Status percentage out of Class 9 Count of Class 9 vehicles that generated at least one warning status. Ignores overweight or over GVW status flags.
Class 9 Max Status the type of non-clear status most encountered in Class 9 vehicles for this day's data (see Appendix B.1 for status types). Ignores overweight or over GVW status flags.
Class 9 Max Status % percentage out of all Class 9 vehicles with statuses for previous field. Ignores overweight or over GVW status flags.
Class 10 % Status percentage of Class 10 vehicles that generated at least one warning status. Ignores overweight or over GVW status flags.
Class 10 Max Status the type of non-clear status most encountered in Class 10 vehicles for this day's data (see Appendix B.1 for status types). Ignores overweight or over GVW status flags.
Class 10 Max Status percentage out of all Class 10 vehicles with statuses for previous field. Ignores overweight or over GVW status flags.
Class 9 Avg GVW average weight of class 9 vehicles for this day's data
Class 9 Avg 2-3 Spacing
average spacing between axle 2 and axle 3 for Class 9 vehicle for this day's data.
Avg Front Axle Weight
average front axle weight for Class 9 vehicles for this day's data.
Avg Left Wheel Weight
average left wheel weight for Class 4 and above vehicles.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX E CUSTOM REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE E-60
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Avg Right Wheel Weight
average right wheel weight for Class 4 and above vehicles.
% Diff Left-Right Weights
percent difference between the previous two fields.
Avg Temperature average temperature sensor reading for all vehicles in per vehicle data.
Appendix Table 24 Custom: Data Validity Check (ASCII) - 502 Record Detail
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX E CUSTOM REPORTS
IANALYZE PAGE E-61
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
E.2.3.2 Custom: Data Validity Check (ASCII) - 502; Sample Report
Microsoft Excel Spreadsheet:
Appendix Report 123 Custom: Data Validity Check (ASCII) - 502 Report
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX F STATUS AND ERROR MESSAGES
IANALYZE PAGE F-1
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Appendix F STATUS AND ERROR MESSAGES
WIM STATUS CONDITIONS
Good Weight Exceptions:
Abbrev. Full Message
Meaning and/or Possible Cause Weight Status
Status Code
Decimal (Hex)
CredFail Credential Failed
Vehicle credential data has not passed site specific tests.
Appears on systems with AVI.
Good Weight
8388608 (800000)
LatErr Lateral Error Vehicle not detected by lateral position sensor.
Appears on systems equipped with lateral position sensor.
Good Weight
1048576 (100000)
NoCmpl No Compliance information
Vehicle compliance information could not be found in database. Appears on systems with AVI.
Good Weight
2097152 (200000)
None No warnings Used for reporting Status Clear: No status flags set.
Good Weight
0 (0)
OverGVW Over Gross Vehicle Weight
GVW exceeds compliance limit set for for this vehicle class. OverGVW warning flags not applied when using a classification scheme without compliance.
Good Weight
8192 (2000)
OverWt Overweight GVW, or one or more axle weights exceeds compliance limit set for this vehicle class. OverWt warning flags not applied when using a classification scheme without compliance.
Good Weight
4096 (1000)
OvrFail Override Failed
A Compliance Override has failed. Appears on systems with AVI.
Good Weight
4194304 (400000)
Width Overwidth Vehicle width exceeds width limit for vehicle class.
Good Weight
67108864 (4000000)
Weight Suspect:
Abbrev. Full Message
Meaning and/or Possible Cause Weight Status
Status Code
Decimal (Hex)
HdwyShrt Headway Too Short
Distance between axles is shorter than the system is set to accept.
Weight Suspect
32 (20)
Late Vehicle is late arriving at station
Vehicle has not arrived within the expected time.
Appears on systems configured for vehicle tracking.
Weight Suspect
65536 (10000)
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX F STATUS AND ERROR MESSAGES
IANALYZE PAGE F-2
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Abbrev. Full Message
Meaning and/or Possible Cause Weight Status
Status Code
Decimal (Hex)
NoMatch Vehicle not matched
Vehicle not matched by tracking system. Message appears only on systems configured for vehicle tracking.
Weight Suspect
524288 (80000)
NotWIM Truck not in WIM lane
Vehicle has been detected and classified as a truck in a lane where trucks should not be present. Appears on WIM systems.
Weight Suspect
1024 (400)
OfsHit Offscale hit Off-Scale Detectors triggered (if present). The weight may be inaccurate.
Weight Suspect
1 (1)
Onscale On scale detectors not activated
Vehicle did not trigger On-Scale Detectors (if present). The weight may be inaccurate.
Weight Suspect
4 (4)
Ove due Vehicle overdue
Vehicle has not arrived within the expected time limit. Appears on WIM systems.
Weight Suspect
262144 (40000)
OverLng Over Length Overall vehicle length (bumper-to-bumper) exceeds compliance limit set for this vehicle class. OverLng warning flags not applied when using a classification scheme without compliance.
Weight Suspect
2048 (800)
Ovr Hgt Over height Overheight sensor (if present) activated by this vehicle.
Weight Suspect
2 (2)
Run Scal Vehicle Running Scale
Vehicle signaled to Report but instead it took the Bypass Lane. Appears on WIM systems.
Weight Suspect
512 (200)
Safety Random Safety Check
Vehicle selected for a Random Safety Check. Appears on WIM systems.
Weight Suspect
16384 (4000)
Spd Chng Speed change
Drastic speed change detected while vehicle being measured. Axle spacings may be inaccurate.
Weight Suspect
8 (8)
Speeding Vehicle is speeding
Vehicle exceeded defined speed limit. Vehicle measurement is unaffected.
Weight Suspect
32768 (8000)
Tailgate Vehicle is tailgating
Vehicle triggered upstream loop before preceding vehicle passed completely over downstream loop. No effect on measurements; may indicate unsafe driving.
Weight Suspect
128 (80)
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX F STATUS AND ERROR MESSAGES
IANALYZE PAGE F-3
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Abbrev. Full Message
Meaning and/or Possible Cause Weight Status
Status Code
Decimal (Hex)
UnAx
Unequal axle count on sensors
All lane axle sensors did not detect the same number of axles Vehicle measurements can still be determined. Possible problem with one of the WIM sensors
Weight Suspect
64 (40)
Unexpect Unexpected vehicle
Vehicle detected where the system did not expect one.
Weight Suspect
131072 (20000)
WrongLn Wrong Lane Vehicle has been directed to one lane but has taken another. Appears on systems configured
for vehicle tracking.
Weight Suspect
256 (100)
Wt Diff Weight differential
Significant difference detected between weights measured by the left and right scales. Vehicle may have an unacceptably unbalanced load, or one of the WIM sensors may have been partly missed or one of the WIM sensors may out of calibration.
Weight Suspect
16 (10)
Appendix Table 25 WIM Status Messages
CREDENTIAL STATUS CONDITIONS
Abbrev. Full Message Meaning and/or Possible Cause Weight Status
Status Code
Decimal (Hex)
HAZMAT Carrier has HAZMAT status
Vehicle licensed to carry Hazardous Material.
Good weight
2097152 (200000)
HOTLi Vehicle or Carrier on Hotlist
Vehicle or Carrier is on a hotlist. Good weight
1073741824 (40000000)
IFTA IFTA Check Failed
IFTA screening has failed. Good weight
268435456 (10000000)
IRP IRP Check Failed
IRP screening has failed. Good weight
536870912 (20000000)
NCIC Vehicle in NCIC database
NCIC screening has failed. Good weight
1048576 (100000)
CaOOS Carrier Out of Service
Non-PRISM service check has failed
Good weight
134217728 (8000000)
Permit Permit Indicates a vehicle is compliant due to a state permit.
Good weight
65536 (10000)
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX F STATUS AND ERROR MESSAGES
IANALYZE PAGE F-4
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Appendix Table 26: Credential Status Messages
Note that the Permit, State Screening Failure, PRISM Out of Service, Vehicle in NCIC database, Carrier has HAZMAT status, and Carrier Safety Failure statuses have the same status code values as previously existing statuses. iANALYZE maps these statuses accordingly for data files which use these definitions.
SORT DECISION STATUS STATES
Appendix Table 27: Sort Decision Status Messages
ERROR STATUS CONDITIONS
Abbreviation Full message
Meaning and/or Possible Cause Error Code
CrossOvr Cross over vehicle
At sites with a second station entry after the WIM sensors, if vehicle that missed the axle sensors but entered station tracking loops via second entry, a dummy record is created with this error attached. Site specific error.
17
Dwn Loop Downstream loop only
Vehicle detected by downstream loop but not upstream loop. Vehicle may have changed lanes. If many errors, loops may be out of calibration.
7
Invalid Invalid vehicle
Contradictory sensor inputs have been received, indicating that the vehicle measurements were not valid.
15
LoopOrdr Loops activated in wrong order
Vehicle moving in opposite direction to normal traffic or loops assigned incorrect sequence number during system configuration.
14
PRISM PRISM Out of Service
PRISM screening has failed. Good weight
262144 (40000)
Sfty Carrier Safety Failure
Vehicle has failed credential safety checks.
Good weight
4194304 (400000)
SSFa State Screening Failure
A state specific credential failure. Good weight
131072 (20000)
Decision Status
Meaning Status Code
Off Sorting was turned off when vehicle passed through the data collection system.
0x00
Report Vehicle has been assigned a report status by the data collection system (potential violation or random selection).
0x02
Bypass Vehicle has been assigned a bypass status by the data collection system (no potential violations detected).
0x03
Cred Report Vehicle or Carrier has failed one or more credential checks.
0x04
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX F STATUS AND ERROR MESSAGES
IANALYZE PAGE F-5
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Abbreviation Full message
Meaning and/or Possible Cause Error Code
Max Axle Maximum axle count exceeded
More axles detected on a single vehicle than data collection system can count (12 for DOS systems, 14 for Unix systems).
9
One Axle One axle detected
Only one axle detected on a vehicle. Thresholds out of calibration.
11
Park Lot Vehicle from parking lot
Vehicle entered system from parking lot. Message appears only on systems configured for vehicle tracking.
16
Proc Err1 Processor Error 1
Missed axle data transfer, system too busy. 2
Proc Err2 Processor Error 2
Missed axle processing, system too busy. 3
SnsrOrdr Axle sensors activated in wrong order
Vehicle moving in opposite direction to normal traffic or sensors assigned incorrect sequence number during system configuration.
13
Too Fast Vehicle too fast
The vehicle passed through WIM system too quickly to obtain a measurement
5
Too Long Axle on sensor too long
Vehicle too slow or speed sensor threshold out of calibration.
1
Too Slow Vehicle too slow
The vehicle passed through WIM system too slowly to obtain a measurement
12
UpBounce Upstream loop bounce
Upstream loop has switched off-on-off very quickly, loop sensitivity may be too high.
8
Uneq Cnt Unequal axle count
All axle sensors did not detect the same number of axles for this vehicle.
6
UnmtcgTg Unmatched tag vehicle
A vehicle record matching the AVI transponder tag cannot be found in the database. Message appears only on with AVI.
18
Up Loop Upstream loop only
Vehicle detected by upstream loop but not downstream loop. Vehicle may have changed lanes. If many errors, loops may be out of calibration.
4
Zero Axle Zero Axles detected
Vehicle presence detected by loop sensors but not axle detectors. Axle detector threshold may be set too high, or detector inputs may be incorrectly assigned, or hovercraft are using this highway.
10
Appendix Table 28: Error Messages
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX G LANGUAGE AND COUNTRY CODES
IANALYZE PAGE G-1
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Appendix G LANGUAGE AND COUNTRY CODES The two tables below list the language and country codes used to specify a language file used for translation.
LANGUAGE CODES
Language Codes
Abkhazian ab
Afar aa
Afrikaans af
Akan ak
Albanian sq
Amharic am
Arabic ar
Aragonese an
Armenian hy
Assamese as
Avaric av
Avestan ae
Aymara ay
Azerbaijani az
Bambara bm
Bashkir ba
Basque eu
Belarusian be
Bengali bn
Bihari bh
Bislama bi
Bosnian bs
Breton br
Bulgarian bg
Burmese my
Catalan; Valencian ca
Chamorro ch
Chechen ce
Chinese zn
Church Slavic; Old Slavonic; Church Slavonic; Old Bulgarian; Old Church Slavonic
cu
Chuvash cv
Cornish kw
Corsican co
Cree cr
Czech cs
Czech cs
Danish da
Divehi dv
Dutch; Flemish nl
Dzongkha dz
English en
Esperanto eo
Estonian et
Ewe ee
Faroese fo
Fijian fj
Finnish fi
French fr
Fulah ff
Gaelic; Scottish Gaelic gd
Galician gl
Ganda lg
Georgian ka
German de
Greek, Modern (1453 to present)
el
Guarani gn
Gujarati gu
Haitian; Haitian Creole ht
Hausa ha
Hebrew he
Herero hz
Hindi hi
Hiri Motu ho
Hungarian hu
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX G LANGUAGE AND COUNTRY CODES
IANALYZE PAGE G-2
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Language Codes
Icelandic is
Ido io
Igbo ig
Indonesian id
Interlingua (International Auxiliary Language Association)
ia
Interlingue ie
Inuktitut iu
Inupiaq ik
Italian it
Kalaallisut; Greenlandic kl
Kannada kn
Kashmiri kr
Kazakh kk
Khmer km
Kikuyu; Gikuyu ki
Kinyarwanda rw
Kirghiz ky
Komi kv
Kongo kg
Korean ko
Kuanyama; Kwanyama kj
Kurdish ku
Lao lo
Latin la
Latvian lv
Limburgan; Limburger; Limburgish
li
Lingala ln
Lithuanian lt
Luba-Katanga lu
Luxembourgish; Letzeburgesch lb
Japanese ja
Javanese jv
Macedonian mk
Malagasy mg
Malay ms
Malayalam ml
Maltese mt
Maori mi
Marathi mr
Marshallese mh
Moldavian mo
Mongolian mn
Nauru na
Navajo; Navaho nv
Ndebele, North; North Ndebele nd
Ndebele, South; South Ndebele
nr
Ndonga ng
Nepali ne
Northern Sami se
Norwegian Bokmål; Bokmål,Norwegian
nb
Norwegian Nynorsk; Nynorsk, Norwegian
nn
Occitan (post 1500); Provençal oc
Ojibwa oj
Oriya or
Oromo om
Ossetian; Ossetic os
Pali pi
Panjabi; Punjabi pa
Persian fa
Polish pl
Portuguese pt
Pushto ps
Quechua qu
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX G LANGUAGE AND COUNTRY CODES
IANALYZE PAGE G-3
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Language Codes
Raeto-Romance rm
Romanian ro
Rundi rn
Russian ru
Samoan sm
Sango sg
Sanskrit sa
Sardinian sc
Serbian sr
Serbian sr
Shona sn
Sindhi sd
Sinhala; Sinhalese si
Slovak sk
Slovenian sl
Somali so
Sotho, Southern st
Spanish; Castilian es
Sundanese su
Swahili sw
Swati ss
Swedish sv
Tagalog tl
Tahitian ty
Tajik tg
Tatar tt
Telugu te
Thai th
Tibetan bo
Tibetan bo
Tigrinya ti
Tonga (Tonga Islands) to
Tsonga ts
Tswana tn
Turkish tr
Turkmen tk
Twi tw
Uighur; Uyghur ug
Ukrainian uk
Urdu ur
Uzbek uz
Venda ve
Vietnamese vi
Volapük vo
Walloon wa
Welsh cy
Western Frisian fy
Wolof wo
Xhosa xh
Yiddish yi
Yoruba yo
Zhuang; Chuang za
Zulu zu
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX G LANGUAGE AND COUNTRY CODES
IANALYZE PAGE G-4
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
COUNTRY CODES
Listed below are the ISO 3166-1-alpha-2 two letter country codes:
Country Codes
A
AFGHANISTAN AF
ÅLAND ISLANDS AX
ALBANIA AL
ALGERIA DZ
AMERICAN SAMOA AS
ANDORRA AD
ANGOLA AO
ANGUILLA AI
ANTARCTICA AQ
ANTIGUA AND BARBUDA AG
ARGENTINA AR
ARMENIA AM
ARUBA AW
AUSTRALIA AU
AUSTRIA AT
AZERBAIJAN AZ
B
BAHAMAS BS
BAHRAIN BH
BANGLADESH BD
BARBADOS BB
BELARUS BY
BELGIUM BE
BELIZE BZ
BENIN BJ
BERMUDA BM
BHUTAN BT
BOLIVIA BO
BOSNIA AND HERZEGOVINA BA
BOTSWANA BW
BOUVET ISLAND BV
BRAZIL BR
BRITISH INDIAN OCEAN TERRITORY
IO
BRUNEI DARUSSALAM BN
BULGARIA BG
BURKINA FASO BF
BURUNDI BI
C
CAMBODIA KH
CAMEROON CM
CANADA CA
CAPE VERDE CV
CAYMAN ISLANDS KY
CENTRAL AFRICAN REPUBLIC
CF
CHAD TD
CHILE CL
CHINA CN
CHRISTMAS ISLAND CX
COCOS (KEELING) ISLANDS CC
COLOMBIA CO
COMOROS KM
CONGO CG
CONGO, THE DEMOCRATIC REPUBLIC OF THE
CD
COOK ISLANDS CK
COSTA RICA CR
CÔTE D'IVOIRE CI
CROATIA HR
CUBA CU
CYPRUS CY
CZECH REPUBLIC CZ
D
DENMARK DK
DJIBOUTI DJ
DOMINICA DM
DOMINICAN REPUBLIC DO
E
ECUADOR EC
EGYPT EG
EL SALVADOR SV
EQUATORIAL GUINEA GQ
ERITREA ER
ESTONIA EE
ETHIOPIA ET
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX G LANGUAGE AND COUNTRY CODES
IANALYZE PAGE G-5
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Country Codes
F
FALKLAND ISLANDS (MALVINAS)
FK
FAROE ISLANDS FO
FIJI FJ
FINLAND FI
FRANCE FR
FRENCH GUIANA GF
FRENCH POLYNESIA PF
FRENCH SOUTHERN TERRITORIES
TF
G
GABON GA
GAMBIA GM
GEORGIA GE
GERMANY DE
GHANA GH
GIBRALTAR GI
GREECE GR
GREENLAND GL
GRENADA GD
GUADELOUPE GP
GUAM GU
GUATEMALA GT
GUINEA GN
GUINEA-BISSAU GW
GUYANA GY
H
HAITI HT
HEARD ISLAND AND MCDONALD ISLANDS
HM
HOLY See (VATICAN CITY) VA
HONDURAS HN
HONG KONG HK
HUNGARY HU
I
ICELAND IS
INDIA IN
INDONESIA ID
IRAN, ISLAMIC REPUBLIC OF IR
IRAQ IQ
IRELAND IE
ISRAEL IL
ITALY IT
J
JAMAICA JM
JAPAN JP
JORDAN JO
K
KAZAKHSTAN KZ
KENYA KE
KIRIBATI KI
KOREA, DEMOCRATIC PEOPLE'S REPUBLIC OF
KP
KOREA, REPUBLIC OF KR
KUWAIT KW
KYRGYZSTAN KG
L
LAO PEOPLE'S DEMOCRATIC REPUBLIC
LA
LATVIA LV
LEBANON LB
LESOTHO LS
LIBERIA LR
LIBYAN ARAB JAMAHIRIYA LY
LIECHTENSTEIN LI
LITHUANIA LT
LUXEMBOURG LU
M
MACAO MO
MACEDONIA, THE FORMER YUGOSLAV REPUBLIC OF
MK
MADAGASCAR MG
MALAWI MW
MALAYSIA MY
MALDIVES MV
MALI ML
MALTA MT
MARSHALL ISLANDS MH
MARTINIQUE MQ
MAURITANIA MR
MAURITIUS MU
MAYOTTE YT
MEXICO MX
MICRONESIA, FEDERATED STATES OF
FM
MOLDOVA, REPUBLIC OF MD
MONACO MC
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX G LANGUAGE AND COUNTRY CODES
IANALYZE PAGE G-6
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Country Codes
M
N
NAMIBIA NA
NAURU NR
NEPAL NP
NETHERLANDS NL
NETHERLANDS ANTILLES AN
NEW CALEDONIA NC
NEW ZEALAND NZ
NICARAGUA NI
NIGER NE
NIGERIA NG
NIUE NU
NORFOLK ISLAND NF
NORTHERN MARIANA ISLANDS
MP
NORWAY NO
O
OMAN OM
P
PAKISTAN PK
PALAU PW
PALESTINIAN TERRITORY, OCCUPIED
PS
PANAMA PA
PAPUA NEW GUINEA PG
PARAGUAY PY
PERU PE
PHILIPPINES PH
PITCAIRN PN
POLAND PL
PORTUGAL PT
PUERTO RICO PR
Q
QATAR QA
R
RÉUNION RE
MONGOLIA MN
MONTSERRAT MS
MOROCCO MA
MOZAMBIQUE MZ
MYANMAR MM
R
ROMANIA RO
RUSSIAN FEDERATION RU
RWANDA RW
S
SAINT HELENA SH
SAINT KITTS AND NEVIS KN
SAINT LUCIA LC
SAINT PIERRE AND MIQUELON
PM
SAINT VINCENT AND THE GRENADINES
VC
SAMOA WS
SAN MARINO SM
SAO TOME AND PRINCIPE ST
SAUDI ARABIA SA
SENEGAL SN
SERBIA AND MONTENEGRO CS
SEYCHELLES SC
SIERRA LEONE SL
SINGAPORE SG
SLOVAKIA SK
SLOVENIA SI
SOLOMON ISLANDS SB
SOMALIA SO
SOUTH AFRICA ZA
SOUTH GEORGIA AND THE SOUTH SANDWICH ISLANDS
GS
SPAIN ES
SRI LANKA LK
SUDAN SD
SURINAME SR
SVALBARD AND JAN MAYEN SJ
SWAZILAND SZ
SWEDEN SE
SWITZERLAND CH
SYRIAN ARAB REPUBLIC SY
T
TAIWAN, PROV. OF CHINA TW
TAJIKISTAN TJ
TANZANIA, UNITED REPUBLIC TZ
THAILAND TH
TIMOR-LESTE TL
TOGO TG
TOKELAU TK
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX G LANGUAGE AND COUNTRY CODES
IANALYZE PAGE G-7
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Country Codes
T
TONGA TO
TRINIDAD AND TOBAGO TT
TUNISIA TN
TURKEY TR
TURKMENISTAN TM
TURKS AND CAICOS ISLANDS TC
TUVALU TV
U
UGANDA UG
UKRAINE UA
UNITED ARAB EMIRATES AE
UNITED KINGDOM GB
UNITED STATES US
UNITED STATES MINOR OUTLYING ISLANDS
UM
URUGUAY UY
UZBEKISTAN UZ
V
VANUATU VU
Vatican City State see HOLY
VENEZUELA VE
VIET NAM VN
VIRGIN ISLANDS, BRITISH VG
VIRGIN ISLANDS, U.S. VI
W
WALLIS AND FUTUNA WF
WESTERN SAHARA EH
Y
YEMEN YE
Z
Zaire see CONGO (The Democratic Republic of the)
-
ZAMBIA ZM
ZIMBABWE ZW
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX H FHWA VEHICLE CLASSES
IANALYZE PAGE H-1
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Appendix H FHWA VEHICLE CLASSES
Appendix Figure 7 FHWA Vehicle Classes
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX I TC/C-540 CONFIGURATION
IANALYZE PAGE I-1
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Appendix I TC/C-540 CONFIGURATION Data collected by the IRD Traffic Counter/Collector-540 must be in a specific format to be used by iANALYZE.
This appendix outlines the TC/C-540 configuration settings that produce data in the required format.
Refer to the TC/C-540 Operator’s Manual, part number 69004801, and the TrafMan Software User’s Manual, part number 69007101, for more detailed information on configuration and operation of the TC/C-540.
Although TrafMan software will configure and accept data from a number of related traffic counter/collector devices (Unicorn, Phoenix, Pegasus, etc.); of these devices iANALYZE will only support data collected by the IRD TC/C-540 and TC/C-540 WIM.
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
The System Configuration parameters listed below must be set to the values shown:
Item Setting Comments
Storage Modes WIM, or Binned, or Binned + WIM
Data collected in Raw, Count or Sensor Mode will not be reported.
Number of Lanes <=8 May be more if lanes are grouped; See Appendix I.7, Lane Configuration.
Number of Intervals 1
Interval Length 60 minutes
System configuration parameters not listed in the table above may be set to any valid value.
The classification files on the TC/C-540 (DEFAULT.AXL and DEFAULT.SPD) must be configured to match the files used by iANALYZE. Settings are specified below.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX I TC/C-540 CONFIGURATION
IANALYZE PAGE I-2
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
AXLE CLASSIFICATION: DEFAULT.AXL SETTINGS
Number of Definitions: 23
Number of Bins: 13 (Axle Spacings specified in feet)
Defn. Bin # of Axles Bin Name Spacings
1 1 2-3 Not Used 1-5.8,*
2 2 2-3 Not Used 5.9-10.2,8-18.8
3 3 2-3 Not Used 10.3-15,8-18.8
4 5 2 Not Used 15.1-24
5 4 2-3 Not Used 23.5-99.9,*
6 8 3 Not Used *,18-99.9
7 6 3 Not Used *,1-8
8 2 4-5 Not Used 1-10.2,*,1-3.4,1-3.4
9 3 4-5 Not Used 10.3-15,*,1-3.4,1-3.4
10 3 4 Not Used 5.9-15,15-35,5.9-15
11 2 4 Not Used 7-12,7-35,7-12
12 8 4 Not Used *,5.1-99.9,3.4-99.9
13 8 4 Not Used *,1-5,11.9-99.9
14 7 4 Not Used *,*,*
15 7 5-6 Not Used *,3.4-5,3.4-5,3.4-12,3.5-12
16 11 5 Not Used *,6-99.9,*,*
17 9 5 Not Used *,1-6,*,3.4-11
18 3 5 Not Used 9.8-15,*,*,1-3.4
19 5 5 Not Used 15.1-24,*,*,1-3.4
20 9 5 Not Used *,*,*,*
21 10 6 Not Used *,3.4-8,3.4-8,*,8-99.9
22 12 6 Not Used *,*,*,*,8-99.9
23 10 6-10 Not Used *,*,*,*,3.4-8,3.4-8,3.4-8,3.4-8,3.4-8
- 0 - Not Used All axle spacings not defined above.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX I TC/C-540 CONFIGURATION
IANALYZE PAGE I-3
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
SPEED CLASSIFICATION: DEFAULT.SPD SETTINGS
Number of Bins: 16 (Speeds specified in mph)
Bin # Min Max
1 0 19.9
2 20.0 24.9
3 25.0 29.9
4 30.0 34.9
5 35.0 39.9
6 40.0 44.9
7 45.0 49.9
8 50.0 54.9
9 55.0 59.9
10 60.0 64.9
11 65.0 69.9
12 70.0 74.9
13 75.0 79.9
14 80.0 84.9
15 85.0 89.9
16 90.0 >90.0
LENGTH CLASSIFICATION: DEFAULT SETTINGS
N/A; iANALYZE does not use these settings
HEADWAY CLASSIFICATION: DEFAULT SETTINGS
N/A; iANALYZE does not report on these settings.
GAP CLASSIFICATION: DEFAULT SETTINGS
N/A; iANALYZE does not report on these settings.
TC/C-540 LANE CONFIGURATION
The Lane Configuration parameters listed below must be set to the values shown:
Item Setting Comments
Count Only Divide by 2 0
Total Number of Groups <=8
Lane Shift No
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX I TC/C-540 CONFIGURATION
IANALYZE PAGE I-4
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
REPORTS NOT COMPATIBLE WITH TC/C-540 DATA
The following iANALYZE reports cannot be generated using TC/C-540 data:
Report # Name
7 Lane by Status
11 Status by Hour
26 Autocalibration (Binned)
26 Autocalibration (Per Vehicle)
26 Autocalibration (Both)
33 Status by Weekday
40 Status Percent by Hour
41 Status percent by Weekday
44 Custom Trips – 200 (Washington)
45 Custom PVR – 201 (Oregon)
46 Custom Vehicle Classification – 202 (South Dakota)
47 Custom Truck Weight – 203 (South Dakota)
48 Custom Traffic Volume – 204 (South Dakota)
49 Custom Speed Data – 205 (South Dakota)
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX J CONVERT DOS OFFICE
IANALYZE PAGE J-1
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Appendix J CONVERT DOS OFFICE DOS Office was IRD’s previous reporting software package. If DOS Office has been used in the past to analyze data on this system, the IRD DOS Office reporting parameters and site definitions may be converted into the format used by iANALYZE.
To perform the conversion, navigate to the directory where the iANALYZE program files have been installed.
1. Start the program DOSOfficeConverter.exe. The window displaying the conversion parameters is displayed:
2. Browse to select the directory where IRD DOS Office is installed, the directory where iANALYZE is installed, and the default data folder.
3. Set the Time zone correction for the hours difference between the data site and Coordinated Universal Time (GMT).
4. Select the sites to be converted, and then click the Convert button. When the files have been converted, a completion of conversion message will be displayed.
5. Click the Exit button to close the conversion program.
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX K WHAT’S NEW
IANALYZE PAGE K-1
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Appendix K WHAT’S NEW
REVISION DESCRIPTIONS
Rev Z - Software Release 5.9
Added Reports and Descriptions:
CTWIM Lane By Class and Speed Lane By Class Lane By Sensor Errors and Statuses
Rev Y - Software Release 5.9
Includes the following changes:
Updated Purpose and Scope section Updated Document Overview Updated Acronyms Terms and Definitions Added new About window Added No Sites message Updated Create Reports Wizard| Required Info Updated Create Reports Wizard| Select Reports Updated Create Report Wizards| Data Filters Updated Site Editor Added Load User Info Failed message Updated Vehicle Classification Schemes Updated Data Filters| Report Chart Option Updated Vehicle Display Wizard| Display Settings Updated Display Format (both Text/Graphical) Updated Detailed Print Preview Added new TMG Data Exports window Added new TMG Data Station Desc 1 Added new TMG Data Station Desc 2 Added new TMG Data Export Specific Options Updated Template Editor| Required Info Added new Report Condition Reports (7) Updated Site Summary Report
Added/ Updated Section:
Vehicle Display Section 6.3 Site Editor section 7 to section 7.3.3 Setting Report Parameters section 9 FHWA TMG Reports Appendix B.14 Road Conditions Appendix B Site Summary Customizable WIM Compliance
Rev X - Software Release 5.8
Includes the following changes:
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX K WHAT’S NEW
IANALYZE PAGE K-2
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Added a Display Sort Decision option to the Display Settings tab of the View Vehicles window.
Added a Merged Vehicles Settings option to the Site Editor window.
Rev W - Software Release 5.7
Includes the following changes:
Added Length reports
Length by Hour
Weekday by Length Added Safety System reports
Safety System Site Summary
Safety System Class by Hour
Safety System Lane by Hour Added custom reports for New Mexico
Custom: FWHA TMG Vehicle Classification 4 Card (New Mexico) - 223
Custom: FHWA TMG Truck Weight 7 Card (New Mexico) – 224 Added support for iSINC data files which useCredential status flags (see
Appendix 0) – the following reports which involve statuses now include additional columns/rows for these statuses:
Status By Hour
Status By Weekday
Status Percent By Hour
Status Percent By Weekday
Lane By Status The iANALYZE About screen now indicates whether iANALYZE is running as a
32-bit or a 64-bit application.
Rev V - Software Release 5.6
Includes the following changes:
The report selection interface has been revised. Reports of similar types are now grouped under headings and may be selected either individually or as a group. Appendix A of this manual has been revised to reflect the new groupings.
Added Annual Summary Month by Hour report Added Annual Summary Weekday by Hour report Added Class by Hour report Added Class by Peaks – On the Hour report Added Class by Peaks – On the Quarter Hour report Added Lane by Peaks – On the Hour report Added Lane by Peaks – On the Quarter Hour report Added Top 100 Peaks – On the Hour report Added Top 100 Peaks – On the Quarter Hour report Added Weekly Summary – Weekday by Hour report Added Weekly Summary – Weekday by Peaks report iANALYZE will run as a 64 bit application on 64 bit machines or as a 32 bit
application on either 32 or 64 bit machines. Windows 8 and .Net 4.5 supported
Rev U - Software Release 5.5
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX K WHAT’S NEW
IANALYZE PAGE K-3
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Includes the following changes:
Added Average Speed by Hour report Added Custom ASCII PAT Speed Data report 220 Added Custom ASCII PAT Classification report 221 Added Custom ASCII PAT Truck Record report 222 The Speed by Hour report will interpolate for binned data when calculating the
statistics A PDF format copy of this manual will automatically be installed with the
iANALYZE software and will be available via the Help menu on iANALYZE. Placing the mouse cursor over a tab on the iANALYZE window and clicking the
middle button (or scroll wheel) will close that tab.
Rev T - Software Release 5.4
Includes the following changes:
Option added to swap left/right weights from DAW100 files DAW100 file names of YYYYMMDD.xxx format may now be used (the naming
format used for iSINC and 106x series files) All reports withStatus orError byHour ,Day ,Week orLane have additional
columns to display separate Binned Total and Per Vehicle Total. All reports withStatus orError byHour ,Day ,Week now display only
guaranteedNone status vehicles in theNone column; previouslyUnknown status vehicles were included if binned data was used.
Support for reading images for vehicles using the iSINC hourly archiving structure.
Added classification scheme LTPP_2013.typ to default installation. Note that this classification scheme does NOT have weight compliance information (no .cpl or .tbl files)
All ASCII output reports that use a comma separated value format are now output with a .csv file extension
Any ASCII reports created using the command line mode will now prepend the string provided with the –t option to the beginning of the output filename.
Rev S - Software Release 5.3
Includes the following changes:
added Custom Report 502: ASCII Data Validity Check added Custom Report 219: ASCII Raw Data Fixed Width the appearance of the Report Viewer had been revised in the Site Editor, Site IDs are no longer limited to 3 characters Lane/Direction of Travel specification in the TMG/FHWA window has changed;
lanes in a specified direction must either all be combined, or none may be combined.
non-combined lanes must all have unique identifiers.
single lanes in a direction must be set to Rightmost
the URL for iANALYZE updates/downloads has changed: http://www.irdinc.com/products/software/swdownload.php
requirements for Microsoft .NET Framework updated from version 3.5 to 4.0 the Everyone/Just Me option removed from the installation process (everyone
now has access to the files).
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX K WHAT’S NEW
IANALYZE PAGE K-4
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
startup splash screen added (same as the About information window)
Rev R
Rev R was a release required for inventory control only and had no changes to the iANALYZE software.
Rev Q - Software Version V
Includes the following changes:
Speed By Class PRN (Appendix Error! Reference source not found.) ASTM WIM Compliance Type I, II, and III (Appendix D.19.5)
Rev P - Software Version U
Includes the following changes:
iANALYZE can now process much larger volumes of data Updated user interface to provide easier access to all functions. ASCII type reports limited to .txt format output files. ASCII Reports screen output will display a link to the report file rather than a
listing of the ASCII text. WIM Error by Class report added
PRN format no longer supported.
Rev O - Software Version S
Includes the following changes:
Custom Report 216 – Overweight vehicle listing (Appendix E.1.17). Custom Report 217 – listing of overweight vehicles by day of the month
(Appendix E.1.18). Custom Report 217 – Table of overweight vehicles by class and percentage
overweight (Appendix E.1.19).
Rev N - Software Version R
Includes the following changes:
TCC and TRS sites can now select data by Date and Time Images added to text display. TRS WIM data with potentially erroneous records from tailgating vehicles and/or
vehicles with close spaced axles can be cleaned up. Speed by Hour Report may now have the number of speed bins specified in the
Report Parameters Edit Form. GVW by Hour, Month and Day of Month reports added. Column listing the average spacing between the drive axle (axles 2 and 3) for a
class 9 vehicle added to the TCC Validity Check Report Columns listing:
the average spacing between the drive axle (axles 2 and 3) for a class 9 vehicle
the average front axle weights for class 9 vehicles
the average left and right wheel weights for class 4 and above vehicles
the percentage difference between left and right wheel weights for class 4 and above vehicles
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX K WHAT’S NEW
IANALYZE PAGE K-5
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
added to the iSINC Data Validity Check report. The following information has been added to the footer of all reports:
Time stamp with the time and date on which the report was generated
iANALYZE Software version number. The description of the format of the resx language files has been updated to
reflect the current version used by the Microsoft Resx Schema. Installation instructions for Microsoft .NET Framework have been updated to
incorporate the most recent version, .NET Framework 4.0 (Appendix A.2).
REVISION HISTORY
Date Rev Description Update by
Y JHo
X SMc
W SMc
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX L LIST OF FIGURES, REPORTS AND TABLES
IANALYZE PAGE L-1
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Appendix L LIST OF FIGURES, REPORTS AND TABLES
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 3-1 iANALYZE Window: Layout Elements ..................................................... 3-1 Figure 3-2 Collapse Header ...................................................................................... 3-2 Figure 3-3 Main Taskbar ........................................................................................... 3-2 Figure 3-4 Window Dialogue Sample........................................................................ 3-3 Figure 3-5 Status Bar ............................................................................................... 3-4 Figure 3-6 Help and Admin Functions ....................................................................... 3-1 Figure 3-7 iANALYZE About Window ....................................................................... 3-1 Figure 4-1 No Sites Message ................................................................................... 4-1 Figure 4-2 Initial iANALYZE Launch: Site Editor ....................................................... 4-1 Figure 4-3 User Information Window ........................................................................ 4-2 Figure 4-4 Load User Info Failed Message ............................................................... 4-2 Figure 4-5 Organization Information Pane ................................................................ 4-3 Figure 4-6 Logo Graphics File .................................................................................. 4-3 Figure 4-7 Vehicle Classification Schemes Window ................................................. 4-6 Figure 4-8 Measurement Units ................................................................................. 4-7 Figure 5-1 Vehicle Display Wizard: Site/ Data Page ................................................. 5-1 Figure 5-2 Vehicle Display Wizard: Class/Lanes Page ............................................. 5-5 Figure 5-3 Vehicle Display Wizard: Display Settings Page ....................................... 5-6 Figure 5-4 Example: Good Weight Status Exceptions .............................................. 5-7 Figure 5-5 Display Format: Text ............................................................................... 5-8 Figure 5-6 Display Format: Graphical ....................................................................... 5-8 Figure 5-7 Creating Vehicle Display: Progress Message .......................................... 5-9 Figure 5-8 On-Screen Vehicle Summary Report: Graphical| With Images .............. 5-10 Figure 5-9 Vehicle Record Display Example: Text Display ....................................... 5-1 Figure 5-10 Vehicle Record Display Example: Graphical Display ............................... 5-2 Figure 5-11 Print Options Bar ..................................................................................... 5-3 Figure 5-12 Vehicle Display: Page Setup ................................................................... 5-3 Figure 5-13 Print Preview: Detailed Record Display ................................................... 5-4 Figure 5-14 Print Preview Toolbar .............................................................................. 5-4 Figure 5-15 Individual Vehicle Record: Printed With Photo Images ............................ 5-5 Figure 6-1 Create Reports Wizard; Required Info Page ............................................ 6-1 Figure 6-2 Select Output Option Entry ...................................................................... 6-2 Figure 6-3 Save Report File to Folder ....................................................................... 6-4 Figure 6-4 Select Input: Template ............................................................................. 6-4 Figure 6-5 Current Settings ...................................................................................... 6-5 Figure 6-6 Create Reports Wizard: Select Reports Panel ......................................... 6-6 Figure 6-7 Select Reports List Box ........................................................................... 6-7 Figure 6-8 Expanded Report Group: Error/Status Example ...................................... 6-7 Figure 6-9 Selected Report Group: FHWA Example ................................................. 6-7 Figure 6-10 Create Reports Wizard: Data Filters Page ............................................. 6-12 Figure 6-11 Data Filters: Chart Option Editor ............................................................ 6-15 Figure 6-12 Generating and Displaying Reports: Progress Message ........................ 6-16 Figure 6-13 On Screen Report Display: Tabular ....................................................... 6-17 Figure 6-14 On-Screen Report: Page Display and Zoom Bar ................................... 6-18 Figure 6-15 On-Screen Report: File Options and Page Navigation Toolbar .............. 6-19 Figure 6-16 Report Header Sample .......................................................................... 6-23 Figure 6-17 Tabular Report Preview ......................................................................... 6-25
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX L LIST OF FIGURES, REPORTS AND TABLES
IANALYZE PAGE L-2
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Figure 6-18 ASCII Report Display ............................................................................. 6-26 Figure 6-19 ASCII File: Reports Directory ................................................................. 6-27 Figure 6-20 ASCII File: Sample Report Display ........................................................ 6-27 Figure 7-1 Report Parameters Window ..................................................................... 7-1 Figure 7-2 Report Parameters: Report Display List Box ........................................... 7-3 Figure 7-3 Configurable Report Parameters: Row/ Column Table Display ................ 7-5 Figure 7-4 Speed by Hour: Customized Report Parameters ..................................... 7-7 Figure 7-5 Speed By Hour: Customized Data Range Intervals ................................. 7-7 Figure 7-6 Configurable Report Parameters: Spin Box Display................................. 7-7 Figure 7-7 Customizable WIM Compliance: Customized Report Parameters ........... 7-8 Figure 7-8 WIM Compliance: Customized Data Range Intervals .............................. 7-8 Figure 7-9 Configurable Report Parameters: Dropdown List Display ........................ 7-8 Figure 7-10 Road Condition Daily Summary: Customized Data Range Intervals ........ 7-9 Figure 8-1 Template Editor: Required Info Page ....................................................... 8-1 Figure 8-2 Select Template: Params Folder View ..................................................... 8-2 Figure 9-1 Site Editor Window .................................................................................. 9-1 Figure 9-2 Site Editor Operations Buttons ................................................................ 9-2 Figure 9-3 Site Name and ID Fields .......................................................................... 9-2 Figure 9-4 Site Name and ID: Add New .................................................................... 9-2 Figure 9-5 Site ID Entry ............................................................................................ 9-3 Figure 9-6 Site Name Entry ...................................................................................... 9-3 Figure 9-7 Select Site List Box.................................................................................. 9-4 Figure 9-8 Site Directory Locations ........................................................................... 9-5 Figure 9-9 Data File Default Site Directory ............................................................... 9-5 Figure 9-10 Image File Default Site Directory ............................................................. 9-5 Figure 9-11 Vehicle Timestamp .................................................................................. 9-6 Figure 9-12 Site Editor: Initial Configuration Dialogue Options ................................... 9-9 Figure 9-13 Site Editor: Setup Available Reports List ............................................... 9-10 Figure 9-14 Site Editor: ESAL Settings Dialogue ...................................................... 9-11 Figure 9-15 Site Editor: ESAL Settings; AASHTO Inputs Pane ................................. 9-14 Figure 9-16 Daylight Saving Time Adjustments ........................................................ 9-17 Figure 9-17 Daylight Savings window ....................................................................... 9-18 Figure 9-18 Time adjustment .................................................................................... 9-19 Figure 9-19 PRN Report Configuration ..................................................................... 9-20 Figure 9-20 Vehicle Merging Settings ....................................................................... 9-21 Figure 9-21 DAW100 Data Settings .......................................................................... 9-22 Figure 9-22 TRS WIM Data Settings ........................................................................ 9-23 Figure 9-23 FHWA TMG Exports Information ........................................................... 9-24 Figure 9-24 TMG Data: Station Description Information 2 ......................................... 9-28 Figure 10-1 Windows Regional and Language settings ............................................ 10-6 Figure 10-2 Changing to Gregorian Calendar ........................................................... 10-7 Appendix Figure 1 Side by Side Bar Chart ............................................................. C-1 Appendix Figure 2 Stacked Bar Chart .................................................................... C-1 Appendix Figure 3 3D Riser Chart .......................................................................... C-1 Appendix Figure 4 Line Chart ................................................................................. C-1 Appendix Figure 5 Area Chart ................................................................................ C-2 Appendix Figure 6 Pie Chart .................................................................................. C-2 Appendix Figure 7 FHWA Vehicle Classes ............................................................. H-1
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX L LIST OF FIGURES, REPORTS AND TABLES
IANALYZE PAGE L-3
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
LIST OF TABLES
Table 1 Vehicle Classification FHWA National Standard ...................................... 4-5 Table 2 Unit Measurements ................................................................................. 4-7 Table 3 User Configurable Reports and Parameters ............................................ 7-5 Table 4 AASHTO 1993 Tables ........................................................................... 9-13 Table 5 Terminal Serviceability Index of 2.5 ....................................................... 9-15 Appendix Table 1 Custom Report Parameters ...................................................... B-4 Appendix Table 2 TMG 2001 Station Description Record Detail ......................... D-73 Appendix Table 3 TMG 2001 Hourly Traffic Volume Record (# 3 Record) Detail . D-75 Appendix Table 4 TMG 2001 Vehicle Classification Record Detail ...................... D-77 Appendix Table 5 TMG 2001 Truck Weight Record detail ................................... D-79 Appendix Table 6 TMG 2013 Station Description Record Detail ......................... D-83 Appendix Table 7 TMG 2013 Hourly Traffic Volume Record Detail ..................... D-85 Appendix Table 8 TMG 2013 Vehicle Speed Record Detail ................................ D-88 Appendix Table 9 TMG 2013 Vehicle Classification Record Detail ...................... D-90 Appendix Table 10 TMG 2013 Weight Record Detail ............................................ D-92 Appendix Table 11 TMG 2013 Individual Vehicle Record (C Variant) Detail .......... D-94 Appendix Table 12 TMG 2013 Individual Vehicle Record (W Variant) Detail ......... D-96 Appendix Table 13 Individual Vehicle Record (C Variant) Detail ............................. E-6 Appendix Table 14 Custom: Vehicle Classification Record - 202 (C Variant) Detail E-8 Appendix Table 15 Custom Truck Weight - 203 Record Detail .............................. E-10 Appendix Table 16 Custom Traffic Volume - 204 Record Detail ............................ E-12 Appendix Table 17 Custom: Speed Data Report - 205 Record Detail ................... E-14 Appendix Table 18 Custom: Vehicle Class w Zeroes - 208 (C Variant) Detail ....... E-20 Appendix Table 19 Custom: Speed Data With Zeroes - 211 Record Detail ........... E-25 Appendix Table 20 Custom: ASCII Speed - 214 Record Detail ............................. E-29 Appendix Table 21 Custom: ASCII PAT Speed - 220 Record Detail ..................... E-41 Appendix Table 22 Custom: ASCII PAT Truck Records - 222 Record Detail ......... E-45 Appendix Table 23 Custom: FHWA TMG Truck Weight 7 Card Record Detail ...... E-51 Appendix Table 24 Custom: Data Validity Check (ASCII) - 502 Record Detail ...... E-60 Appendix Table 25 WIM Status Messages .............................................................. F-3 Appendix Table 26: Credential Status Messages ..................................................... F-4 Appendix Table 27: Sort Decision Status Messages ................................................ F-4
LIST OF REPORTS
Appendix Report 1 Summary: Site Summary .......................................................... D-3 Appendix Report 2 Summary: Annual Summary - Weekday By Hour ..................... D-5 Appendix Report 3 Summary: Annual Summary - Month By Hour .......................... D-7 Appendix Report 4 Summary: Month By Lane ........................................................ D-9 Appendix Report 5 Class: Class By Hour .............................................................. D-11 Appendix Report 6 Class: Class By Day Of Month ................................................ D-13 Appendix Report 7 Class: Class By Speed ........................................................... D-15 Appendix Report 8 Class: Truck Count Class By Day of Month ............................ D-17 Appendix Report 9 Class: Weekday By Class ....................................................... D-18 Appendix Report 10 Lane: Lane By Hour ................................................................ D-20 Appendix Report 11 Class: Lane By Class .............................................................. D-23 Appendix Report 12 Class: Lane By Class and Speed ........................................... D-25 Appendix Report 13 Volume: Weekday By Lane..................................................... D-26 Appendix Report 14 Volume: Weekly Summary - Weekday By Hour ...................... D-28
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX L LIST OF FIGURES, REPORTS AND TABLES
IANALYZE PAGE L-4
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Appendix Report 15 Peaks: Class By Peaks - On Hour .......................................... D-30 Appendix Report 16 Peaks: Class By Peaks - Quarter Hour ................................... D-32 Appendix Report 17 Peaks: Lane By Peaks - On Hour ........................................... D-33 Appendix Report 18 Peaks: Lane By Peaks - Quarter Hours .................................. D-34 Appendix Report 19 Peaks: Top 100 Peak Hours - On Hour................................... D-36 Appendix Report 20 Peaks: Top 100 Peak Hours - Quarter Hours ......................... D-38 Appendix Report 21 Peaks: Weekly Summary - Weekday By Peaks ...................... D-40 Appendix Report 22 Speed: Speed By Hour ........................................................... D-43 Appendix Report 23 Speed: Average Speed By Hour ............................................. D-44 Appendix Report 24 Speed: Weekday By Speed .................................................... D-45 Appendix Report 25 Length: Length By Hour .......................................................... D-47 Appendix Report 26 Length: Weekday By Length ................................................... D-48 Appendix Report 27 Error/Status: Lane By Error..................................................... D-50 Appendix Report 28 Error/Status: Lane By Status .................................................. D-52 Appendix Report 29 Error/Status: Error By Hour ..................................................... D-54 Appendix Report 30 Error/Status: Status By Hour ................................................... D-56 Appendix Report 31 Error/Status: Error By Weekday .............................................. D-58 Appendix Report 32 Error/Status: Status By Weekday............................................ D-60 Appendix Report 33 Error/Status: Status Percent By Hour ..................................... D-61 Appendix Report 34 Error/Status: Status Percent By Weekday .............................. D-63 Appendix Report 35 Error/Status: Error Percent By Hour ........................................ D-65 Appendix Report 36 Error/Status: Error Percent By Weekday................................. D-67 Appendix Report 37 Error/Status: Lane By Sensor Errors & Statuses ..................... D-69 Appendix Report 38 FHWA: TMG 2001 Station Description Report ........................ D-72 Appendix Report 39 FHWA: TMG 2001 Traffic Volume Report ............................... D-74 Appendix Report 40 FHWA: TMG 2001 Vehicle Classification Report .................... D-76 Appendix Report 41 FHWA: TMG 2001 Truck Weight Report ................................. D-78 Appendix Report 42 FHWA: TMG 2013 Station Description Report ........................ D-82 Appendix Report 43 FHWA: TMG 2013 Traffic Volume Report ............................... D-84 Appendix Report 44 FHWA: TMG 2013 Speed Data Report ................................... D-87 Appendix Report 45 FHWA: TMG 2013 Vehicle Classification Report .................... D-89 Appendix Report 46 FHWA: TMG 2013 Truck Weight Report ................................. D-91 Appendix Report 47 FHWA: TMG 2013 Detailed Per Vehicle Report ...................... D-93 Appendix Report 48 Weight: Class By Gross Vehicle Weight ............................... D-100 Appendix Report 49 Weight: Class By Front Axle Weight ..................................... D-102 Appendix Report 50 Weight: Class By Single Axle Weight .................................... D-104 Appendix Report 51 Weight: Class By Tandem Axle Weight................................. D-106 Appendix Report 52 Weight: Class By Tridem Axle Weight .................................. D-108 Appendix Report 53 Weight: Class By Quadrem Axle Weight ............................... D-110 Appendix Report 54 Weight: Avg GVW Class By Hour ......................................... D-112 Appendix Report 55 Weight: Avg GVW Weekday By Class .................................. D-114 Appendix Report 56 Weight: Max GVW Weekday By Class ................................. D-116 Appendix Report 57 Weight: GVW By Hour .......................................................... D-118 Appendix Report 58 Weight: GVW By Day Of Month ............................................ D-120 Appendix Report 59 Weight: GVW By Month ........................................................ D-122 Appendix Report 60 Weight Violation: Weight Violation By Hour .......................... D-124 Appendix Report 61 Weight Violation: Weight Violation By Class ......................... D-126 Appendix Report 62 Weight Violation: Weight Violation Class By Hour ................. D-128 Appendix Report 63 Weight Violation: Weight Violation By Weekday ................... D-130 Appendix Report 64 IRD ASCII: IRD ASCII Raw Data .......................................... D-131 Appendix Report 65 IRD ASCII: IRD ASCII Extended RAW Data Set ................... D-132
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX L LIST OF FIGURES, REPORTS AND TABLES
IANALYZE PAGE L-5
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Appendix Report 66 ESAL: Total ESAL Class By Hour ......................................... D-134 Appendix Report 67 ESAL: Max ESAL Weekday By Class ................................... D-136 Appendix Report 68 Safety System: Safety System Site Summary....................... D-138 Appendix Report 69 Safety System: Safety System Class By Hour Page 1 .......... D-140 Appendix Report 70 Safety System: Safety System Class By Hour Page 2 .......... D-141 Appendix Report 71 Safety System: Safety System Lane By Hour ....................... D-143 Appendix Report 72 Road Condition: Road Condition By Hour ............................. D-145 Appendix Report 73 Road Condition: Road Condition By Weekday ...................... D-147 Appendix Report 74 Road Condition: Road Condition Percent By Hour ................ D-149 Appendix Report 75 Road Condition: Road Condition Percent By Weekday ......... D-150 Appendix Report 76 Road Condition: Road Condition Changes Summary ........... D-152 Appendix Report 77 Road Condition: Road Condition Daily Summary .................. D-155 Appendix Report 78 Road Condition: Road Condition Monthly Summary ............. D-157 Appendix Report 79 External Data Items CSV - License Plate Information Report D-159 Appendix Report 80 External Data Items CSV - Identifier Tags ............................ D-160 Appendix Report 81 External Data items CSV – USDOT ...................................... D-161 Appendix Report 82 CTWIM: Lane By GVW Class 9 ............................................ D-164 Appendix Report 83 CTWIM: Lane By GVW Class 11 .......................................... D-166 Appendix Report 84 CTWIM: Lane By GVW Class 14 .......................................... D-168 Appendix Report 85 CTWIM: Avg Weights & Spacings By Speed Class 9 ............ D-170 Appendix Report 86 CTWIM: Avg Weights & Lengths By Speed Class 11 ............ D-172 Appendix Report 87 CTWIM: Avg Weights & Lengths By Speed Class 14 ............ D-174 Appendix Report 88 Other: Average Temperature By Hour .................................. D-176 Appendix Report 89 Other: Autocalibration ........................................................... D-178 Appendix Report 90 Other: WIM Error By Class – CVO ........................................ D-179 Appendix Report 91 Other Reports: PRN Speed By Class ................................... D-181 Appendix Report 92 Other: ASTM 1318 Type I WIM Compliance ......................... D-188 Appendix Report 93 Other: ASTM 1318 Type II WIM Compliance ........................ D-189 Appendix Report 94 Other: ASTM 1318 Type III WIM Compliance ....................... D-190 Appendix Report 95 Custom: TRIPS - 200 Report .................................................... E-2 Appendix Report 96 Custom: PVR (Per Vehicle Record) - 201 Report ..................... E-5 Appendix Report 97 Custom: Vehicle Classification Report - 202 ............................. E-7 Appendix Report 98 Custom: Truck Weight Report - 203 .......................................... E-9 Appendix Report 99 Custom: Traffic Volume Report - 204 ...................................... E-11 Appendix Report 100 Custom: Speed Data Report - 205 .......................................... E-14 Appendix Report 101 Custom: ASCII Raw Data - 206 Report ................................... E-15 Appendix Report 102 Custom: Heartbeat - 207 Report ............................................. E-18 Appendix Report 103 Custom: Vehicle Classification With Zeroes - 208 Report ....... E-19 Appendix Report 104 Custom: Axle Load Summary - 209 ........................................ E-22 Appendix Report 105 Custom: Traffic Volume With Zeroes - 210 ............................. E-23 Appendix Report 106 Custom: Speed Data With Zeroes Report - 211 ...................... E-25 Appendix Report 107 Custom: Hourly Volume Summary - 212 Report ..................... E-26 Appendix Report 108 Custom: ASCII Classification - 213 Report ............................. E-27 Appendix Report 109 Custom: ASCII Speed Report - 214 ........................................ E-29 Appendix Report 110 Custom: ASCII Truck Record - 215 ......................................... E-30 Appendix Report 111 Custom: Overweight Vehicle - 216 .......................................... E-34 Appendix Report 112 Custom: Overweight By Day Of Month - 217 .......................... E-36 Appendix Report 113 Custom: Count By Percentage Overweight - 218 .................... E-37 Appendix Report 114 Custom: ASCII Raw Data Fixed Width - 219 Report ............... E-38 Appendix Report 115 Custom: ASCII PAT Speed Report - 220 ................................ E-41 Appendix Report 116 Custom: ASCII PAT Classification Report - 221 ...................... E-42
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL APPENDIX L LIST OF FIGURES, REPORTS AND TABLES
IANALYZE PAGE L-6
DWG. # 82200101 REV Z 11/10/2015
Appendix Report 117 Custom: ASCII PAT Truck Records - 222 ............................... E-44 Appendix Report 118 Custom FHWA TMG Vehicle Classification: 4 Card Format .... E-47 Appendix Report 119 Custom FHWA TMG Vehicle Classification: 7 Card Format .... E-50 Appendix Report 120 Custom: FHWA TMG Station Description (SD) - 225 Report .. E-52 Appendix Report 121 Custom: Data Validity Check (TCC) - 500 ............................... E-54 Appendix Report 122 Custom: Data Validity Check (iSINC) - 501 ............................. E-57 Appendix Report 123 Custom: Data Validity Check (ASCII) - 502 Report ................. E-61
IANALYZE SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL
REV. DESCRIPTION DRAWN APPR APPR DATE CONFIDENTIAL
THIS DOCUMENT
CONTAINS
INFORMATION
PROPRIETARY TO IRD
AND IS THEREFORE
NOT TO BE DISCLOSED
TO OTHERS OR USED
FOR PRODUCTION
WITHOUT WRITTEN
PERMISSION FROM
INTERNATIONAL ROAD
DYNAMICS INC.
INTERNATIONAL ROAD DYNAMICS INC.
SASKATOON SASKATCHEWAN CANADA U CHANGES AS PER: ECO-4642 SMc AJP FSL 13-Jun-2013
V CHANGES AS PER: ECO-5103 SMc AJP FSL 28-Aug-2013 DWG. TITLE:
IANALYZE
SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S MANUAL W CHANGES AS PER: ECO-5358 SMc AJP FSL 10-Dec-2013
X CHANGES AS PER: ECO-5726 SMc AJP FSL 10-Jul-2014
Y CHANGES AS PER: ECO-8572 JHo JBo FSL 21-Sep-2015 SIZE: A DWG. No.: 82200101 REV.: Z
Z CHANGES AS PER: ECO-8818 JHo 06-Nov-2015 DIMENSIONS: N/A
FILENAME: 82200101.DOCX SHEET 1 of 1